JP6631559B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player There are some which execute advantageous privilege games.

JP 2012-217766 A

  However, there has been a demand for further interest in games.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of a player.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve this purpose, first a first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determining means is displayed a first display means, second determination means capable of executing a second determination, a second display means for second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determining means is displayed on said first display means executes a first award game if the first identification information for indicating the first determination result given as the result of the first determination by the first determination means is displayed, on the second display means, anda benefits game execution means for executing a second award game if the second identification information is displayed for indicating a particular second determination result as a result of the second determination by the second determining means , the easier the second determination is performed than the first determination And gaming state, the second game condition to be difficult to the second determination is performed than the first game condition, and the game state setting means capable of setting, the first game condition set by the player state setting means There a preferred period setting means capable of setting a first period as a preferred duration that obtained continuously, first end condition is satisfied when the first period set has elapsed by the advantageous period setting means or said second 1 anda termination means capable of terminating the first game condition when the different second end condition is satisfied and end condition, the game state setting unit, when the first condition is satisfied The first game state in which the second end condition can be satisfied can be set, and when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the first game state in which the second end condition cannot be satisfied can be set. A game state can be set .

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising a notifying unit capable of notifying that the first privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing unit .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first determination means capable of performing the first determination , the first display means for displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means, A second determination unit capable of executing a second determination , a second display unit on which second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination unit is displayed, and the first determination unit performing a first award game if the first identification information for indicating the first determination result given as the result of the first determination by means displays, on the second display means, said second determination means And a bonus game executing means for executing a second bonus game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed as a result of the second determination by the first determination. a first game condition to facilitate the second determination is performed than the A second game state that difficult to execute the second determination than 1 gaming state, a gaming state setting means capable of setting, preferably the set by the player state setting means first game condition that obtained continuously Advantageous period setting means capable of setting a first period as a period, and a first end condition which is satisfied when the first period set by the advantageous period setting means has elapsed, or different from the first end condition End means capable of terminating the first game state when a second end condition is satisfied, wherein the game state setting means is configured to execute the second end condition when the first condition is satisfied. Can be set, and when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the first game state in which the second end condition cannot be satisfied can be set. There is .

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, there is provided a notifying means capable of notifying that the first privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means .

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated an actual display screen. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the ending of the big hit game in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display content during the probability change in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is not changed after the start of the first special symbol hit change in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the 2nd special symbol hitting small during RUSH in a form. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is changing after the start of the first special symbol hit change in the first embodiment, and (b) is the first example. It is a figure showing an example of display contents at the time of change of the 2nd special symbol during change of the hit of the 1st special symbol in a form. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a jackpot A during RUSH in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a RUSH in the first embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a state in which the result of the variable display of the first special symbol was a jackpot C or a jackpot D. (A) is a figure which showed the card forgetting alert screen in 1st Embodiment, (b)-(d) is the timing chart which showed the timing which displays the card forgetting alert screen in 1st Embodiment. is there. It is the model which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of a main control device 110. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a small random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the 2nd random number table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normal use typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time saving / probability change table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a latent accuracy table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the general-purpose variation pattern table typically. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the stop display mode selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of an electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing performed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit determination processing performed by the MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart showing special figure 2 deviation variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design fluctuation execution process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 9 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 departure stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the status command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flow chart which showed a hit related process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which showed the big hit related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit related process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the update process of the remaining number of times performed by MPU in an audio ramp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation restart process performed by MPU in an audio ramp control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process for special figure 1 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process for special figure 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. 6 is a flowchart illustrating various counter updating processes executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 9 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a rush entry command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an additional effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of winning the big hit C in the probability change state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a relation figure between the game content of special figure 1 game after a probable change state was set up, and a grant in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is changing when the first special symbol hit symbol is stopped in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of stopping the 2nd special symbol during the hit symbol of the 1st special symbol in a form. It is the model which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection 2 table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection two table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a miss type selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of two tables for time saving and probable change. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol determination period setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing during fixed time performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design movement stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fixed period setting processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 departure stop processing 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining number update process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed temporary stop related processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the restart processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the symbol determination related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating various counter update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the second embodiment. It is a relation figure between the game contents of special figure 1 game after a probable change state was set up in 3rd Embodiment, and an award. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the big hit end in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the 1st fluctuation after a big hit. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents of the 3rd variation after a big hit in a 3rd embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display contents of a 4th variation after a big hit. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the 3rd fluctuation after a big hit in the case where the 3rd fluctuation after a big hit in 3rd Embodiment is a big hit, and (b) is between 1 to 3 fluctuations after a big hit. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the second variation after the big hit when the special figure 1 small hit is won. It is the model which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first three random numbers table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the three small random numbers table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the three big hit type selection tables, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the three small hit type selection tables. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the three variation pattern selection tables, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the three probability variation tables, and (c) is It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the probability change A table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probable variable B table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probable variable C table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the probable variable D table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of 3 tables for latents typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the probability change effect selection table typically. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing 3 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 departure stop process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing 3 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed winning information related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed big hit related processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit end process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed variable display setting processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process for probable change performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing a flow of a game when the special figure 1 big hit is won during the probable change state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows a flow when the time is shortened during the probable change state. It is a timing chart shown. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the RUSH rush by the number of times shortened in the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows that the RUSH in the special figure 1 big hit variation in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display contents to be notified. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning a fall lottery in the latent state in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a special figure in the latent state in 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display screen at the time of winning a big hit in 2. It is a figure showing an example of display contents in super RUSH in a 4th embodiment. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of a main control device 110 according to a fourth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection 4 table in 4th Embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically the composition of RAM of the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall lottery table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent mode selection table, and (c) is a fall diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the notification selection table typically. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing 4 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows game state update processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a status command process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a latent mode setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fall effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed small hit related processing 4 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed variable display setting processing 4 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fall notification process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 1 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning prize device for small hits. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device for small hits. It is the operation | work figure which looked at the variable winning prize apparatus for small hits from the back side. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of winning a special figure 1 big hit in the probable change state in 5th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of shortening the time during the probable change state in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the small hit in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display content during a small hit game. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents when a ball passes through a fall gate during a small hit game in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram in which a ball is moved from a fall gate during a small hit game. It is a figure showing an example of display contents at the time of not passing. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the small hit completion | finish, and (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display content in a latent state (invincible mode). It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario storage area. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit entrance passage process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the fall gate passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed hit related processing 5 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ball passage related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and has a window portion 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets 16a is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14. Through the glass unit 16, the front surface of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. At the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or a reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying during the payout of award balls and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 includes a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 is unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the component configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in a central portion thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally drops from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The entrance 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the exit 66, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled. (See FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with a thin plate material, and is formed such that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof cannot be seen by a player. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. 13 is fixed from the front side by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball on the front. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (the winning opening and the like are provided and fired) on the front surface of the game board 13. The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37A, which includes a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display along the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 62 is provided on the upper right side of the game area in front view (upper right side in FIG. 2). 37B). The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. Is In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) determines whether the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (upper first entrance 64b1, lower first entrance 64b2), It is configured to be properly used depending on whether or not the ball has entered the second entrance 640. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, an upper first ball entrance 64b1 and a lower first ball entrance 64b2 are provided as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. In the following description, when both the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are indicated, the description will be made using only the term of the first ball entrance 64.

  Specifically, when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change state, a time-saving state, or a normal state by a lighting state, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Or, the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability change jackpot or a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, a symbol that is out of the symbol, or a small hit symbol is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. , 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 receives a ball. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, there are prepared a 15R probability change jackpot, a 2R probability change jackpot, a 15R time reduction jackpot, and a 2R time reduction jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probable change jackpot” refers to a jackpot that shifts to (sets) the probable change state in which the maximum number of rounds is the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol after the 15 rounds of the jackpot. In this case, the “2R probability change jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to (sets) the probability change state in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot of two rounds. In addition, “15R time-saving jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the special symbol low-probability state and the normal symbol high-probability state are changed for a predetermined number of changes (for example, 50 times). ) The jackpot to be set, and the “2R time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is set for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times) after the two rounds of jackpot. .

  The “high probability state of special symbol” refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, in other words, a game state in which it is easy to shift to the special game state. The “normal symbol high-probability state” is a state in which the winning probability of a normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, in other words, a game state in which the electric accessory 64a is easily opened.

  In addition, in the game state (probable change state, time saving state) in which the “normal pattern high probability state” is set, not only the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, but also the lower first entrance 64b2. Is set longer than the gaming state (the latent state, the normal state) in which the “normally low probability state of the symbol” is set as the time during which the electric accessory 64 a accompanying the is opened. When the electric accessory 64a is in an open state (open state), the ball is moved to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 as compared to when the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (closed state). It is easy to win. Therefore, during the probable change state or during the time saving state, the ball can easily enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed can be increased.

  In addition, during the probable change state or the time saving state, the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, once. A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened at the time of hitting than in the normal state. In addition, during the probable change state or during the time saving state, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened and the electric accessory is activated once. At least one of the number of times the 64a is opened may be changed. Further, during the probable change state or during the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened per one time are not changed. Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, a ball entry (start winning prize) into one of the first entrance port 64 and the second entrance port 640 is used as a trigger to trigger the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing a variation display of a third symbol (decorative symbol) in synchronization with the variation display; There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that fluctuates and displays an ordinary symbol (second symbol) with the passage as a trigger.

  Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening that is opened at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  In this way, the decorative third symbol is dynamically displayed so as to correspond to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the dynamic of the third symbol is displayed. By configuring the display mode to be notified to the player, the display mode during the dynamic display period is unified with respect to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110 ( For example, even if the processing load of the main control device 110 is reduced by performing a blinking display mode in which lighting and extinguishment are repeated in units of 0.1 second, the operation of the third symbol set by the sound lamp control device 113 is not performed. For example, by dynamically setting the basic display mode based on the lottery result of the first symbol (special symbol), a dynamic display mode (second type) that can suggest to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit Production style using 3 symbols) It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a normal symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the winning lottery results in a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is moved. It is configured to be activated (operated to the open state) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is shorter in the high-probability state (probable change state, time-saving state) of the ordinary symbol than in the low-probability state (normal state, latent state) of the ordinary symbol as a game state. Is set to Accordingly, during the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2.

  Therefore, during the probable change state and during the time saving state, it is possible to set a game state in which a ball can easily enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. In the present embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are different depending on whether the game state is the probable change state or the time reduction state. , The same display mode is set as the background mode displayed so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the current game state. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to estimate the current game situation.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of game states in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are the same. Is configured to be set. Therefore, when the display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the current game state depending on the operation state of the electric accessory 64a. be able to.

  In the probable change state or the time reduction state, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per hit is increased. In the case where the ball easily enters the one entrance 64b2, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set shorter in the probable change state or in the time saving state than in the normal state, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state. Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per hit may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is mounted on the game board in a region (right region) on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured to be able to pass a part of a ball flowing down the game board among the balls fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device. If the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out of order. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be turned on.

  Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be briefly described. In the first embodiment, a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol), a time reduction state (a special symbol) Four game states are provided: a low-probability state of a symbol and a high-probability state of a normal symbol and a latent state (a high-probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol). The latent state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player.

  In other words, when the latent state is set, the fluctuation time for indicating the lottery of the second special symbol, which tends to be a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, is set to another game state. By setting the length to be shorter than the case where the lottery is performed, a lottery advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently.

  In the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. The first specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (1.5 seconds × 1 time, 0.2 seconds × 6 times, or 0.06 seconds × 8 times). For this reason, in the lottery of the second special symbol, even if it does not win the jackpot, a lot of chances to get the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a and to obtain the prize ball are given, so that the lottery of the first special symbol is given. It is more advantageous than lottery. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the result of the lottery in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened is referred to as "small hit".

  In the lottery of the second special symbol, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in the case of a small hit in addition to the big hit, so that the prize ball can be obtained in a latent state in which the variation time of the second special symbol is short. Can continue to increase. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in expectation of a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probable state is the most advantageous game state, but in the present embodiment, the latent state is more advantageous than the probable state, so that novel gaming properties can be provided.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). Fluctuating method). With this, even while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changing, if one of the symbols is stopped with a big hit or a small hit stop symbol, the other variable display indicates the remaining variable time or lottery. Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with the off symbol. Thus, during execution of the big hit or the small hit, the other variable display is fixedly displayed as the hit or the small hit, and it is possible to prevent a problem that the big hit or the small hit is started repeatedly.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 2, various configurations provided in the game area in the first embodiment and the flow of the ball fired toward the game area will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the present embodiment is configured such that the game area is divided into a left area and a right area by the variable display device unit 80 arranged in the center of the game area. .

  In the present embodiment, the shot ball does not pass through the anti-foul ball prevention valve 68 until the operation handle 51 is rotated 20 degrees (clockwise rotation) from the initial position (the state in which the player is not rotated). A ball is fired with a moderate firing intensity. Accordingly, the fired ball finally flows back through the firing flow path formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 to become a foul ball. The foul sphere that has flowed back and flows down passes through the start position of the firing flow path (the lower left end of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 2) and communicates with the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 1). (Not shown), and is returned to the upper plate 17. With such a configuration, even when a foul ball is generated when the player operates the operation handle 51 to fire the ball with a desired firing intensity, the foul ball remains in the firing path, and Can be suppressed.

  Next, when the operation amount (rotation amount) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (the state in which the player is not turning), the ball is fired at a firing intensity enough to flow down the left side region described above. In the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (81 degrees to 120 degrees, which is the maximum rotation amount of the operation handle 51), the ball is fired with a firing intensity enough to flow down the right side region described above.

  That is, the present embodiment is configured such that the region in which the ball flows can be made different based on the operation amount of the operation handle 51, that is, based on the operation of the player. Further, as will be described later in detail, in the first embodiment, when a game state that is advantageous to the player is set as the game state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is adjusted so that the ball flows down the left area. A game (hereinafter, referred to as a right-handed game) that is performed by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 so that the ball flows down the right area, rather than a game that is performed by adjusting (hereinafter, referred to as a left-handed game). It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the player only needs to maintain the state in which the operation handle 51 is rotated to the upper limit (the state in which the operation handle is rotated by 120 degrees) while the game state that is advantageous to the player is set. This makes it possible for the player to easily play an appropriate game.

  Next, the left region of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. Although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, the game state is a normal state (special symbol low probability state: ordinary symbol low probability state), a time reduction state (special symbol low probability state: ordinary symbol high probability state), a probable state. (Special symbol high probability state: normal symbol high probability state) and latent state (special symbol high probability state: normal symbol low probability state) are set. Also, a jackpot gaming state executed when the special symbol lottery result is won and a small jackpot gaming state executed when the special symbol lottery result is won are set. It is configured.

  In the case where the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state are set as the gaming state, the variable display device unit 80 is caused to perform a left-hitting game in which a ball flows down to the left area of the gaming board 13. Using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 provided to guide the player to the game method, and when the latent state is set, a right-handed game in which a ball flows down to the left area of the game board 13 Is performed so as to guide the player to the game method using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, during the big hitting game state and the small hitting game state, the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) of the player is guided according to the game state before winning.

  In addition, as a guidance method of each game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), for example, a game method suitable for the current game state is configured to be always displayed, or only after the game method is switched, The game method may be configured to be displayed. In the case where a game method (left-handed game in the present embodiment) that is easily set for a long period of time between a left-handed game and a right-handed game is a normal game, and a game method other than the normal game (right-handed game) is performed. The game method may be constantly displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the guidance display may not be performed when a left-handed game is performed.

  As in the present embodiment, when there are two types of game methods to be selected by the player, by not displaying a display mode for guiding one game method, the other game method can be guided. That is, it is possible to guide a plurality of game methods depending on whether or not to display one display mode. In the present embodiment, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the player to the game method, but the present invention is not limited to this. By not displaying the specific display mode as described above, a configuration for notifying the player of the game method may be used, or a configuration for notifying the player using sound or a lamp may be used.

  In the left area of the game board 13, a through gate 67 and a general winning opening 63 are provided. An upper first ball entrance 64b1 is provided below the variable display device unit 80 so that a ball flowing down the left area can enter the ball. A lower first ball inlet 64b2 provided with an electric accessory 64a is provided below the upper first ball inlet 64b1. This electric accessory 64a enters the lower first entrance 64b2 when a winning is achieved in a normal symbol (second symbol) lottery executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is configured to variably operate from a closed state (first state) in which the ball is difficult (impossible) to an open state (second state) in which the ball can easily (possibly) enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. ing.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, a state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (the special figure 1) can be executed (the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not executed, and the big hit game and the small hit game are executed) When the ball has entered the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 in a state (not performed), the lottery of the special drawing 1 is executed. That is, the entry of a ball into the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 is a trigger for executing the lottery of the first special symbol.

  Further, in a state where the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) cannot be newly performed (a state in which the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has already been performed, or a state in which the big hit game and the small hit game are executed). When a ball has entered the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2, a storage means is provided for storing the right of entering the ball up to a predetermined number (four). ing.

  Therefore, the player can continue playing the game while the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being executed, so that the operation of the game can be improved. In this embodiment, only the storage means for storing the right of the ball and the first special symbol are provided.

  80% of the balls flowing down the left area by the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67, and about 8% (8 out of 100 balls) of the shot balls enter the upper first ball entrance 64b1. A ball channel is formed by a plurality of structures such as a nail and a windmill so as to be spherical. When the motorized accessory 64a is in the closed state, approximately 0% of the balls enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2, and when the electric accessory 64a is in the open state, the lower first ball entry port is provided. The spherical flow path is formed so that about 25% of the balls enter 64b2. That is, it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball in the order of the lower first ball entry port 64b2 (the open state of the electric accessory 64a), the upper first entry port 64b1, and the lower first entry port 64b2 (the closed state of the electric accessory 64a). It is configured to be.

  As described above, the upper first entrance 64b1 and the lower first entrance 64b2 are configured so as to provide the player with the privilege of paying out a prize ball in addition to the privilege of executing the lottery of the first special symbol. Each time one ball enters, four prize balls are paid out to the player. In the present embodiment, the same number (four) of prize balls are provided both when a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 and when a ball enters the lower first entrance 64b2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different number of prize balls may be set for each.

  On the other hand, a second entrance 640 and a first variable winning device 65 are provided in the right area of the game board 13. The second entrance 640 is configured so that a lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters, and the plurality of entrances 640 are formed so that about 50% of the balls flowing down the right area enter. A ball channel is formed by the nail. Here, the ball that has not entered the second entrance 640 flows down to the first variable winning device 65 provided below the right region.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the time (variation time) from when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed to when the lottery result is displayed is long. In the state where the fluctuation time of the time (10 minutes) is set and the latent state is set, the short fluctuation time (1 second) is set.

  That is, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, a right-handed game is performed rather than a left-handed game and a ball being thrown into the first entrance 64 to execute the lottery of the first special symbol. It is easier to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 so as to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, and the ball is easier to enter. However, since the fluctuation time for a long time (10 minutes) is set, the game efficiency is reduced. It will be very bad. Therefore, in the normal state, the player plays the left-handed game and executes the lottery of the first special symbol.

  Also, since the second entrance 640 is set with one prize ball, a right-handed game is performed in a state where the normal state is set, and a ball fired in a right-handed game at a rate of about 50%. When the ball is made to enter the second ball entrance 640, the ball does not increase.

  Further, when the time saving state or the probable change state is set as the gaming state, the state is usually a high probability state of the symbol, and the electric accessory 64a is easily opened. However, since the through gate 67, which is a trigger for drawing a normal symbol for opening the electric accessory 64a, is provided only in the left side area, the lower first ball entry port 64b2 makes it easier for the ball to enter than in the normal state. It is configured to make the player play a left-handed game in order to make the ball enter the ball.

  On the other hand, in the state in which the latent state is set as the game state, the symbol usually has a low probability state and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to open, and as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol is short. Since a fluctuation time of (one second) is set, it is appropriate to perform a right-handed game and execute a lottery of the second special symbol. Here, in the first embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is won in the small hit (the winning probability is about 1/2). When a small win is won, the first variable prize device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds) as a small hit game, and 10 balls are entered into the first variable prize device 65 for one ball. The prize balls are provided.

  That is, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, by continuously performing the right-handed game to the player, the lottery of the second special symbol aiming at the small hit winning, the small hit game, Can be executed continuously.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a second variable winning device 650 is provided at the bottom of the game area. The second variable prize winning device 650 is opened such that when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, the revolving door 650f is operated to the front side so that a ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a. Is what is done. The second variable winning device 650 is configured so that a ball that has flowed down the left area by a left-handed game and a ball that has flowed down the right area by a right-handed game can equally enter. Therefore, when the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed, the game method before the jackpot game is executed may be continuously executed, and the game method may be provided to the player. Can be suppressed from being complicatedly changed.

  When a ball enters the above-described first entrance 64 (upper first entrance 64b1, lower first entrance 64b2), a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 ) Is turned on, and a jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) due to the turning on of the first entrance switch, and a display according to the lottery result is shown in the first symbol display device 37A. It is.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) performs a jackpot lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, the first entrance 64 is a winning opening where four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and the second entrance 640 receives one ball when a ball enters. It is one of the winning holes paid out as prize balls. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 Are the same (both are four) and different from the number of prize balls (one) paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640, but the ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1. The number of prize balls paid out in this case may be different from the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

  In this case, for example, the number of prize balls at the upper first entrance 64b1 is set to four, and the number of prize balls at the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to two, so that a normal state in which balls are difficult to enter is set. In this case, the privilege for the ball entering the upper first entrance opening 64b1 is increased, and when a specific game state (probable change state, time saving state) is set, the ball can easily enter. Even if a ball frequently enters the one entrance 64b2, the player may not be allowed to excessively acquire a prize ball, or the upper first entrance 64b1 may have four prize balls, and the lower first entrance 64b1 may have four prize balls. The number of prize balls in the entrance 64b2 may be set to five, and when a specific game state (probable change state, time saving state) is set, a great privilege may be given to the player.

  Also, the same number of award balls that are paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the same number of award balls that are paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 (for example, both are 5). ).

  An electric accessory 64a is attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2. The electric accessory 64a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (restricted state), so that the ball is hard to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. I have. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display (normal symbol lottery) performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory is displayed. 64a is in an open state (permissible state), and the ball is in a state where it easily enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol during the probable change state and during the time reduction state is higher than that during the normal state, and the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is shorter. , The symbol “○” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened (allowed) increases. Further, during the probable change state or the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 64a is opened becomes longer than during the normal state. Therefore, during the probable change state or during the time saving state, it is possible to create a state where the ball can easily enter the lower first entrance opening 64b2 as compared with the normal state.

  As described above, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, that is, the entrance with the electric accessory 64a, is in a state where the ball is easy to enter according to the set gaming state (first state). It is possible to set a state where the ball is hard to enter (second state). In other words, from the viewpoint of ease of ball entry, the first state is an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous, and the second state is an unfavorable game state in which the player is disadvantageous (more disadvantageous than the first state). It becomes.

  Here, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed) and when the ball enters the second entrance 640 (the lottery of the second special symbol) Is executed), the jackpot probability is the same, and when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, a lottery with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280) is executed. When the high probability state of the special symbol is set, a lottery in which a large hit is made with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) that is easier to win than the low probability state is executed. However, the type of the jackpot selected (set) in the case of a jackpot is set to be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows the player to change the way of firing the ball (game method) to “left-handed (left-handed game)” and “right-handed” in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Hitting (right-handed game) ". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided a sticking space K 1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, and the like. The stamp, etc. stuck to the sticking space K 1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball flowing down the game area and not winning (entering) any of the winning ports (entrance ports) 63, 64b1, 64b2, 65a, 640, 650a is illustrated through an out port 66. You will be guided to the ball discharge path. The out port 66 is disposed below the lower first ball input port 64b2. In the first embodiment, one out port 66 is provided in the game area. However, other configurations may be used, and two or more out ports 66 may be provided.

  By providing a plurality of the out ports 66 in this manner, it is necessary to form a ball flow path for finally consolidating the balls fired in the game area into one place (where the out ports 66 are provided). Since there is no more, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging various devices constituting the game area. Specifically, for example, an out port dedicated to a ball flowing down the left region and an out port dedicated to a ball flowing down the right region may be provided. When a plurality of out ports are provided, a notifying means for notifying a player that the entrance port is an out port may be provided. As a result, a situation occurs in which no privilege is given even though the ball has entered the entrance (actually, the exit) provided in the game area, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. be able to.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is provided with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (fire launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol (decorative symbol dynamically displayed in correspondence with the dynamic display of the first symbol) is composed of nine types of main symbols numbered "1" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numerals “1” to “9” on a rear symbol imitating various animals. Specifically, for example, a number “1” is assigned to a back symbol imitating an elephant, and a number “2” is assigned to a rear symbol imitating a lion. In this manner, by displaying the third symbol in a display mode in which the rear symbol and the number are associated with each other and combining them, the display mode of the rear symbol (for the player) even during the dynamic display of the third symbol is displayed. The type of the third symbol is roughly grasped by the color, outline, size, etc.), and when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the number attached to the rear symbol is identified to ensure the type of the third symbol. Can be grasped.

  In the first embodiment, the combination of the rear symbol and the number forming the third symbol is not changed, but the combination of the rear symbol, the display mode, and the number may be changed. good. With this configuration, it is possible to display a lottery result different from the lottery result (the type of the third symbol) predicted by the player while the third symbol is dynamically displayed, and to the player. A game that does not get tired can be provided. Also, by setting the combination pattern of the rear symbol and the number as the third symbol to be regularly varied according to, for example, the lottery result of the special symbol and the set game state, the third symbol is obtained. It is possible to enhance the accuracy of the prediction of the game content based on the display mode (combination of the rear symbol and the number) stopped and displayed, and it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to predict.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a jackpot, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is finished. It is configured to generate a jackpot later. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the small symbol is won as a special symbol lottery result, and when the special symbol lottery result is a small symbol, the main symbol is a specific combination (for example, “341”). Is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the combination of the main symbols stopped and displayed is made different according to the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the lottery result can be easily understood by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same main symbol may be stopped and displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and when the special symbol is a small hit.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and about 3/4 of the upper part is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. Approximately 1/4 of the lower side is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, L3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are periodically scrolled in the left and right direction (usually from right to left) to be changed and displayed. Is performed. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, the slanted line going down to the right and the slanted line going up to the right in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped (fixed display) on the activated lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1 → the lower symbol row L3 → the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), it is determined whether or not the player is the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the big hit (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big hit). Overlooked or not) can be suppressed. In addition, when the combination of the big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of the main symbols) is arranged on the activated lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, the big hit video (opening effect) is displayed as the big hit.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to departure, and there is a reserved ball, after a stop display (confirmation display) for one second, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the reserved ball. Is started. When there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the departure of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for one second in a state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. . This state is continued until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or until a new ball enters one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped (determined), a demonstration effect (a customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. .

  In spite of the fact that a player has continuously fired a ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), there is rarely a situation where there is no ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. There are many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), because the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all because the player has quit the game. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The fluctuation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance port 64. In the present embodiment, the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37). In this case, the number of entered balls is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the retained number of balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is currently reserved. In the present embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol can be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not held and stored. For this reason, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 4A, the sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm, and the third symbol is dynamically displayed (variable display) in the main display area Dm. (Fluctuating effect) is performed, and a notice effect, a display of the number of characters and the number of held balls, etc. are executed in the sub-display area Ds. However, FIG. It is not necessary to form each area indicated by. For example, when the player pays attention to an effect for indicating whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the display area of the sub display area Ds A powerful effect may be executed by reducing (erasing) and enlarging the display area of the main display area Dm. On the other hand, when the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol or the game guidance for explaining the contents of the game in the future is emphasized and executed in the sub display area Ds, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced, By expanding the display area of the display area Ds, an effect that is easy for the player to understand may be executed.

  Further, an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols and an area for executing a notice effect may be formed in the main display area Dm in accordance with the set game state and the effect mode being executed. An area for executing the variable display of the third symbol may be provided in the display area Ds.

  Next, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), a total of nine main and sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. On the right and left sides of the display area Dm, three main symbols and three sub symbols are displayed. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state. Further, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol indicating a lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper central portion of the main display area Dm. In this small area Dm1, the variable display of three third symbols in a simple mode composed of only one of the numbers “1” to “9” is executed. Also in this small area Dm1, a big hit is started by stopping and displaying three third symbols composed of the same numeral. The reason why the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simpler form than that of the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is that it is basically in the normal state or the probable state. This is because the lottery of the first special symbol is executed and the lottery of the second special symbol is hardly executed.

  Therefore, by displaying the variable display of the first special symbol mainly executed in a larger display area, the game result is more clearly displayed. In the following description, a variable display of a special symbol which is mainly executed in each game state (a variable display of a first special symbol corresponds to a normal state or a probable change state) is referred to as a main fluctuation. A change display of a special symbol that is hardly executed when the regular game method is performed (the change display of the second special symbol corresponds to the normal state or the probable change state) is referred to as a sub-change.

  Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state in which the probable change state is set, if the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, the pachinko machine 10 will be for a long time (up to 10 minutes) A fluctuation display (dynamic display) is executed, and at the timing when the fluctuation display is started, the gaming state shifts from the probable state to the latent state. During the period in which the latent state is set (the period from the time when the variable display that becomes a big hit is executed to the time when the variable display ends and the big hit game is started), the lottery of the second special symbol is performed. It is configured to execute a game aiming at a small hit. Therefore, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is the main fluctuation, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is the sub fluctuation.

  In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the same number of reserved symbols as the number of reserved balls of the first symbol are displayed. At the start of the fluctuating display based on the respective reserved balls corresponding to the reserved symbols, an effect of entering the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1 is executed. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball has been started. In addition, in the small area Ds1, an announcement effect is performed such that the reserved symbol sometimes performs a special operation or another character appears.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 may be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, but three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 can be held. Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of reserved balls for the maximum reserved number, and displaying the number of reserved balls according to the number of the reserved lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a flow of a variable display effect of the third symbol in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the contents of the fluctuating display effect executed in response to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the fluctuating state of each special symbol. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a variable display (dynamic display) for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display (dynamic display) for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. And) can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

  Then, in a state in which a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set, when a variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, a high probability state of the normal symbol is obtained. Is shifted to a low probability state, and the gaming state is shifted from a probable state to a latent state. While the latent state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for indicating the result of the lottery of the second special symbol is set to be short, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed many times. This is the period during which it is possible (the special figure 2 fluctuation advantage period).

  In the present embodiment, since it is configured to win the small hit with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is performed during the period in which the latent state is set as the game state. , A small win game executed frequently is executed, and a gaming state advantageous to a player who can acquire many prize balls (an advantageous state in FIG. 2) is achieved.

  As described above, the period during which the latent state is set in the present embodiment (the special figure 2 fluctuation advantage period) is during the fluctuation display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that has won the jackpot in the probability change state. Because the special figure 1 is in the process of changing the big hit, when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends, the big hit game is executed. In this way, since a plurality of states (the special figure 2 advantageous state and the jackpot game state) that are advantageous to the player are continuously set, it is possible to continuously give the player various benefits. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in one special symbol (special symbol 2) and a small hit game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special symbol 1) is interrupted (variation display period). Is suspended), and when the small hitting game is finished, the suspended variable display period measurement is restarted. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hit game, and therefore, regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period, First, it is possible to provide a certain special figure 2 fluctuation advantage period to the player.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) that is changing is displayed as a stop display mode indicating that it is off. It is configured to stop forcibly. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit game is executed during a big hit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the fluctuation of the other special symbol is made different according to the result of the lottery of one special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot (a lottery result that can give the first privilege to the player), the variation of the other special symbol is changed to the fact that the lottery result is out of order. When the stoppage is displayed in the display mode shown and the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (a lottery result in which a second privilege different from the first privilege can be given to the player), the fluctuation of the other special symbol is changed. Is stopped until the grant of the second privilege ends (until the small hit game ends), and is restarted after the grant of the second privilege ends. In addition, when the lottery result of one special symbol is out of order, the change of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

  With this configuration, it is possible to change the lottery content (the lottery result, a period until the lottery result is displayed) of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of the one special symbol, A variety of playability can be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can provide a privilege to the player, the control content for the other special symbol variation is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that gives the most advantageous privilege (big hit game) to the player, the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result that gives the privilege. Even if the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of order, it is suppressed that the player is given an excessive privilege, and the lottery result (small hit) in which the privilege given is smaller than the big hit game In the case of, without changing the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed, without changing the lottery result during the small hit game, the fluctuation table It is possible to interrupt only the measurement period.

  Therefore, in a state in which a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1 and special figure 2) are simultaneously changing, by giving the least advantageous privilege to the player, the most advantageous privilege given later is given. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the game is not performed, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is uncomfortable.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the game state, a short-term (0.5 second) variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2), The small hit game is configured to be executed frequently. The condition in which the latent state is set as the gaming state is defined as a case in which the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state in which the probability changing state is set, and the condition in which the latent state is ended is defined as the first special symbol. Is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, and the big hit game is executed. Therefore, the big hit game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small hit game. A second game period is set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be set continuously, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

  Next, display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in each gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As illustrated in FIG. 5, when the jackpot game state is set as the game state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays the content of the jackpot game, for example, the round of the currently executing jackpot game. A round number display mode for indicating the number, an acquisition amount display mode for indicating the number of obtained balls, and a type for indicating the type of the jackpot game being executed (the number of rounds, a game state set after the end of the jackpot game) The number of jackpots won during the period in which the non-normal state (probable change state, latent state, time saving state) is continuously set without setting the normal state as the suggestion display mode and the game state (the so-called number of consecutive chan) ) Is displayed.

  Then, at the timing when the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 5A), if the current jackpot type is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) for which a probable change state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends, As shown in FIG. 6A, an effect mode (chance zone mode) aiming at setting a latent state advantageous to the player is displayed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6 (a), the display contents of the big hit game end screen (ending screen) will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the big hit game end screen (ending screen). As shown in FIG. 6A, on the ending screen of the big hit game, a comment of “chance zone entry!” Indicating that the probability change state is set after the big hit game is finished is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Then, in the main display area Dm, a character 811 that is displayed during a period in which the probability change state or the latent state is set is displayed. The character 811 is configured not to appear (not be displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the player is set to display the character 811 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the period in which the character 811 is displayed. (A gaming state more advantageous than the normal state).

  With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline of the currently set game state by grasping whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen. Can be provided.

  In addition, a comment "Aim for RUSH !!" is displayed to aim at setting a latent state in the main display area Dm. Furthermore, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the character "left-handed" is displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to perform a left-handed game. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the player is playing a left game aiming at the left region when the probable change state is set. In the present embodiment, the second variable prize device 650 that is opened during the jackpot game has a ball that is fired by a left-handed game (a ball that has flowed down the left area) and a ball that is fired by a right-handed game. The characters ("left-handed" and "right-handed") which are arranged at positions where prizes can be won (downstream of the game area (see FIG. 2) and are displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game, ie, The game method for guiding during the big hit game is configured to be variable according to the game state before the big hit game is executed.

  Specifically, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined, and when it is determined that the game state (the normal state, the time saving state, the probable change state) in which the left-handed game is guided is set as the guidance display during the jackpot. If "left-handed" is displayed, and if it is determined that the game state in which the right-handed game is guided (probable state), "right-handed" is displayed as the guidance display during the big hit. Thereby, when the big hit game is executed, the trouble of changing the game method for the player can be saved.

  Also, in the main display area Dm, a special figure 1 display area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and a special figure 2 display area for displaying a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Dm2 is formed, and according to the example shown in FIG. 6A, “777” is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (displaying the ending screen). Is displayed. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, "-" is displayed as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not variably displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described non-variable display mode is configured to be displayed when the special symbol has not been variably displayed even once since the power was turned on. By displaying the non-variable display mode, it becomes possible for the player to predict a past game history (variation history of a special symbol).

  In the present embodiment, the above-described non-variable display mode is configured to be displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to display a predetermined display mode (initial display mode) indicating a deviation. Alternatively, if it is determined that the elapsed time since the previous execution of the variable display has exceeded a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes), the display displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 You may comprise so that an aspect may be changed and displayed to an initial display aspect or a non-variable display aspect.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In the state where the probable change state is set as the game state (see FIG. 5B), the game state is such that the lottery of the first special symbol can be easily executed by the left-handed game. In other words, the probability change state is such that the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, so that the electric accessory 64a is easy to open, and the ball easily enters the lower first entrance 64b2.

  The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this probable change state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the probable change state. As shown in FIG. 6 (b), a comment “in the chance zone” indicating that the current gaming state is the probable change state is displayed in the sub display area Ds so as to scroll horizontally (from right to left). You.

  In the main display area Dm, an effect in which the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right) is displayed. Then, “left-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, and a changing display indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. At this point in time, the second special symbol is not newly changed from the state shown in FIG. 6A (because the ball has not entered the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game). In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the non-variable display mode "-" is continuously displayed.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of action display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the probable change state, and the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the first special symbol in the probable change state is stored. The motion display pattern of the character 811 is set differently according to the setting. Thereby, it is possible to provide a pleasure of allowing the player to predict whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol will win a jackpot during the probable change state.

  After the display screen shown in FIG. 6B is displayed, when the variable display for indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the jackpot is executed, the display shown in FIG. The screen is displayed. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram showing the display content displayed when the variable display in which the jackpot has been won is started in the probable change state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state shifts from the probable state to the latent state at the timing when the fluctuation display indicating that the first special symbol has won the jackpot during the probable state is started. It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, at the timing when the change of the first special symbol starts, the gaming state shifts to a state (latent state) advantageous to the player, and thus the change of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 of the display screen. In the state where the variable display mode indicating that the display is being executed is displayed, the display mode of the effect symbol 813 (the display mode of “333”) for indicating to the player that the gaming state has shifted is stopped. Is done. Thereby, the player can be made to think that the gaming state has shifted from the probable state to the latent state by the stop display of the effect symbol 813. Further, in the present embodiment, since the same display mode as the display mode of the third symbol is used as the effect symbol display mode, the effect symbol display mode that is stopped and displayed is a display for indicating the special symbol lottery result. It can be considered as an embodiment.

  The present embodiment is configured such that, during the period in which the latent state is set, a large number of small hit games can be executed by frequently performing the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, at least during the period in which the latent state is set, “right-handed” for indicating a right-handed game to the player is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "RUSH rush in! Right-handed" is displayed to indicate that the latent state has been set as the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect symbols displayed in the main display area Dm are stopped and displayed without changing the effect mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of the change of the first special symbol that has won the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the gaming state has shifted as if the lottery result of the effect symbol was selected.

  Then, during the latent state in which the right-handed game is continuously executed (during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol), when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 7B. As shown, an effect mode for indicating that a small win has been won is displayed. Here, the display contents when the latent state is set will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the latent state.

  According to FIG. 7 (b), in the state where the latent state is set (during RUSH), when the lottery of the second special symbol is won with a small hit, the first special symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. Is displayed in the display area Dm2 to indicate that is a change (during the change of the big hit), and a display mode "341" indicating that the small hit has been won is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. .

  Then, the treasure chest 812 displayed as the effect mode during the RUSH is opened, and "V" for indicating the small hit is displayed as the effect symbol 813 for indicating the game result from the inside. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the small hit is won in the second special symbol during the latent state (during the RUSH) and the small hit game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 that is rotated when a small hit is won is provided in the right area, and the player can play a game using the same game method (right-handed) as in the latent state. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, even if the small hit game is frequently executed during the latent state, the player only needs to continue the right-handed game, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. it can.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probable change state, the latent state is set from the start of the jackpot fluctuation, and the latent state is set. Is set so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

  Therefore, at the same time when the latent state is set (based on the fact that the latent state is set), the player is notified of the period in which the latent state is set (FIG. 7A ))reference.

  However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can simultaneously change the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol is also changed to the second special symbol in the state where the probable change state is set. Both special symbols may fluctuate.

  In such a case, even if a display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) has been set is displayed at the timing when the latent state is set (see FIG. 7A), the second state that is currently fluctuating is displayed. Until the special symbol stops fluctuating, the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state cannot be executed, and the small hitting game is not executed irrespective of the RUSH state. There was a fear.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for shifting to the latent state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probable change state), the variation state of the second special symbol (whether there is a variation, (The remaining fluctuation period), and based on the result of the determination, the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is made different.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5 and FIG. 8, when the condition for shifting to the latent state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by lottery of the first special symbol during the probable change state), the second special symbol ( The effect contents when the special figure 2) fluctuates will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, when the second special symbol is changing at the time when the jackpot change of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability change state is set (see (c) of FIG. 5), A “super chance zone” in which the degree of expectation for setting the RUSH state is higher than the “chance zone” for indicating the state is displayed.

  Here, the display contents of the display screen in the “super chance zone” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a diagram illustrating a case where a change in which a jackpot has been won in the first special symbol is executed during the second special symbol change in the probability change state. In other words, this “super chance zone” is a state in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, but the fluctuation display of the second special symbol executed before the latent state is set is displayed. This is a display mode showing a state in which the processing has not been completed.

  When the “super chance zone” is set, a comment for indicating “in the super chance zone” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed so as to move at a higher speed than in FIG. 6B, so that the character 811 moving at a high speed can easily find the treasure box 812.

  In the special figure 1 display area Dm1, a "variable display mode" for indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed, and in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, a latent state is set. The “variation display mode” that has been changing since the time before is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The display screen of the “super chance zone” shown in FIG. 8A is displayed until the timing at which the special figure 2 change, which is executed across the timing of shifting the gaming state from the probable state to the latent state, ends. When the change in the special figure 2 is completed (see FIG. 5D), a “RUSH” entry screen is displayed to notify the player that “RUSH” has been entered (see FIG. 8B).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8B, the contents of the screen that has entered “RUSH” via the “super chance zone” will be described. FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen that has entered “RUSH” via the “super chance zone”. As shown in FIG. 8B, in the main display area Dm, an effect symbol 813 is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a display mode for notifying the player that the player has entered "RUSH" is displayed. Then, “Right” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to guide the game method during the rush game. At this time, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a fluctuating display mode for indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating (during the big jackpot fluctuation), and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 indicates a departure. Display mode “346” is stopped and displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. During a rush game (during a RUSH), that is, during a jackpot change in the first special symbol, a game in which a lottery of a second special symbol in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is set by performing a right-handed game is frequently performed. Is executed. In addition, although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in a state where one of the special symbols has won a jackpot (including a change in the jackpot), it is possible to win the jackpot by lottery of the other special symbol. It is configured so as not to exist. Therefore, in the lottery of the second special symbol during the rush game, the lottery result is either a small hit or a loss. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (about 1/2).

  Therefore, during the rush game, the small hit is won with a probability of 1/2, and the game of acquiring the prize ball by the small hit game is continued until the big hit change of the first special symbol ends. In other words, even if the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed during the rush game, the jackpot is not won by the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol is fully used. Rush games can be offered.

  Then, when the jackpot change of the first special symbol ends (see FIG. 5 (f)), a screen corresponding to the jackpot type which has been won this time is displayed (see FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b)). Here, the display screen at the time of the end of the rush game (when the special figure 1 big hit variation stops) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b).

  FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing display contents when a big hit (big hit A (see FIG. 16A)) which is advantageous to the player is set, and FIG. Is a diagram schematically showing display contents when a jackpot (jackpot D (see FIG. 16A)) disadvantageous to the player is won.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, at the timing when the third symbol (“777”) indicating that the jackpot A has been won (see FIG. 16A) is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the departure is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, an effect symbol 813 (“super-V”) indicating that the player has won the jackpot advantageous to the player from the treasure box 812 is displayed, and a comment “congratulations” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this case, the character “Right” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, which is the same game method as in the latent state.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 9B, at the timing when the third symbol (“666”) indicating that the jackpot D has been won (see FIG. 16A) is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the departure is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, an effect symbol 813 (“End?”) Indicating that the player has won the jackpot disadvantageous to the player from the treasure box 812 is displayed, and a comment “Please return to left-handed” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Is done. In this case, in order to suggest to the player that the rush game has ended, the character "left-handed" which is the same game method as in the normal state is displayed in the guide display area Dm3.

  Note that FIG. 9B shows the display screen when the jackpot D (see FIG. 16A) is won. However, when the jackpot C (see FIG. 16A) is won, that is, the jackpot D The same jackpot game as that described above is executed, but the same display screen is displayed even when the gaming state set after the jackpot is won for a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot D. It is configured to execute an effect of performing a right-handed game as an effect. Thereby, a surprising effect can be provided to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a card forgetting alert screen displayed for a player will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is necessary to insert a card (valuable medium) into a card unit installed along with the pachinko machine 10 in order to borrow a ball used for a game. In such a pachinko machine 10, when the player has won many prize balls by playing the game, the player forgets to insert the card into the card unit and forgets to take the card at the end of the game. There was something to do.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is configured to be displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of a big hit game in which a prize ball can be acquired). This can prevent a situation in which a player forgets to take a card. Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a jackpot that is easy to acquire a prize ball and a jackpot that is difficult to win a prize ball as a jackpot game, and further, it is possible to set a game state in which a small jackpot game can be frequently executed in a short period of time. The timing for displaying the card forgetting alert screen can be set according to the game result (accumulation of the number of prize balls in a predetermined period).

  Here, the display contents of the card forgetting alert screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of a card forgetting alert screen. As described above, the operation of removing the card from the card unit is displayed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, and the comment "Please note that the card is not removed" is displayed. .

  Next, the display timing of the card forgetting alert screen will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 (b) shows a case where the first jackpot is “jackpot A (see FIG. 16 (a))”, that is, a case where a single jackpot game has won a jackpot capable of giving many prize balls to a player. FIG. 10C and FIG. 10D are timing charts showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting alert display). In FIGS. 10C and 10D, the first big hit is “big hit A (see FIG. 16A)”. That is, it is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting alert display) when a large hit is won in which a player can be given many prize balls in one big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, if the first big hit (the big hit that has been won when the normal state is set as the gaming state) is the big hit A, the sufficient number of prize balls during the big hit is obtained. The card display is executed during the jackpot ending period (ED).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10 (c) and (d), when the first jackpot is the jackpot C, a sufficient number of prize balls cannot be given during the jackpot and the player The card display is not displayed on the end screen of the first big hit (big hit C) because there is a possibility that the ball may be continuously borrowed using the card.

  In such a state, in the present embodiment, the period from the first jackpot until the normal state is set again is defined as an advantageous continuation period, and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is accumulated. The card display is configured to be executed when the arrival at a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) is set as the card display execution condition.

  In other words, if the small hit game occurs continuously after the big hit C ends and the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount, the card is displayed on the small hit game ending screen. (See FIG. 10 (c)), when the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount due to the repeated execution of the jackpot C, a card is displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. (See FIG. 10D).

<Transition of gaming state in the first embodiment>
Next, transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of shifting from one gaming state to another gaming state for four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  First, a description will be given of a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the normal state. As described above, in the normal state, a lottery frequency of a special symbol is more likely to be played in a left-handed game than in a right-handed game, so that a left-handed game is more advantageous to a player. This is because when the player hits the ball left, the ball easily enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1. In addition, as described above, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first entrance hole 64, since the small hit is not drawn, the possessed ball will endlessly unless it becomes a big hit. It is a disadvantage that keeps decreasing. In this normal state, there is a possibility that the game will shift to another game state only when a big hit occurs. In addition, four types of jackpots A to D are provided as jackpot types that can be won in the first special symbol lottery. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 11, when the jackpots A and C are determined at a ratio of 65% in total when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, after the jackpot ends, the center of FIG. The state shifts to the probable change state ST2 shown in FIG. In addition, if the jackpot is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, the state shifts to the time saving state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. . On the other hand, when the jackpot B is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state is set again as the game state after the end of the jackpot (the normal state is looped). Do).

  In the normal state, it is normal to play a game by aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 by left-handing, but the player intentionally right-hands and the ball enters the second entrance 640. As a result, a part of the left-handed ball may enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, a lottery of the second special symbol may be won. In the present embodiment, there are three jackpot types (jackpots E to G) as jackpot types set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol, and the jackpot is won in the second special symbol in the normal state. When the jackpots E and F are determined by the total of 65% of the cases, the state shifts to the probability change state ST2 after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot G is determined by the ratio of 35%, the normal state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. Is set again (loops the normal state).

  As described above, when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, there is a possibility that the state may shift to a time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state at a rate of 10% (big hit D). In the case where a jackpot has been won by lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, the possibility of shifting to the time saving state is zero. Therefore, the disadvantage in the case of performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handing in the normal state can be increased, so that the irregular game can be suppressed. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, a variation pattern having a long variation time (10 minutes) is configured to be set. Therefore, the demerit in the case of performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by performing the right-hand in the normal state can be further increased.

  Next, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the probable change state will be described. As described above, in the probable change state, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player because the special symbol lottery frequency is more likely to be performed when the left-handed game is performed than in the right-handed game as in the normal state. It becomes. In the probable change state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol increases in comparison with the normal state, which is advantageous in comparison with the normal state, but disadvantageous in comparison with the latent state. When the probability change state ST2 is set, the state shifts to the latent state SP1 triggered by the winning of the first special symbol big hit (the special figure 1 big hit change starts).

  In the probable change state, a game is aimed at the lower first ball entrance 64b2 provided below the upper first ball entrance 64b1 while aiming at the upper first ball entrance 64b1 by hitting left as in the normal state. Will do. In other words, since the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set during the probable change state, the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 is easily opened. Therefore, the game state is set in which the lottery of the first special symbol is more easily executed than the normal state.

  In the probable change state configured as described above, normally, a left-handed game is performed and a lottery of the first special symbol is executed. However, the ball enters the second entrance 640 and the second special symbol is drawn. Lottery could be a big hit. In this case, when the jackpots E and F are determined by a total of 65% when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, the probability change state ST2 is set again after the end of the jackpot and is determined by a rate of 35%. When the big hit G is reached, the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the big hit ends.

  In other words, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the probable state, it is possible to shift to the latent state that is most advantageous to the player, whereas the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. In this case, the possibility of shifting to the latent state becomes zero. Therefore, the disadvantage in the case of performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handing in the probable variation state can be increased, thereby suppressing the irregular game.

  Next, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent state, unlike the normal state or the probable state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently performed by performing the game by right-handing. . Therefore, right-handed is more advantageous to the player than left-handed.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the jackpot is won for the first special symbol in the state where the probability change state is set (first transition condition), and the case where the jackpot C is won in the state where the probability change state and the time saving state are set. There are two transition conditions of (second transition condition), and when the first transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is changed before the big hit game is started, that is, during the special symbol big hit change. When the second transition condition is established, the latent state is set after the end of the big hit game.

  With this configuration, the timing at which the gaming state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is set can be set before or after the jackpot game. Sex can be provided.

  Further, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the period in which the latent state is set is the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol, so that the period in which the latent state is set can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily create an effect to be executed during the latent state in advance (at the time of setting the latent state) in accordance with the period in which the latent state is set.

  In addition, if the jackpot C is won by lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability change state is set, the latent state can be set both before and after the jackpot game, so that the player It is possible to provide unexpected playability.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I / Os, and the like. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register at the time of the power shutdown (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the process at the time of the power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65. As an axis, a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing to the right side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 issues various commands and commands to these via an input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 so that data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launch strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch a ball is given by the main control device 110. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of turning operation (rotating position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation The display control unit 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and issues the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, power outage signal SG1 is output to main controller 110 and payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, details of main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) provided in pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  In the main control device 110, main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result in the second symbol display device (not shown). Execute The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device. used.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, selection of the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and selection of the big hit type (big hit symbol). , A variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. In addition, the random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In addition, a small hit type counter C5 is used to select the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time an update is performed, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the first ball entrance 64 and the counter for the second ball entrance 640. A second special symbol execution area 203b in which a value is stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 is provided with up to four retaining balls. Therefore, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol can be selected by lottery, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when a special symbol jackpot is not being played, each counter value is increased. When the ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the ball enters the second entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. After that, the respective counter values stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamically). Various settings and control processing for displaying the information are performed. Each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, during a period in which the first special symbol cannot be randomly selected, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball wins the first entrance 64, In addition, when the number of retained balls at the first entrance 64 is less than the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment), each counter value is obtained and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Is done. When the number of reserves for the first entrance 64 is equal to or more than the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment), each counter value and the like are not obtained, and a prize ball (four in the present embodiment) is not obtained. Prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player. In addition, the ball enters the second entrance 640 during a period in which the lottery of the second special symbol is not possible, such as during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In such a case, only the prize balls (in this embodiment, two prize balls) are not obtained and each of the counter values and the like are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is four for the first entrance 64, but is not limited thereto, and may be smaller than four (for example, three). There may be more than four (eg, eight). Further, a configuration in which no upper limit value is provided may be adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration has been such that the entry to the second entrance 640 (variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not suspended, but the retention and storage can be performed similarly to the first entrance 64. You may comprise.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) in order, and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479). The configuration is returned to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  In addition, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and is stored in the first random number counter C1. If the value matches the value of the random number which is a big hit specified in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, the value of the random number that is a small hit of the special symbol is defined in a small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a winning in each game state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the special state is a low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol as a gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is any of "7, 8", and if it is any of "7, 8", it is determined that a big hit has occurred.

  When the special state is a high probability state (probable state, latent state) of the special symbol as a game state, the value of the first random number counter C1 per first acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is determined whether it is within the range of “0 to 5”, and if it is within the range of “0 to 5”, it is determined to be a big hit. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the 480 random number counters, two values are defined as values to be determined as big hits in the low probability state of the special symbol, so that the low probability state of the special symbol The jackpot probability at the time is 1/240. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/80.

  Next, the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit in a special symbol lottery is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15B, in the lottery of the first special symbol, a random number value to be a small hit is not defined. That is, the lottery of the first special symbol does not result in a small win. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is within the range of “212 to 432” regardless of the game state, and the range of “212 to 432” is determined. If it is within, it is determined that it is a small hit.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a small hit, the first symbol is used. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is a small hit.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value “7, 8” is, as described above, the first random number. It is stored in the random number table 202a. As described above, the total number of the random numbers is 480, and the total number of the random numbers to be the big hit is 2, so the probability of the big hit of the special symbol is “1/240”. On the other hand, in the special symbol high-probability state, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 serving as a special symbol jackpot, and the random numbers “0 to 5” are stored in the first random number table as described above. 202a. As described above, among the total number of the random number values of 480, the total number of the random number values to be the big hit is 6, and the probability of the big hit of the special symbol is “1/80”.

  Further, as described above, there are 221 values of the first random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random number values “212 to 432” are stored in the small hit random number table 202b. ing. As described above, among the total number of random numbers 480, the total number of small random hits is 221. Therefore, the probability of the small hit of the special symbol is “221/480” (about 46%).

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description will be continued. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. When the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A). It becomes. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter ranging from 0 to 99. Then, when the special symbol lottery result is a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A) is determined based on the value of the small hit type counter and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B). To C) will be selected. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19). In the variation pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables corresponding to the game state are set, and for each of them, a variation pattern selection table is set for each of the determination results. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 232, and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (that is, 232). When the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is detected that the ball has passed the normal starting port (through gate) 67. And stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit for the normal symbol is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is Is the same as the winning random number specified in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). The details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In this second random number table 202c, there are eleven random numbers that are hits of the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol (in the normal state or in the latent state) as the gaming state, and the range is "0 to 10". It has become. Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random numbers that can be won is 11, and the probability of winning a symbol is normally “11/233”.

  On the other hand, in the high probability state (probable change state, time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, there are 232 random number values which are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "0 to 231". Since the total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random numbers that can be won is 232, so that the probability of winning a symbol is normally “232/233”. As described above, in the present embodiment, the random number value which is the hit of the ordinary symbol is configured such that a difference of about 20 times is provided between the low probability state of the ordinary symbol and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. I have. In addition, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 when the ordinary symbol is hit are higher than the ordinary symbol's low probability state. It is configured that the probability state is more advantageous (a ball can easily enter the lower first entrance 64b2).

  When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device displays the variation of the ordinary symbol for three seconds. Then, in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 10”, it is determined that the symbol is a winning, and the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed. Later, a symbol of “」 ”is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened for“ 1 second × 2 times ”. On the other hand, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 231” in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, it is determined that the symbol is a winning, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed. Later, a symbol of “」 ”is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened for“ 1 second × 2 times ”. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the game performance is not impaired.

  The ordinary figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). When a ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a general symbol variation pattern table 202g (see FIG. 20) for selecting a variation pattern of the ordinary symbol based on the value of the ordinary symbol variation type counter CS2. ) Are defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. The details of the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 198), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 determines the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first random number table 202a, the small random number table 202b, and the second random number table 202c already described above, a large hit type selection table 202d, a small hit type selection table 202e, and a variation pattern selection table At least a table 202f and a normal figure variation pattern table 202g are provided.

  First, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each special symbol type, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is Is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the first hit is determined. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, “big hit A” is associated with the first special symbol (special figure 1) in a range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 24”. Stipulated. The “big hit A” has 15 rounds, and a big hit game that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counters that become "big hit A" is 25, so if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. Is 25% (25/100).

  Then, when "big hit A" is selected, a probable change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probable change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, and the number of time savings of 10,000 times is reduced. Is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time reduction counter 203f). That is, after the "big hit A" ends, the probable change state is set until the next big hit is won.

  "Big hit A" is one of the big hit types having the largest number of rounds, and thus is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. In addition, since the big hit probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, the gaming state is in which a more advantageous game can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the latent state is more likely to provide an advantageous privilege to the player than the probability change state. It becomes a game state advantageous to.

  "Big hit B" is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "25 to 49". The “big hit B” is a game in which the same big hit game as the above “big hit A” is executed, the number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the big hit that opens the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650). A game is set. After the "big hit B", the probability change flag 203g is set to off, and a different value is set to the time reduction counter 203f according to the gaming state at the time of winning.

  When the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is the normal state, a value of “0” is set to the time saving counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is the time saving state and the probable change state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of “100” is set. In other words, when the "big hit B" is won in the state where the normal state is set, the normal state is set after the end of the big hit, whereas when the "big hit B" is won during the time saving state, , A time-saving state (100 times) is set after the end of the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counters that become “big hit B” is 25, so if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, “big hit B” is determined. Is 25% (25/100).

  "Big hit B" is one of the big hit types having the largest number of rounds like "big hit A", so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but the special symbol high probability state is not set after the big hit is over. , The jackpot type which is more disadvantageous than the “jackpot A”.

  “Big hit C” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 89”. This “big hit C” has two rounds, and a big hit game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is also released in the small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. The configuration is such that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between a case where the "big hit C" is won and a case where the "small hit" is won.

  With this configuration, when the hit game in which the first attacker is released is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the big hit game or the small hit game has been executed. As described above, since the present embodiment is configured such that the small hitting game can be frequently executed during the big hit change period of the first special symbol, a latent state (RUSH state) is attained. The game is played while expecting that the hit game in which one attacker is opened is a small hit game. In other words, by providing a game period in which the player does not want the situation where the jackpot game most normally desired by the player is executed, novel playability can be provided.

  After the "big hit C", the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, and a different value is set to the time reduction counter 203f according to the gaming state at the time of winning. When the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is the normal state, the value of "10000" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is the time saving state and the probable change state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of “0” is set. In other words, when the "big hit C" is won in the state where the normal state is set, the "big hit C" is won in the positive change state or the time saving state, while the positive change state is set after the big hit is completed. In this case, the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot.

  In this way, in the game state when the jackpot is won, even if the jackpot is of the same type, the game state set after the end of the jackpot is configured differently, so that the player simply aims at the jackpot win In addition to this, it is possible to watch the set game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the gaming state is set to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player. There are two conditions: a first setting condition in which a special symbol big-hit change is started in a state where is set, and a second setting condition in which a big hit C is won in a state in which a probable change state and a time saving state are set. are doing. That is, it is configured such that the degree of expectation (probability) at which the latent state is set differs depending on the gaming state when the jackpot is won. With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to gradually increase the degree of expectation that a game state that is advantageous to the player is set in accordance with the progress of the game (in accordance with the set game state). It is possible to suppress getting tired of the game early.

  Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value of "big hit C" is 40. Therefore, if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. Is 40% (40/100). "Big hit C" is one of the big hit types in which the number of rounds is smaller and the opening operation period is shorter than those of "big hit A" and "big hit B" described above. However, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, since it is the only jackpot type that can set the most probable state to the player as the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot, it is set after the jackpot In terms of the gaming state, the jackpot type is more advantageous than "big hit A" and "big hit B".

  "Big hit D" is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99". The “big hit D” has two rounds, and a big hit game (same as “big hit C”) that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set.

  After the "big hit D", the probability change flag 203g is set to off, and the value of "0" is set to the time saving counter 203f. That is, when the "big hit C" is won, the normal state is set after the end of the big hit. Since the "big hit D" has the same big hit game content as the "big hit C", the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is configured to operate in the same opening operation as the small hit game. ing.

  After the "big hit D" is completed, the normal state is set as described above, so that the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) which has won the "big hit D" in the state where the probable change state is set is displayed. When executed, the small hit game is frequently performed during the big hit change, and then the big hit game is executed. Thereafter, the normal state is set.

  In other words, in the latent state (RUSH state) when the “big hit D” is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state after the “big hit D” in which the same opening operation as the small hitting game is set ends. Is set, it is possible to make the player feel that the latent state in which the jackpot game is executed has ended.

  Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hit D", so if a big hit occurs in the first special symbol lottery, "big hit D" is determined. Is 10% (10/100). "Big hit D" is one of the big hit types in which the number of rounds is small and one opening operation period is short as compared with the above "big hit A" and "big hit B", and thus it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of award balls that can be obtained. It becomes. Then, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot, which is disadvantageous in the game state set after the jackpot. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has four jackpot types ("jackpot A" to "jackpot D") as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). I have. Of the two jackpot types ("big jackpot A" and "big jackpot B"), a jackpot game is executed in which a second attacker (second variable winning device 650) that is opened only during the jackpot game is opened, In the other two jackpot types ("big jackpot C" and "big jackpot D"), a jackpot game in which the same first attacker (first variable winning device 65) as the small jackpot game is opened is executed.

  That is, in the first embodiment, the main jackpot game ("big jackpot A", "big jackpot B") for the purpose of causing a player to acquire a prize ball as a special symbol jackpot, and the gaming state is varied. And a sub-jackpot game ("jackpot C", which is intended to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the jackpot has been won) (to make it difficult to determine whether the jackpot game is a jackpot game). "Big hit D").

  Further, in the present embodiment, since it is not a jackpot game, but a game property that allows a player to acquire a prize ball by a small hit game, it is set that it is difficult to acquire a large amount of prize balls during a big hit game. (Even if a jackpot game in which only a small amount of prize balls can be obtained is executed depending on the jackpot type), a jackpot game aimed at changing the game state while suppressing discomfort to the player is suppressed. Can be set.

  On the other hand, as the type of the big hit by the lottery of the second special symbol, “big hit E” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 4”. The “big hit E” has 15 rounds, and a big hit game that opens the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are five counter values that are "big hit E", so if a big hit occurs in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit E" is determined. Is 5% (5/100).

  Then, when "big hit E" is selected, a positive change state is set at the end of the big hit (the positive change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the gaming state when the big hit is won. Is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time reduction counter 203f). In other words, after the "big hit E" ends, the probable change state is set until the next big hit is won.

  "Big hit E" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. In addition, since the big hit probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, the gaming state is in which a more advantageous game can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the latent state is more likely to provide an advantageous privilege to the player than the probability change state. It becomes a game state advantageous to.

  “Big hit F” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “5 to 64”. This “big hit F” has two rounds, and a big hit game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit F" is 60, so "big hit F" is determined in the event of a big hit in the second special symbol lottery. Is 60% (60/100).

  Then, when "big hit F" is selected, a probable change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probable change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the gaming state when the big hit is won. Is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time reduction counter 203f). In other words, after the “big hit F” ends, the probable change state is set until the next big hit is won.

  “Big hit F” is one of the big hit types with the smallest number of rounds, and is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. In addition, since the big hit probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, the gaming state is in which a more advantageous game can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the latent state is more likely to provide an advantageous privilege to the player than the probability change state. It becomes a game state advantageous to.

  "Big hit G" is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 99". This “big hit G” has two rounds, and a big hit game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, since the counter value of "big hit G" is 35, "big hit G" is determined when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. Is 35% (35/100).

  Then, when "big hit G" is selected, the normal state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning of the big hit, and the number of times of time reduction of 0 times is reduced. Is set (a value of 0 is set in the time reduction counter 203f).

  “Big hit G” is one of the big hit types with the smallest number of rounds, and thus is disadvantageous in terms of the number of award balls that can be obtained. Further, since the game state set after the big hit is the normal state, it is disadvantageous in the game state set after the big hit. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) The point that the probability that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot is 65% (65/100) is the same, but the 15 rounds are set as the jackpot game (the special figure 1 is 50%). , Toku-zu 2 is 5%), the rate at which the second attacker (the second variable prize device 650) is selected as an opening target (Toku-zu 1 is 50%, Toku-zu 2 is 5%), and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot Is the time saving state and the probable change state (that is, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) when the value of 10000 is set to the time saving counter 203f after the end of the jackpot (25% for the special figure 1 and 65% for the special figure 2). Are configured to be different.

  In this way, by changing the jackpot game content and the game state after the jackpot according to the type of the special symbol that has won the jackpot, it is possible to provide various game properties to the player, Amusement can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described contents are made different depending on the type of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to make only a part of the above-mentioned contents different. Other than the above, for example, by setting the number of rounds of the jackpot game to the number of rounds (for example, 7 rounds) that can be set only for the jackpot type corresponding to the special map 1, the number of rounds to be set is changed. Alternatively, the rate at which the probability change flag 203g is set to ON may be changed.

  Further, on the condition that the ball has passed through a specific area (for example, an area through which the ball that has won the second variable prize device 650 can pass) during the jackpot game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot is over. In the gaming machine configured as described above, the jackpot type corresponding to Toku-zu 1 and the jackpot type corresponding to Toku-zu 2 may be configured to make the probability that a ball passes through a specific area different. Further, a data table for selecting a fluctuation pattern for indicating a lottery result in each game state set after the end of the jackpot may be configured to be different depending on the jackpot type.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, in the present embodiment, both the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) can win in one round game. Although the upper limit is set to “10”, the upper limit may be different between the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). In addition, the upper limit value of the opening operation in the round game may be changed according to the type of the winning jackpot (or the type of the special symbol that has won the jackpot).

  Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the type of the small hit when a small hit is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). In the small hit type selection table 202e, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each value range of the small hit type counter C5.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, “small hit A” is associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of “0 to 93”. The “small hit A” is a small hit type in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state only once for 1.5 seconds during the small hit game.

  Of the 100 random numbers that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the random number value of "small hit A" is 94, so if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit A" Is 94% (94/100).

  In addition, “small hit B” is associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of “94 to 98”. The “small hit B” is a small hit type that sets the open state for 0.2 seconds × 6 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random numbers that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are five random numbers that are "small hits B". Therefore, if a small hit occurs in the second special symbol lottery, "small hits B" Is 5% (5/100).

  Further, “small hit C” is defined in association with the value “99” of the small hit type counter C5. The “small hit C” is a small hit type for setting an open state of 0.06 seconds × 8 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random numbers that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there is one random number value that is "small hit C", so if a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, it becomes "small hit C". The ratio is 1% (1/100).

  Next, the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, as described above, the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display is defined from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the variation pattern selection table 202f includes a normal table 202f1 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in a normal state, and a time reduction / probability variation for determining a variation pattern in a time reduction state and a probability variation state. At least a table 202f2 and a latent table 202f3 for determining a variation pattern in the latent state are included. The specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the tables shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

  First, the normal table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal table 202f1 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202f1. As shown in FIG. 18, the normal table 202f1 includes a random number value (variation type) for determining a variation pattern type (variation time) for each special symbol type and each special symbol stop type (acceptance determination result). Counter value of the counter value CS1).

  Specifically, as a variation pattern determined when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 falls in a range of “0 to 50”, and normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the variation pattern. Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “51 to 100”, super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “101 to 150”, and super reach is associated with the range of “151 to 198”. C (30 seconds) is associated therewith.

  On the other hand, when the lottery is lost in the first special symbol lottery and this normal table 202f1 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d). , The correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern varies. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set to the range of “0 to 70”. A variation pattern of a deviation (12 seconds) is associated, and a normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with a range of “71 to 150”. Also, as the value of the variation type counter CS1, the super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "151 to 170", and the super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171 to 198". Has been.

  On the other hand, when the number of the reserved balls of the first special symbol is two or three, the variation pattern of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to a variation pattern that is short (8 seconds) within the range of “0 to 70”. As a value of the variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern of a long distance (12 seconds) is associated with a range of "71 to 130", and a normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with a value of "131 to 170". ing. Further, as the value of the variation type counter CS1, the out-of-range super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171 to 185", and the out-of-range super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "185 to 198". Has been.

  The process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table 202f1 (see S505 of FIG. 35) is based on the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 33). Is also executed later. Therefore, the normal table 202f1 is not referred to when there are four reserved balls.

  As described above, when the number of reserved balls is small (0 or 1), a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more easily selected than when the number of reserved balls is large (2 or 3). With this configuration, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure a time for accumulating the reserved balls and make the fluctuation display hard to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting tired of the game. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is large, the fluctuation time becomes short, and it becomes difficult to accumulate the reserved balls. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit (four), the balls are further moved to the first entrance 64. Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the loss.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long change A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the change type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the outlier long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Thus, in the normal state, when right-handed is performed and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set each time, so that the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated as compared with left-handed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player makes a right-handed hit in a normal state.

  Next, the details of the time saving / probability change table 202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. The time saving / probability change table 202f2 is a table that is referred to when a variation pattern is selected when a high probability state of a normal symbol (that is, a time saving state or a probable change state) is set as a game state.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, the time saving / probability change table 202f2 is used to determine the type (variation time) of the variation pattern for each special symbol type and each special symbol stop type (acceptance determination result). A random number value (counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) is defined. The time saving / probability change table 202f2 is different from the normal use table 202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 18 in that a different change pattern is not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. are doing.

  In other words, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the player plays the game aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 while performing the left-handed game, so it is difficult to always secure the reserved ball of the first special symbol, There is a possibility that a period in which the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed (the first special symbol does not change) may occur. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, the normal table 202f1 is configured so that a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is easily selected. Thereby, in the normal state, the state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed continues for a long time, and the problem that the player gets tired of the game can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the time-saving / probability changing table 202f2 shown in FIG. 19 (a) performs a left-handed game and performs a game in which a ball is made to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2, or during a probable changing state. It is a data table to be referenced. During this time-saving state or the probable change state, the electric accessory 64a is frequently opened, so that a game state is established in which the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be easily stored.

  As described above, in the case where the game state in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored is set, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small as in the case of the above-described normal table 202f1, the variation is performed. If a configuration that makes it easy to select a variation pattern having a long time is added, the game is rested, and the first special symbol (special figure 1) variation executed when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol decreases. Becomes longer, and it becomes difficult to efficiently play a game during the time reduction state or the probable change state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the gaming state (time saving state, probable change state) in which the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be easily stored, that is, the variation pattern table (hour saving time The probable variation table 202f2) is set so that the variation pattern selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol does not differ (when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, the variation pattern having a long variation time is not selected). ) Make up. Thereby, the game in the time saving state and the probable change state can be efficiently executed.

  Further, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in a state where the jackpot variation is set, the pachinko machine 10 switches from the jackpot variation to the latent It is configured to shift to. Specifically, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed in the state where the probability change state is set, and if the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) is a big hit, the time saving / probability change table 202f2 is displayed. With reference to the case where the winning special fluctuation (600 seconds) is selected, while the winning special fluctuation (600 seconds) is being executed, the game state becomes a latent state, and when the winning special fluctuation ends, the special figure 1 is displayed. The special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, and the big hit game is started.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to execute the lottery and the change display at the same time, so that while the latent state is set (the special change of the special figure 1) Is executed), the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable display period (variable time) for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is defined as a short period (1 second) only for the latent state, and only for the second special symbol. It is configured to win a small hit. With this configuration, while the latent state is being set (while the special change of the special figure 1 is being executed), the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently performed, so that the player Can get many prize balls.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 19A, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won in the state where the probable change state is set, the value of the obtained change type counter CS1 is set to 60 seconds to 600 seconds. The configuration is such that a variation time of seconds is set, and this variation time is directly the duration of the latent state. Therefore, as a result of the special symbol lottery result, the player can pay attention to the selected variation pattern (variation time) as well as the result of the jackpot win (win / fail judgment result), The fun of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the time saving / probability change table 202f2 is referred to, 60 seconds (1 minute) is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. 2 If the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long change (60 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the change type counter CS1 can take. If the special symbol lottery result is out of order, the outlier long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this way, in the case of right-handed in the time-saving state and the probable change state, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set each time, so that the gaming efficiency is extremely higher than that of left-handed. Getting worse. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method of right-handing in a time-saving state or a probable change state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19B, the details of the latent probability table 202f3 will be described. The latent probability table 202f3 is a table that is referred to when a variation pattern is selected when a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set as a gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), the latent probability table 202f3 includes a random pattern for determining the type (variation time) of the variation pattern for each special symbol type and each special symbol stop type (win / fail determination result). A numerical value (counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) is defined. Note that the latent probability table 202f3 is configured such that different variation patterns are not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, similarly to the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 described above.

  The latent probability table 202f3 is used when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the period in which the jackpot variation of the special figure 1 is executed during the probability variation state, or during the time saving state or the probability variation state. At the time of winning the jackpot which is the jackpot type of "jackpot C", and selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed after the jackpot game ends. Referenced.

  The latent probability table 202f3 is selected when the jackpot is determined in the first special symbol lottery with respect to the contents specified in the time saving / probability change table 202f2 described above with reference to FIG. The difference is that the value of the variation type counter CS1 defined for each variation pattern is different from the variation type counter CS1 in that the variation time of each variation pattern selected in the lottery of the second special symbol is different, Otherwise, it is the same. A detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), as a fluctuation pattern determined when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 falls within the range of “0 to 39” and the normal fluctuation (60 Second), the super variation (180 seconds) is associated with the range of “40 to 119”, and the special variation (600 seconds) is associated with the range of “120 to 198”.

  On the other hand, when the lottery is lost in the first special symbol lottery and this latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) is set. ) And out-of-shift middle fluctuation (30 seconds), regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the latent table 202f3 is referred to, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a large hit, the hit short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. 2 If the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. If the special symbol lottery result is out of order, the outlier short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. This makes it possible to execute lottery (change) of the second special symbol during the latent state.

  Next, the details of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the ordinary symbol variation pattern table 202g is a table that is referred to when an ordinary symbol lottery is executed to select an ordinary symbol variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 20, the general figure fluctuation pattern table 202g includes a range of the value of the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 and a fluctuation pattern (variation time) for each game state at the time when the ordinary symbol lottery is executed. Are defined in association with each other.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is the normal state, the latent state, that is, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the entire range of values that can be taken by the ordinary figure variation type counter CS2 ( 0 to 198) is associated with a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds. Similarly, in the case where the gaming state is the probable change state, a change pattern with a change time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that can be taken by the ordinary figure change type counter CS2.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the time saving state, the probable change state, that is, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is within the range of “0 to 198” and the fluctuation time is 3 seconds. Patterns are associated.

  In the first embodiment, a plurality of variations of the variation pattern are provided only in the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state or the probable state, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the ordinary symbol may have a variation. When the lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed in the latent state, the fluctuation time is 2 seconds of 1 second or 3 seconds. Any one of the types may be set. The variation time is not limited to two types, and a configuration may be adopted in which more variation times can be selected. The more variation the variation time has, the harder it is for the player to predict the variation time, so that it is possible to make the player make a right-handed more reliably during the latent state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is set based on the game state and the acquired value of the ordinary symbol variation type counter CS2. Alternatively, a configuration in which the variation time is changed based on the number of special symbol lotteries, or a configuration in which the variation time of the ordinary symbol is set by a method combining the various configurations described above may be used. Specifically, from the transition of the gaming state to the latent state to the execution of the special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), 1 second is usually set as the fluctuation time of the symbol, and thereafter (for example, , 51 to 100 times) may be set such that 3 seconds is usually set as the fluctuation time of the symbol.

  In this manner, the number of special figure fluctuations (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) from the end of the previous jackpot is measured, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the measurement result is selected and executed. During the period in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while having a sense of expectation so that a more advantageous fluctuation time (for example, a shorter fluctuation time) is executed more. it can.

  In addition, during the execution of the odd number lottery of the special symbol after the game state is shifted to the latent state, 1 second is usually set as the fluctuation time of the symbol, otherwise (odd number) Ordinarily, 3 seconds may be set as the fluctuation time of the symbol. In this way, by changing the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the fluctuation time, so it is more reliable during the latent state. It is possible to make continuous right-handed. In this case, in the state where the special symbol lottery is not executed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer (compared to the case where the special symbol lottery is executed), or the special symbol lottery is not performed. It is good to constitute so that the fluctuation | variation time of a normal symbol may become long, so that the number which holds and holds lottery may be small.

  In addition, when setting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol based on the number of retained balls of the ordinary symbol, it is preferable to configure so that the longer the number of retained balls of the ordinary symbol is, the easier it is to select the longer fluctuation time. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of ordinary symbols is hard to accumulate and the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted so that the number of retained balls of ordinary symbols is easy to accumulate per unit time Normally, the number of symbol lotteries can be made uniform.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol holding ball. Number counter 203e, time saving counter 203f, probability change flag 203g, special figure 1 big hit flag 203h, special figure 1 big hit flag 203i, winning state storage area 203j, small hit flag 203k, special figure 1 change time counter 203m, special figure 2 change The time counter 203n, the big hit flag 203o, the small hit flag 203p, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203r, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, the general figure short fluctuation flag 203t, the prize counter 203u, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v, It has at least a memory area 203z. .

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). In the area, respective values of a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a small hit type counter C5, and a change type counter CS1 are stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), the value of each counter is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to first holding area). Among the vacant areas of the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are changed to the execution area. Is shifted (moved) to, and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the second special symbol execution area 203b, similarly to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a determination value (counter value) for executing a special symbol lottery is stored. In the second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the winning start to the second entrance 640 is detected is stored.

  Similar to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area (normal symbol holding ball execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to fourth holding area). ). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (a holding first area to a holding fourth area). ) Are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas indicated by ()). That is, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed in the main controller 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored in another reserved area as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack the winning data into the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is a special symbol change display (the first symbol display device 37, which is performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of suspended balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 4. Are incremented by one (see S1704 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S303 in FIG. 33).

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol is changed) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 33, FIG. 47). See S1705). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  Each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 displays the variable display retained in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of retained balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of balls for the variable display, which is managed by the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113, is changed to the actual variable display held for the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls has deviated from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e counts up to four times the number of holding balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number M of suspended display of the variable display in the normal symbol) is set to zero, and the ball passes through the through gate 67 to increase the number of retained balls of the variable display. Each time it is performed, 1 is added to the maximum value 4 (see S1904 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S1805 in FIG. 48).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained. The acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S1905 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the 2 through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (S1903 in FIG. 49). No).

  The time reduction counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of times the remaining special symbols change in the time reduction state. After the end of the jackpot, a value corresponding to the type of the jackpot that has been won is set in the time-saving counter 203f. Then, the time-saving counter 203f is decremented by one in the gaming state update process executed immediately after the start of the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set (see S308 in FIG. 36). If the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more when performing the lottery of the ordinary symbol, it is determined that the ordinary symbol is reduced in time, and the winning or non-acceptance determination of the ordinary symbol is executed by referring to the table for the high probability time. . On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal state is the normal symbol, and the normal symbol is determined with reference to the low probability table.

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol high-probability state is set, and when set to ON, indicates that the special symbol is in the high-probability state. That is, when the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, the game state is a probability change state (special symbol: high probability state, ordinary symbol: high probability state) or a latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, Normal pattern: low probability state) is set.

  If the winning type is a jackpot for setting a probability change state or a latent state after the jackpot finish (S2402: Yes in FIG. 54), the probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot (FIG. 54). 54, S2403). When the symbol indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit is stopped and displayed, the symbol is set to off (see S806 in FIG. 38).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the special symbol high probability state is set based on the special symbol jackpot winning, and the special symbol high probability state is continued until the next big hit is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a special symbol after the special symbol high probability state (special symbol high-accuracy state) is set as a special symbol high-accuracy termination condition for ending the special symbol high-probability state When the number of times of change (the number of times of special figure change) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the probable change flag 203g may be set to off. In this case, in order to set the timing of setting the probability change flag 203g to OFF, a storage means for storing in advance the number of times of the variation of the special figure as a special figure high accuracy end condition, and a method for storing the special figure high precision state Measuring means for measuring the number of special figure changes, and end determination for determining whether the number of special figure changes measured by the measuring means satisfies the number of special figure changes (special figure high-precision termination condition) stored in the storage means. Means may be provided.

  Further, a plurality of special figure high-accuracy termination conditions are prepared, for example, a special figure 1 high-accuracy termination condition that can be established based only on the number of times of the first special symbol change in the special figure high-accuracy state, and a variation of the second special symbol Various conditions, such as special figure 2 high-accuracy termination conditions that can be satisfied only based on the number of times, and lottery termination conditions that can be satisfied when the special symbol lottery result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result that wins a small win) The special figure high-accuracy termination condition may be facilitated, and the probability change flag 203g may be set to off when any of the special figure high-accuracy termination conditions is satisfied.

  The special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 matches the big hit determination value at the start of the change. (See S407 in FIG. 34). The special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit (S806 in FIG. 38).

  When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends in a state where the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is on, a process of detaching the second special symbol and forcibly stopping at the symbol is executed (see S804 of FIG. 38). . Thus, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is a big hit.

  The special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 matches the big hit determination value at the start of the change. (See S1007 in FIG. 40). The special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit (S1506 in FIG. 45).

  When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends in a state where the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is turned on, a process of removing the first special symbol and forcibly stopping at the symbol is executed (see S1004 of FIG. 40). . Thus, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is a big hit.

  The winning state storage area 203j is a storage area for storing information indicating a gaming state at the time of winning a jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability change flag 203g is off), the normal state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. "00H" is stored as information indicating On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the probability change state (if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 1 or more and the probability change flag 203g is ON), the probability change state is indicated in the winning state storage area 203j. “01H” is stored as information. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability change flag 203g is on), the latent state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. “02H” is stored as the indicating information.

  The information stored in the winning state storage area 203j is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting a game state after the jackpot has ended (see S2404 in FIG. 54).

  The small hit flag 203k is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of the change. This flag is set (see S1102 in FIG. 41). The small hit flag 203k is turned off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see S1605 in FIG. 46). When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends in a state where the small hit flag 203k is on, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (subtraction of the counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is temporarily stopped). A process of stopping the operation is performed (see S1603 in FIG. 46). Thus, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem in which a large hit is started in the lottery of the first special symbol while the small hit of the second special symbol is being executed and the big hit is started during the small hit. it can.

  The special figure 1 fluctuating time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuating time counter 203n are counters for measuring the fluctuating time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended based on the time measurement results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n.

  The big hit flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit is being made. When the big hit flag 203o is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, and when it is off, it indicates that there is no big hit. The big hit flag 203o is set to ON when a big hit start is set. On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end process executed at the end of the jackpot.

  The small hit flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not a small hit is being made. If the small hit flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in small hit, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not in small hit. The small hit flag 203p is set to ON when the start of the small hit is set (see S1406 in FIG. 221). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 232).

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that only the second special symbol wins the small hit, and when the small hit is won (when the small hitting flag 203p is set to ON), the second special symbol wins. It is configured to interrupt the change display of one special symbol. In other words, among a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), one of the special symbols (second special symbol) is won by lottery, and the small hit flag 203p is set to ON. In this state, since the variable display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) is not completed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the small hit game and perform the game. Further, during the small hit game, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from being ended and starting the big hit game.

  The special figure 2 change stop flag 203s is a flag indicating a period from the time when the change of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the stop pattern of the big hit to the time when the big hit is started. When the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided even when a new ball enters the second entrance 640. (See S901: Yes in FIG. 39). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON when the second special symbol is detached and forcedly stopped with the symbol (see S802 in FIG. 38), and the processing for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. In this case, it is set to off (S902 in FIG. 39).

  The normal symbol short variation flag 203t is a flag for indicating that the variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is a short variation (variation for 3 seconds), and is turned on to set the ordinary symbol (second symbol). (A symbol) is executed. The ordinary figure short variation flag 203t determines that the timing for setting the ordinary symbol variation time in the ordinary symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) is during the time reduction state (medium hours) (S1811 in FIG. 48: Yes). When the variation time (short variation) of 3 seconds is set, it is set to ON (S1814 in FIG. 48), and it is determined that the variation time of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S1816 in FIG. 48). If it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) this time is a win (S1818: Yes in FIG. 48), it is referred to (S1819 in FIG. 48).

  Here, when it is determined that the ordinary figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is determined whether the present time is in the time reduction state (middle time reduction) (S1821 in FIG. 48). ), When it is determined that the vehicle is in the time saving state (medium time saving) (S1821: FIG. 48: Yes), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a (FIG. 48). 48, S1822). Note that the ordinary figure short variation flag 203t is set to off (S1820 in FIG. 48) after it is determined in the ordinary symbol variation processing (S106 in FIG. 48) that it is set to on.

  As described above, the game state at the start of the change of the normal symbol (second symbol) (when the variable time is set) and the opening state of the electric accessory 64a after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) elapses. Since the opening state (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a only when both the gaming state and the time reduction state are set, the plurality of gaming states (normal state) are set. The change of the ordinary symbol (lottery) executed across the time-saving state can reliably prevent the electric accessory 64a from being opened long, and can provide a benefit (long of the electric accessory 64a) advantageous to the player. (Open) to the player can be suppressed from being excessively provided.

  The winning counter 203u is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (entered) the first specific winning opening 65a in the small hitting game round. When the value of the winning counter 203u reaches the upper limit value of 10, it is determined that the condition for ending the round is satisfied, and the round is ended (see S2706 in FIG. 57). In each round of the jackpot, even if the value of the winning counter 203u is less than 10, the round is ended when the round period set in the round is reached. The value of the winning counter 203u is incremented by one each time a ball is detected in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hit round effective period. At the end of each round, the value is reset to zero.

  Although the detailed description is omitted, the above-described winning counter 203u counts not only the small hit game but also the number of balls that have won the second specific winning opening 650a in each round during the big hit game. It is also used for

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened as the game content of the small hit game is set to 1.5 seconds, and the end condition of the round established by the winning number is set to 10 pieces. are doing. In other words, the effective period of the round game (1.5 seconds) elapses until ten balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hitting game (until the round end condition for the winning number is satisfied). Will be. Therefore, since the period of the small hit game can be made constant, the effect that straddles the small hit game (the period from the start of the change of one special symbol to the end of the change of the other special symbol via the small hit game) The effect period of a series of effects to be executed at the same time can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily synchronize the fluctuation timing of the special symbol with the execution timing of the effect, and enhance the effect of the effect.

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and stops the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time when it is set to ON. When the state is set from on to off, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

  This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in which the lottery result is a small hit (S1602 in FIG. 46), and the special symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 32 (see S202 in FIG. 32). As a result of the reference, if it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same manner as during the change is executed (S203 in FIG. 32). In other words, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the updating (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. Thus, the fact that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped can be notified by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v to ON. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 37) that the flag is set to on (S701 in FIG. 37: Yes), the flag is set to off (S703 in FIG. 37).

  In the present embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol can be won in the small hit, so the special symbol in which the variable display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small hit is the first special symbol. In the case where the lottery of the first special symbol can be won with a small hit, the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag may be provided in order to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol. good.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped in a combination indicating the big hit (based on the fact that the big hit game is executed) T), the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the other special symbol, and if the lottery result of the one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped with a combination indicating the small hit. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hitting game ends).

  That is, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes in accordance with the lottery result of the one special symbol. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes a game result (for example, a jackpot) that is most advantageous to the player, and while the variable display for indicating the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and the big hit can be suppressed from being erased by the small hit.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on various tables provided in the ROM 202 and flags, counters, and the like provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 11 can be realized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 222 has at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, a stop display mode selection table 222b, and an additional effect selection table 222c.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a indicates that the sound ramp control device 113 is configured based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command). ) Is used to determine the details of the variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, various variations can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19A, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol in a state in which the probable change state is set, the fluctuation time is normal fluctuation, fluctuation per 60 seconds. The main controller 110 outputs a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to either the super fluctuation of 180 seconds or the special fluctuation of 600 seconds, and the voice lamp controller 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command (variation time). (Information indicating ")".

  Here, as a fluctuating performance corresponding to the special fluctuating (600 seconds), the first 60 seconds executes the first stage performance mode (for example, the performance of defeating the first enemy), and the second 60 seconds to 180 seconds period. A stage effect mode (for example, an effect for defeating a second enemy) is executed, and a variable effect for executing a third stage effect mode (an effect for defeating a third enemy) in a period of 180 seconds to 600 seconds is set. As a fluctuating effect corresponding to the fluctuation (180 seconds), the first 60 seconds executes the first stage effect mode (for example, an effect of defeating the first enemy), and the second stage effect mode during a period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. (For example, an effect that is performed by a second enemy) is set, and the first 60 seconds of the effect mode (for example, the first enemy Defeated performance ) Change production to be executed is set to.

  In this way, by setting the effect mode so as to put a break in the variable effect executed in accordance with the stage of the variable time that can be set as a result of the special symbol lottery result, the variable pattern set this time for the player Can be enjoyed in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while predicting the type of the effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the case where the above-described variable production is performed, the remaining time display mode (for example, the timing at which the production mode can shift to the next stage) for allowing the player to grasp the remaining time for the production period set as each stage An effect mode in which the remaining time up to the countdown display is displayed) may be displayed. This allows the player to know in advance at least the period during which the variable effect is continuously performed (the period during which the latent state is continuously set), so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. it can.

  In addition, a plurality of types of enemies appearing during the fluctuating effect are provided, and depending on the type of the appearing enemies, the degree of expectation that the fluctuating effect moves to the next stage (the rate at which the effect mode that wins the enemy is selected) and It is preferable that the content of the jackpot game to be executed after the current fluctuation display ends and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game can be suggested.

  In addition, in this case, for example, when the enemy A is displayed as the enemy type, if the fluctuation pattern set this time is a super fluctuation (180 seconds), the jackpot type most advantageous to the player is It may be configured so as to indicate that it is selected and, if the fluctuation pattern is a hit special fluctuation (600 seconds), to indicate that a type other than the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is selected. With this configuration, the effect mode (type of enemy) of the variable effect can be determined by combining a plurality of elements for determining whether or not to give a benefit advantageous to the player. The effect can be further enhanced.

  The stop display mode selection table 222b indicates that the latent state is set as the game state, and that a period (hereinafter, referred to as a rush period) in which a small hitting game can be frequently executed by lottery of the second special symbol is set. 9 is a data table referred to when selecting a stop display mode of effect symbols (see FIGS. 7 (a) and 8 (b)) for notifying a user. The stop display mode selection table 222b is configured to select a different stop display mode according to the type of jackpot that has been won in the first special symbol lottery and the length of the rush period to be executed.

  Here, the contents of the stop display mode selection table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stop display mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 23 (a), the stop display mode selection table 222b allows the player to predict the degree of advantage (the number of rounds, the game state set after the jackpot game) and the length of the rush period for each jackpot type. It is stipulated that the stop display mode of the effect symbol is set so that it can be performed.

  Specifically, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the player wins the jackpot A, which is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player, and stores the remaining time storage area 223p (the length of the rush period In the case where the information stored in the information storage area) is “0 to 60 seconds”, that is, when the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h falls within the range of “0 to 39”. The stop display mode “111” is defined, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of “40 to 79”, and the stop display mode “666” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”. .

  In addition, the information that is won in the “big hit A” and is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, the rush period is 61 seconds. If it is within 300 seconds, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of the obtained effect counter 223h of “0 to 39”, and the stop display mode “333” in the range of “40 to 79”. Is defined, the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is stored. If “301 seconds or more”, that is, the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode “777” is defined in the range of the obtained effect counter 223h of “0 to 39”, and “40 to 79”. "of In circumference, defined stop display mode "777", the range of "80 to 99" is defined stop display mode "VVV".

  Then, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the player wins the jackpot B, which is a disadvantage type for the player, and stores the remaining time storage area 223p (information indicating the length of the rush period). In the case where the information stored in the area to perform the operation is “0 to 60 seconds”, that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of “0 to 39”, and the stop display mode is set. “222” is defined, the stop display mode “444” is defined in the range of “40 to 79”, and the stop display mode “666” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”.

  In addition, the information that is won in the “big hit B” and stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, the rush period is 61 seconds. If it is within 300 seconds, the stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of the acquired effect counter 223h of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode "666" is set in the range of "40 to 79". Is defined, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is stored. If “301 seconds or more”, that is, the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of the acquired effect counter 223h of “0 to 39”, and “40 to 79”. "of In circumference, defined stop display mode "333", the range of "80 to 99" is defined stop display mode "333".

  Finally, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the jackpot is won for the jackpot C, which is the second most advantageous jackpot type, or the jackpot D, which is the most disadvantaged jackpot type, and If the information stored in the time storage area 223p (an area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is “0 to 60 seconds”, that is, if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the acquired effect counter 223h In the range of “0 to 39”, the stop display mode “444” is defined, in the range of “40 to 79”, the stop display mode “666” is defined, and in the range of “80 to 99”, A stop display mode “444” is defined.

  In addition, the information that is won in the “big hit C” and the “big hit D” and stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, If the rush period is within 61 to 300 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of “0 to 39”, the stop display mode “666” is defined, and in the range of “40 to 79”, The stop display mode “111” is defined, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”, and stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (an area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period). If the displayed information is “301 seconds or more”, that is, the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode “333” is defined in a range where the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is “0 to 39”. , In the range of 40 to 99 ", it is defined stop display mode" 777 ".

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the rush period is started, the length of the rush period, and after the rush period ends, by the stop display mode of the effect symbols displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The content of the jackpot to be executed (jackpot type) is indicated to the player. This allows the player to predict future game contents by grasping the stop display mode of the effect symbols.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the stop display mode of the effect symbols is defined to have a predetermined rule, and specifically, the stop display mode of the effect symbols is "even symbol", "odd symbol", It is stipulated that the benefits given to the player in the order of “777” and “VVV” increase (the rush period becomes longer, and the jackpot type becomes more advantageous). In this way, by giving a predetermined pattern to the stop display mode of the effect symbols, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, since it is configured to select the stop display mode of the effect symbol by combining the jackpot type and the length of the rush period, for example, the stop display mode of the effect symbol “111” is the most advantageous for the player. Only when the jackpot type “jackpot A” is set, even if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the selection is made. Therefore, when “111” is displayed, the player In contrast to the novel playability that the rush period is desired to end in 60 seconds, that is, the playability that normally requires a longer rush period, the jackpot type and the length of the rush period are combined. By displaying the stop display mode, it is possible to add a game property that desires a game result (short rush period) opposite to the normal game result.

  In addition, when "VVV" is displayed as the stop display mode of the effect symbol, it indicates that both the jackpot type and the length of the rush period have been selected that are most advantageous to the player, A game can be performed with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, the timing of selecting the stop display mode of the effect symbol by referring to the stop display mode selection table 222b according to the game state (the timing of stopping and displaying the effect symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). It is configured to be different. Specifically, at the point in time when the latent state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in the state in which the probability change state is set), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is changing. If it is determined that the second special symbol does not fluctuate, that is, if the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the latent state is set, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is changed. The effect design is configured to stop and display the effect symbol based on the start.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is changing at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the jackpot change of the first special symbol starts in the state where the probability changing state is set), That is, unless the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in the state where the latent state is set, the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is performed unless the variation display of the currently executed second special symbol is completed. The effect symbols are stopped and displayed on the basis of the timing when is finished.

  With this configuration, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in a state in which the latent symbol is set immediately after the effect symbol is stopped and the rush period is started. A game in a latent state can be performed without giving.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the second special symbol fluctuates at the time when the latent state is set (at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in the state where the probable change state is set). In the case where it is determined, the length of the rush period from the timing at which the change display of the second special symbol being executed is completed is determined, and if the determination result is within a predetermined time, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. (The effect indicating that the rush period has started) is not executed. As a result, even if the effect symbol is stopped and displayed and the rush period has been started (the rush game has been started), but the small hitting game is executed, the rush period ends. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the start of the rush period (rush game) is configured to be displayed in an effect symbol similar to the third symbol, so that the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol is displayed. It can be made to seem as if the rush game was executed based on the stop display of the symbol. Further, even when the length of the rush period is within a predetermined time and the effect symbols are not stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress giving a great uncomfortable feeling to the player.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the timing at which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed is the timing at which the jackpot change of the first special symbol is started or the timing at which the latent state is set is the second special symbol being executed. Although the timing at which the variable display of the symbols is stopped is used, the effect symbols may be stopped and displayed at other timings. For example, the effect symbols are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The winning information command indicating the winning information is analyzed, and if it is determined in advance that the jackpot change will be executed in the next change, immediately before the jackpot change is executed (the third pattern is obtained before the jackpot change). May be configured to stop and display the effect symbol at the timing when the icon is stopped and displayed). With this configuration, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the latent state is set.

  As described above, in the case where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed before the jackpot change is executed to notify that the rush game is started, the second input is performed from the timing at which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. When playing a game aiming at the ball opening 640 (right-handed game), it is preferable that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed before the next big hit change is started. As a result, as a result of performing a right-handed game based on the effect symbol being stopped and displayed, the second state is set before the latent state is set (before the jackpot change is started), that is, during the certain change state. It is possible to prevent a situation where the lottery of the special symbol is executed and the period during which the rush game is executed is shortened.

  The additional effect selection table 222c is used to select an effect mode (additional effect mode) when resuming the variable display of the first special symbol temporarily stopped by winning the small hit in the second special symbol lottery. The data table to be referred to is configured such that a different additional effect mode (treasure box (see FIG. 7B)) is selected according to the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol after the restart. Here, the contents specified in the additional effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 23B, in the additional effect selection table 222c, a different additional effect type is selected based on the period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o and the additional effect counter 223i. The data content is defined as described above, and the additional effect mode corresponding to the selected additional effect type is executed, whereby the player predicts the remaining fluctuation time (the remaining period of the rush period) of the first special symbol. It is configured to obtain.

  Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period A (less than 5 seconds), the acquired value of the additional effect counter 223i is “0 to 99”. ", An additional effect type" none "is specified, and" additional effect A "is specified in the range" 100 to 198 ". When the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period B (5 seconds to 60 seconds), the acquired value of the additional effect counter 223i is “0 to 99”. , An additional effect type “additional effect A” is defined, and “additional effect B” is defined in a range of “100 to 198”. When the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period C (60 seconds or more), the acquired value of the additional effect counter 223i is in the range of “0 to 99”. , An additional effect type “additional effect B” is defined, and “additional effect C” is defined in a range of “100 to 198”.

  Here, when the “additional effect A” is set, the display mode of the treasure chest 812 (see FIG. 7B) displayed during the rush period is changed to the tattered display mode. By grasping the tattered display mode, the player can predict that the rush period is remaining short. When “additional effect B” is set, the treasure chest 812 (see FIG. 7B) in a normal display mode is displayed. Also, a luxurious display mode is set. When “none” is selected, an effect is set in which the treasure box 812 is not displayed during the remaining rush period.

  Note that, in the additional effect selection table 222c (FIG. 23B) shown in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the remaining fluctuation time of the rush period and the additional effect type are completely associated with each other. Without the possibility, for example, it is configured such that “additional effect C” is set in the case of the period B or “additional effect A” or “none” is set in the case of the period C. Is also good. This makes it possible to execute a surprising effect for the player.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed at the timing when the rush game is started in the latent state, the composite game information in which the rush period and the jackpot type are combined is played. This is configured to provide the game information indicating the remaining period of the rush period to the player by the additional effect during the rush period. This allows the player to comprehensively determine the stop display mode of the effect symbol executed as the composite game information and the effect mode of the additional effect, thereby allowing more detailed game content to be predicted.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 change start flag 223d, a special figure 2 change start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, effect counter 223h, additional effect counter 223i, state setting area 223j, remaining short time area 223k, special figure 1 variable time counter 223m, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n, remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, remaining time storage area 223p, card notification flag 223q, card notification enable flag 223s, rush display completed flag 223t, prize ball counter 223u, power supply The disconnection flag 223y and the other memory area 223z are at least It is provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the command is executed. In detail, it is composed of a ring buffer, and reads and writes data by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects a winning start with respect to the first ball entrance 64, a first random number counter C1 obtained in accordance with the starting winning, a first type counter C2, From the values of the small hit type counter C5 and the change type counter CS1, various information (whether or not, a big hit type in the case of a big hit, a change pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. The main control device 110 predicts (estimates) various types of information, and the main control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and a fluctuation pattern) notified by the prize information command, and extracts the prize information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223b. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (variation display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (the number of standbys) of the fluctuating effect of the first special symbol up to four times for each type of special symbol.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c indicates the number of reserved balls in the special symbol. Is managed for each type.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or the main controller 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the number-of-retained-balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, the sound ramp controller 113 obtains the value of the first special symbol reserved-ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the retained number-of-balls command. Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4212 in FIG. 60). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the number-of-retained-balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of retained balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol-reserved ball number counter 223c, and also stores the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the value of the ball number counter 223 c to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 transmits a display reserved ball number command.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball count command, the display control device 114 retains the value of the reserved ball count indicated by the command, that is, the reserve of the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the ball number symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110. it can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The special figure 1 change start flag 223d and the special figure 2 change start flag 223e are respectively set when the change pattern command of the first special symbol and the change pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 are received. It is turned on (see S4206 and S4209 in FIG. 60), and turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5102 and S5108 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 change start flag 223d and the special figure 2 change start flag 223e are turned on, a display change pattern command is set based on the change pattern extracted from the received change pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g are set when the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 are received. Are turned on (see S4301 in FIG. 61), and are turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command. It is determined.

  The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223h is configured by a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, every time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by one and updated. Is done.

  The additional effect counter 223i is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The additional effect counter 223i is configured by a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by one. Be updated.

  The state setting area 223j is a storage area in which information according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Each time a status command output from main controller 110 is received, information corresponding to the status of pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command is stored in status setting area 223j (see S4405 in FIG. 62). . More specifically, a 2-bit storage area is allocated to the state setting area 223j, and whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state or the normal symbol is in the high probability state in order from the upper bit. Is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223j is “11B”, it means that the state is a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol). It means a certain state (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol). On the other hand, “00H” means a normal state (low probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol).

  By updating the status setting area 223j according to the status command output from the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10.

  The remaining short-time count area 223k is a storage area for storing the remaining count of the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. The remaining working hours area 223k is updated to the number notified by the remaining working hours command output each time the value of the working hours counter 203f is updated in the main control device 110 (see S4802 in FIG. 66). As a result, the value stored in the remaining working hours area 223k can be updated in synchronization with the value of the working hours counter 203f of the main control device 110. The actual number of times saved by main controller 110 can be matched.

  The special figure 1 fluctuating time counter 223m and the special figure 2 fluctuating time counter 223n indicate the corresponding fluctuating time when each fluctuating display is set (executed) in the fluctuating display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 69). Each time a value is set and various counter updating processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed, each value is decremented by 1 (see S5402 and S5404 in FIG. 72). Note that the period from when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received from the main control device 110 to when the special figure 1 resume command is received is a case where various counter update processing (see S4111 in FIG. 72) is executed. Is also configured so that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not decremented by one.

  Then, in the temporary stop-related processing (see S4220 in FIG. 67) executed when it is determined that the temporary stop-related command is received in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 60), This is referred to (see S4903 in FIG. 67).

  The remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is a storage area for storing the remaining time of the rush period, that is, information indicating the remaining time of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol. In this remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol fluctuation display is set, and the temporarily stopped first special symbol fluctuation display is set. The remaining period information stored is referred to when setting an additional effect for restarting the variable display of the symbol.

  The card notification completion flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10A) is displayed (notifying), and is turned on when the card forgetting alert screen is displayed. Is set.

  The card notification possible flag 223 s is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) can be displayed (notified), and the card forgetting warning screen can be displayed. Is set to ON when certain conditions are satisfied.

  The rush display completed flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not the rush game has been started in the state where the latent state is set, and is a rush entry screen indicating that the rush game has been started (FIG. 7). (A), see FIG. 8 (b)) is set to ON.

  The prize ball number counter 223u is a counter for continuously measuring the number of prize balls since the start of the jackpot game, and is a prize ball during a period in which a game state advantageous to the player is continuously set. It is configured to accumulate numbers. Specifically, in the hit-related processing (S4216 in FIG. 63), when it is determined that the prize ball command has been received (S4505 in FIG. 63: Yes), a value corresponding to the received prize ball command is added ( S4506 in FIG. 63).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained not only in the big hit game but also in the small hit game. It is configured such that the card forgetting alert display can be executed after the end of the hit game or after the end of the big hit game in which a small number of rounds is set.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether there has been a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y is set to on before receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110 and executing power-off processing (see S4117 in FIG. 59). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 58), if the power-off flag 223y is on (see 4008: Yes in FIG. 58), the power-off flag 223y is set to on and then kept constant. This is a case where the sound lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, a case where there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not been erased, and unnecessary information (or information incomplete due to the erasure of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information of the work area in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 58). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model having different lottery probabilities of special symbol jackpots and different numbers of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output until the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where much image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Executes the conversion of the data address.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the defective data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different defective data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, the data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , Read the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234 c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are transferred to the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great amount of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred by the MPU 231 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs among the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. More specifically, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 30) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information of one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 74B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process are not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory generally facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after turning on the power. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, when drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data in the resident video RAM 235, so that there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Last address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included in place of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read over time from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Also, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. Further, the power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b1. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays a result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuation effect when a ball is detected to enter the ball entrance 64b2.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on and while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display controller 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 proceeds to FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “○” is provided at a lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp controller 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main controller 110. The result is judged, and when it is "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. 25 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and when it is "special symbol loss", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and a ball is detected in the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 25 (b) and (c) are drawn. Are instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so that are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. If a ball is detected at the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding fluctuating effect is performed by the third variation. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and a range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 26B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “town stage” and the back surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, “river stage”, and “sky stage”, respectively. . FIG. 27 shows the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 26, as the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A to D, images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scroll-displayed with a proper connection.

  When the change of the back type is determined based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “sky stage”, the MPU 231 First, a position between the position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the back image on the back E is a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. More specifically, the back E is a third pattern in which the image of the mountain towering on the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed in the displayed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of an image of the sky spreading over a mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, the rear image shown in FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27A, an orange sky indicating dawn is displayed. Then, as the time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after the elapse of a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 27B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27B, a bright blue sky indicating the day is displayed. Next, as the time elapses, the color of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 27C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. Thereafter, as the time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the display returns to the back image shown in FIG. 27A, and the back images of FIGS. 27A to 27C are displayed again on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the rear surfaces of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage, "the city stage" is displayed, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the "city stage" displayed frequently is displayed. By making the entire area resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the “forest stage”, the back surface C corresponding to the “river stage”, and the back surface D corresponding to the “sky stage” are, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 27A, and image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 27A and 27B except for FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process, and is resident.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. Must use a very large capacity RAM, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a '(or the range from FIG. 27A to FIG. 27B). ) And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 27A and 27B) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the change, the character ROM 234 may be stored on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces BD are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the partial range of the images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Also, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B to D moves the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the images from the position b 'to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b ′ to position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface E, the images shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 27 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 27 (b) to 27 (c) and FIGS. 27 (c) to 27 (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. To (b) are set. Thus, while the images of FIGS. 27A and 27B are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 27B and 27C and FIGS. Since the image can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 27 (b) to 27 (c) and 27 (c) to 27 (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image. be able to.

  On the back sides B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 24) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably.

  On the backsides B to D, the image data stored in the backside image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Image data to be duplicated is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image from the position a to the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow in the leftward direction.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 starts the variation effect on the first symbol entrance device 64 or the second entrance port 640, the third symbol display device is started. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuation effect is not immediately started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box and a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, and the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. Can be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses By reading out image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. Thus, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately even if the character ROM 234 is a NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. Upon receiving the error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the character data ROM 234, image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 to image data required for drawing an image, from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  Note that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame for the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and the readout signal is sent to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image of one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This area stores transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. By using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, a stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective big hits are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to a special game state from now on and the large opening which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be performed. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. If there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variable effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are set according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a scale larger than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And light in the image, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address. For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is specified. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. The back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage”). Information specifying whether to display any of them or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. In the case of specifying that a back image different from the back A to E is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the back A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back A to E as a drawing target, Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time from when the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the back type (or the third symbol display device 81). May be any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which a range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time has elapsed, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. In addition, the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the discontinuity of the number continuity. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 29) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer is set in accordance with the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is stored frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning winning. On the other hand, in a game machine other than a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, the display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on a configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on a result of a lottery performed based on a winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, the resident The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing are specified.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 29). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 29 corresponds).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the head address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 29, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to start the transfer at that time is acquired, and the transfer list is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control unit 114 displays the display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control unit 113 based on a command from the main control unit 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on the transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 25A to 25C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 75B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 75 (b) of S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with a command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 30) described below, which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction with respect to, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 30) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds transfer pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines transfer data information of transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 30) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 75 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, (See FIG. 30), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by an image controller to draw one frame of image generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 30, the back image used for the one-frame image and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is output for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged at the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged at the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 75 (b) Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states of all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. Is In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of the other sprite that is to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and transmits the sprite of the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether or not the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, useless transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information that has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The process is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81A). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is turned off when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, a back image corresponding to the back image change command or the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON in the rear image determination flag 233x (FIG. 81 (a) ) Of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With the back image determination flag 233x, the back type currently set can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. This demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the display data table for demonstration is displayed. The display data table is set off when a display data table other than the above is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, and S6805 in FIG. 78B). 79 of FIG. 79). With the demonstration display flag 233y, it can be easily determined whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether a fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect is an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. When the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and when it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and the other than the confirmed display data table is set. It is turned off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, S6805 in FIG. 78B, FIG. 79, S6905). With this confirmed display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmed display effect is currently being produced.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (479 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the second random number counter C4, and the small type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the second random number counter C4, and the small type counter C5 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are set to the maximum value (in this embodiment, When they reach 479, 99, 232, 99), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning (start winning) of the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process (S105) is performed, a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and a process for passing a ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 are performed. A symbol variation process is executed (S106). The details of the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the normal symbol variation process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  First, with reference to FIG. 32, the contents of the special symbol change process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol change process (S104). When the special symbol change process (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is a big hit or a small hit (S201). If it is determined that the present is a big hit or a small hit (S201: Yes). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202). In the process of S202, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure changing time during the change is interrupted by the stop display of one special figure with a symbol indicating a hit. In the process of S202, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated. Then (S203), that is, a process for continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed on the special figure for which the subtraction of the variable time has been interrupted, and the process ends. This allows the player to be notified that the special figure change has not been forcibly stopped.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S201, when it is determined that the current situation is a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 change time counter 203m is larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 is changed). Is determined (S204), and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S204: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, and thereafter, the flow shifts to S209 in which the fluctuation process for the special figure 2 is executed. Details of the first special symbol change start process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is executed. The first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is a process for executing the special symbol 1 varying process, and will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  After completing the first special symbol change execution process (S205), it is next determined whether or not it is the end timing of the change time (whether the special figure 1 change time counter 203m is 0) (S206). If it is determined that it is the end timing (S206: Yes), the first special symbol change stop process (S207) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S209. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S206 that the timing is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S206: No), the processing of S207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S209.

  In the processing of S209 to S213, the same processing as that of S204 to S207 executed for the special figure 1 is executed. When the processing of S209 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (ie, whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating) (S209). If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S209: No), the second special symbol change start process (S210) is executed, and then this process is ended. Details of the second special symbol change start process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S209 that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (S209: Yes), the second special symbol variation execution process (S211) is executed. The second special symbol change executing process (S211) executes a process during the special figure 2 change, and will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the second special symbol change execution process (S211), it is next determined whether or not it is the end timing of the change time (whether the special figure 2 change time counter 203n is 0) (S212). If it is determined that it is the end timing (S212: Yes), the second special symbol change stop process (S213) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S212, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S212: No), the process of S213 is skipped and the present process ends.

  Next, a first special symbol change start process (S208), which is a process of the special symbol change process (S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start process (S208).

  In the first special symbol change start process (S208), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. ) Is greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed. One is subtracted (S303), and a reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). .

  The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in an external output process (S2201) of a main process (see FIG. 52) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  When the processing in S304 is completed, the data in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted to the immediately preceding data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the reserved area 1 → the execution area, the reserved area 2 → the reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 → the reserved area 2, the reserved area 4 → the reserved area 3.

  When the processing of S305 ends, next, the first special symbol big hit determination processing is executed (S306). The first special symbol big hit determination process (S306) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 34, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a will be described. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot is based on the set gaming state.

  When the process of S306 is completed, next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (see FIG. 35). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S307) is a variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

  When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) ends, a game state update process is executed (S308). The game state updating process (S308 in FIG. 36) will be described in detail later, but the state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated by updating the state of the probable change flag 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203f indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10. Is a process for updating. When the process in S308 ends, the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, referring to FIG. 34, a first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) which is a process of the first special symbol change start process (S204 of FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the period in which the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) in which one of the special symbols is won is executed, it is determined whether or not the other special symbol lottery has won the big hit. It is configured not to perform the determination.

  In other words, in a state where it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period (after the elapse of the fluctuation time) by one special symbol lottery, the jackpot is won by the other special symbol lottery, and a plurality of times in a short period of time. The system is configured so as to suppress winning of a jackpot and excessive granting of a privilege.

  In this way, by performing the process of acquiring various counter values in the same manner as in the normal special symbol lottery, skipping the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process, and setting the missing symbol, Can respond quickly to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state (probable state, latent state). If it is determined that the probable change flag 203g is on (that is, the special symbol is in the probable change state) (S402: Yes), the random number value to be the jackpot defined in the first random number table 202a for the high probability state And whether the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer matches, and obtains the determination result (lottery result) (S403). On the other hand, in the process of S402, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is off (that is, the special symbol is in the low probability state) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a for the low probability is stored in the first random number table 202a. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value of the jackpot matches the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is obtained (S404).

  Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (S405). If it is determined that the lottery result is not on (that is, it is off) (S405: No), it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406). S406: Yes), the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set ON for the first special symbol (S407), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the big hit (S408). Then, based on the obtained value of the hit type counter, the big hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and the value according to the current gaming state is stored in the winning state storage area. The time saving counter 203f is stored in the time saving counter 203f (S411), and the process ends.

  Here, by setting the value of the time reduction counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the first special symbol change start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) determines the first special symbol big hit determination process (see S306 in FIG. 34). In the game state update process (S308) executed at a later stage, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol can be shifted to the low probability state. Thereby, when a big hit is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, it is possible to set the low probability state of the ordinary symbol at the timing when the big hit change is started. Therefore, by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the state where the probability change state is set, the probability change state can be shifted to the latent probability state.

  Also. By performing the process of setting the value of the time reduction counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the process of shifting the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low-probability state on condition that the jackpot has been won, and the change of the special symbol Both the process of shifting the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low-probability state on condition that the number of times reaches the predetermined number can be executed using the game state update process (S308). Thus, even when a plurality of conditions for terminating the high probability state of the ordinary symbol are provided, it is possible to prevent the processing of the main control device 110 from being complicated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S405, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203h is ON (S405: Yes), or when it is determined in the processing of S406 that the lottery result is out of order (S406: No), an out-of-spec symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S412), and thereafter, the present process is terminated.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 35), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit, 1 It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not a big hit is made is based on whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is on. This special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON in the processing of S407 in the first special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 34).

  In the process of S501, when it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol has been set (S501: Yes), the first special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 34) obtained in the process of S401 in the first special symbol big hit determination process described above. Based on the value of the hit type counter C2, the hit type is determined from the hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S501 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place (that is, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is off) (S501: No), the processing of S502 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S503.

  In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, a variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the game state is read (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The game state is determined based on the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time reduction counter 203f. In the process of S505, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S505), and then a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern (S505). S506).

  When the process of S506 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S507), and then the first symbol display device 37 is set to start changing the first special symbol (S508), and the process of S505 is performed. The value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m, and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a description will be given of a game state update process (S308), which is one process of a first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the gaming state update processing (S308). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, only the value of the time saving counter 203f of the state of the probability change flag 203g, which is a condition for setting the game state, and the value of the time saving counter 203f are updated at the start of the special symbol change. Furthermore, in the game state update process (see FIG. 36), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 33), a process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f is executed.

  Then, although the details will be described later, the probable change flag 203g that is set to ON is set to OFF when the big hit change ends and the special symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed (when the big hit game is executed). It is configured as follows.

  In other words, of the two condition elements (the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time-saving counter 203f) referred to when setting the game state, one condition element is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the other condition elements are updated. Can be updated at the time of stoppage of the change of the special symbol, it is possible to easily diversify the game state set by combining the two condition elements. Also, since a specific game state (for example, a latent state) can be set only during a period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the end thereof, it is advantageous for the player only during a predetermined period. A game state can be set.

  When the game state update process (see FIG. 36) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is larger than 0 (S601). When it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0 (S601: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is greater than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S602), and a remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set. (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S604). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S604: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S605). ). Here, when it is determined that the certainty change flag 203g is set to ON (S605: No), the certainty change state where the time-saving game is not provided (that is, the certainty certainty state) indicates the latent certainty state. The status command is set (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S605 that the probability change flag 203g is not set to ON (S605: No), a status command indicating the normal state is set (S607) because the normal state is set (S607). To end.

  On the other hand, in the process of S604, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is not 0 (S604: No), the present process ends as it is.

  In this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be continuously set until the next time the special symbol jackpot is won (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the jackpot). In addition to this, for example, a probable change counter is provided instead of the probable change flag 203g, and the value of the probable change counter is decremented every time a special symbol is changed, and the value of the probable change counter becomes 0. In such a case, the high probability state of the special symbol may be shifted to the low probability state.

  When such a configuration is used, the game state update processing (S308) shown with reference to FIG. 36 is defined as the special figure change start game state update processing, and separately from the special figure change display at the timing when the special symbol change display ends. By providing a special figure fluctuation stop game state updating process for updating the value of the probability change counter, a process of determining whether or not to end the high probability state of the special symbol, and whether or not to end the high probability state of the ordinary symbol It is possible to execute the process of determining whether or not it is different timing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 31) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. Give an explanation. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change executing process (S205). In the first special symbol variation executing process (S205), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

  When the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701). Here, a brief description will be given of a case where the present process is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when the special figure 1 is fluctuating and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win (small hit). When the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the big hit flag 203o is set to ON in the processing, so that the main controller 110 executes a timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds. When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) is executed (2 ms after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON) (FIG. 32), a big hit is found in the process of S201. Therefore, the first special symbol change execution process (S205) is not executed. Then, the big hit game (or the small hit game) ends, and it is determined in the processing of S201 that it is not during the big hit (or the small hit), so the first special symbol change executing processing (S205) is executed. Will be. With this configuration, the state in which the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON is a big hit (or small hit) game. It is configured so that the timing is ended and the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure variation that has stopped the subtraction of the variation time is restarted.

  Returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. In the process of S701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701: Yes), then a special figure 1 change restart command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 temporary The stop flag 203v is set to off (S703), and the process proceeds to S704. On the other hand, in the processing of S701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S701: No), the processing of S702 and S703 is skipped and S704 is performed. Move to the processing of.

  In the processing of S704, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is decremented and updated by 1 (S704), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this processing ends.

  Next, a first special symbol change stop process (S207), which is one of the special symbol change processes (S104 in FIG. 32), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change stop processing (S207).

  In the first special symbol change stop process (S207), first, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) has the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h set to ON (S801). If it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set on for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set on (S802), A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S803). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a deviated symbol (S804).

  When the processing of S804 is completed, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S805), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability change flag 203g are reset (S806). Next, the big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and the process shifts to S808.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S801, if the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S801: No), the processing of S802 to S807 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S808.

  In the processing of S808, a special figure 1 determination command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is to be fixed and stopped is set (S808). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol, which is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37, is executed (S809), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the first special symbol stop processing (S207), the processing (S802 to S809) of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S801: Yes), a process (S803, S804) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during the variable display is executed.

  In the first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the second special symbol during the variable display is forcibly stopped and displayed with the deviating symbol. It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) at the time when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol ends, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. This makes it possible to provide a more natural effect as compared to a case where the player is forcedly stopped due to a deviation. In the present embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S806 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 34). For example, a jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S706 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 34) using the opening period of the jackpot game. You may make it.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol change start process (S210) executed in the special symbol change process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start process (S210). In the second special symbol change start process (S210), a process for starting the change of the special figure 2 is executed. It should be noted that, with respect to the processing relating to the change of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46, the target of the change is only different from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Detailed description of the elements is omitted.

  In the second special symbol change start processing (S209), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 change stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901). If it is determined that the special figure 2 change stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 change stop flag 203s is set to OFF (S902), and the process ends. As described above, the special figure 2 change stop flag 203s is a flag that, when the big change of the first special symbol ends, causes the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the departure and is set to ON. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on, it means that the big hit is started, and the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is ON in the processing of S901, this processing is terminated without executing each processing of S902 to S907 for setting the fluctuation start.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S901 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S901: No), the second special symbol execution area 203b (Various counter values) are acquired (S903). Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired data exists based on the data acquired in the processing of S903 (S904). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area (S904: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S903, when it is determined that there is data (S904: Yes), the second special symbol big hit determination process for executing the second special symbol big hit determination based on the stored counter values is performed. Execute (S905). Details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S905 is completed, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S903 (S906). . Details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S906 ends, the above-described gaming state update processing (see FIG. 36) is executed (S907), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) which is a process of the second special symbol change start process (S210 of FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), since the same process as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is executed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is performed. The differences will be mainly described.

  When the second special symbol big hit determination process (S905) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is obtained (S1001). Then, based on each of the acquired counter values and the state of the probability change flag 203g, the processing of S1002 to S1004 for acquiring the lottery result of the jackpot is executed. These processes are the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) except that the counter value used for the lottery (determination) is obtained from the second special symbol execution area 203b. Control is executed.

  When the processing of S1003 or S1004 is completed, it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S1005). When it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is not set to ON (S1005: No), it is determined whether or not the obtained lottery result is a big hit (S1006), and when it is determined that the big hit is obtained. (S1006: Yes), the processing of S1007 to S1010 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol to the jackpot is executed, and this processing ends. In these processes of S1007 to S1010, the same processes as the processes of S407 to S410 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the big hit in the first special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 34) are executed. Is done.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1005, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S1005: Yes), or in the processing of S1006, the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a big hit. If it is determined (S1006: No), special figure 2 departure variation processing for setting a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or departure of the second special symbol is executed (S1011), and this processing ends. Details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation change processing (S1011).

  In the special figure 2 deviation change process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S1003 or S1004 in FIG. 40 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1101), and the lottery result is determined to be a small hit. If it is determined that is (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is turned on (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1103). Then, a small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), an out-of-position symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1105). This processing ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 42, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is a process of a second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. Will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 42), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1201). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the second special symbol jackpot is set. (S1202). Here, the determination as to whether or not it is a big hit is made based on whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is on for the second special symbol. This special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of S1007 in the second special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 40).

  In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (see FIGS. 17 and 19) is read. (S1203). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1001 in the above-described second special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 40), the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16 (a)) The type is determined (S1204).

  When the processing of S1204 is completed, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S1205), and then a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern. (S1206). Then, the flow shifts to the process of S1208.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1202 that the jackpot of the second special symbol has not been set (S1202: No), the special figure 2 departure variation pattern selection processing (S1207) is executed, and the processing proceeds to S1208. Transition.

  In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1208). Next, the change start of the second special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S1209), and the value indicating the change time of the change pattern selected in the process of S1205 is set in the special figure 2 change time counter 203n ( S1210), and terminates this processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 43, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1207) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1207).

  In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1207 in FIG. 43), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1301). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1301). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is obtained from the second special symbol execution area (S1302). Then, based on the obtained value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B), the small hit type is selected (S1303).

  Next, a fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the current game state is read (S1304), and the small hit fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read from the read fluctuation pattern selection table. Is selected (S1305). After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hit fluctuation pattern is set (S1306), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out of place) (S1301: No), a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current game state (FIG. 17 (see FIG. 17 and FIG. 19) (S1307), and an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1308). After that, a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S1309), and the process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, a second special symbol variation executing process (S211) which is one of the special symbol variation processes (see S104 in FIG. 32) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The contents are explained. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change executing process (S211). In the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 2 is suspended, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

  When the second special symbol change executing process (S211) is executed, first, the special symbol 2 change time counter 203n is decremented by 1 and updated (S1401), and the first special symbol display device 37 displays the second special symbol. Is updated (S1402), and this process ends.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol change stop processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change stop processing (S213). The second special symbol change stop process (S213) is a process for stopping the change of the special figure 2.

  When the second special symbol change stop process (S213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S1501), and the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON. If it is determined (S1501: Yes), a special figure 1 change stop command indicating stop of the special figure 1 change is set (S1503). Next, when the processing of S1503 is completed, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is released and stopped and displayed with the symbol (S1504). Next, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1505), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, the probability change flag 203g, and the time reduction counter 203f are reset (S1506). Next, the big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1507), and the process shifts to S1509.

  In the processing of S1509, a special figure 2 determination command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is to be fixed and stopped is set (S1509). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol which is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1510), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1501 that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is not set to ON (S1501: No), the special figure 2 departure stop processing is executed (S1508), and the above-described S1509 and S1510 are performed. Is performed, and this process ends.

  Next, the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1508), which is one of the second special symbol change stop processing (S213 in FIG. 45), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1508). In the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1508), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than the big hit (small hit, departure), the special figure 2 showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the lottery result of Toku-zu 2 is a small hit, a process for temporarily stopping the running of Toku-zu 1 is executed.

  In the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1508), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S1602). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating ON of the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set (S1603).

  When the process of S1603 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S1604). Thereafter, the small hit flag 203k is set to off (S1605), and the small hit flag 203p is set to on (S1606).

  When the processing of S1606 is completed, a special figure 2 determination command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to stop the second special symbol is determined (S1607). After that, the second special symbol, which is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37, stops changing with the small hit symbol (S1608), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1601, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order) (S1601: No), the second special symbol is fixed and stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to do so is set (S1609). After that, the second special symbol, which is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37, is deviated and stopped at the symbol (S1610), and the process is terminated.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed. Can be displayed. Therefore, a lottery game of more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit is given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  In the present embodiment, when a special symbol indicating a big hit is stopped and displayed in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed while being temporarily stopped or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, since the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is being performed, the player loses the lottery game in the middle of the variable display. Can be grasped that it is not, you can play a jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a description will be given of a start winning process (S105), which is one process of a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) is to determine whether or not a game ball has entered (wins) the first ball opening (first start port) 64. This is a process of storing the acquired counter values in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a up to the upper limit number (up to four in the first entrance 64). When each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In addition, a process of predicting the result of the determination of the success or failure, the selected variation pattern, and the like is performed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105) will be described.

  In the start winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (started winning) the first ball opening 64 which is the first starting port (S1701). Here, the determination is made using the detection result of a first ball entry switch (not shown) that detects the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained (S1702). ). It is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703). It is determined whether this is less than the upper limit of the number of reserves for the first entrance 64, that is, four (that is, whether the number of reserves is not stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S1704). A suspended ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the suspended number is set (S1705). Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is read. Are held (stored) in the storage areas corresponding to the number of held balls (S1706).

  Next, based on the stored counter values, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination, the determined hit type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (S1707). Then, the winning information command including the predicted result of the first special symbol is determined (S1708), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port (first ball entry port) 64 and is newly held and stored, based on the information stored and held, a hit / failure determination result is obtained. Is determined before the start of the change, and is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from the normal one) based on the result of the determination of whether the ball is reserved or stored, It is possible to display an announcement symbol or the like and execute an effect that suggests the result of determination to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol change process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the second symbol change display and change time performed by the second symbol display device 83, the lower first ball entrance 64b2. This is a process for controlling the opening operation and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with.

  In the normal symbol change process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a hit with a normal symbol (second symbol) (S1801). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the control for opening and closing the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is performed while the indicator indicating the hit is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. While being done. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1801: Yes), a new normal symbol change (lottery) cannot be started (executed). This processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1801: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (normal symbol changing). If it is determined (S1802) that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (ordinary symbol is changing) (S1802: No), that is, the variation of the ordinary symbol even while the present is hitting the ordinary symbol If it is determined that there is no state among them, that is, a state in which a new ordinary symbol change (lottery) can be started (executed), the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the change display of the ordinary symbol is held) The number of times M) is obtained (S1803).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S1804), and it is determined that the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is 0. (S1804: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203e is not 0 (S1804: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S1805). The data stored in the symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S1806).

  In the process of S1806, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding first to fourth areas of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the ordinary symbol holding first area → the execution area, the ordinary symbol holding second area → the ordinary symbol holding first area, the ordinary symbol holding third area → the ordinary symbol holding second area, the ordinary symbol holding fourth area → Normally, the data in each area is shifted, for example, in the symbol holding third area. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S1807).

  Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S1807 and the normal symbol (second) random number table 202c, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S1808). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 10”, it is determined that the ordinary symbol is a hit, and the ordinary symbol is hit. When the high probability state is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 231”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “232”, Normally, it is determined that the design is out of place.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S1808 is a winning of the ordinary symbol (S1809). If it is determined that the winning is a winning of the ordinary symbol (S1809: Yes), Is set (S1810), and the process moves to S1811. In the process of S1810, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol "O" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1809 that the pattern is out of the ordinary pattern (S1809: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1812, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “x” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S1811.

  When the processing of S1810 or S1812 is completed, in the processing of S1811, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (hour saving state) of a normal symbol (S1811), and the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal pattern (hour saving). (S1811: Yes), the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S1813), and then the ordinary symbol short variation flag 203t is set to ON. (S1814), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (the low probability state of the normal symbol) (S1811: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device is determined. Is set to 10 seconds (S1815), and this processing ends.

  The ordinary figure short fluctuation flag 203t set to ON in the processing of S1814 is a configuration for temporarily storing a game state at the timing when the ordinary symbol lottery is executed, and the ordinary symbol fluctuation is stopped. This is displayed and referred to when setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a. Thereby, the opening operation content of the electric accessory 64a can be varied according to the game state of the change timing (lottery) of the ordinary symbol and the opening operation timing of the electric accessory 64a.

  In the present embodiment, the game state at the start (execution) timing of the change (lottery) of the ordinary symbol is configured to be temporarily stored using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. For example, in the game state storage means capable of always storing the currently set game state, when it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit, the gaming state when the lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed is displayed. You may comprise so that the storage area for temporarily storing may be provided. Further, a means for constantly storing the period in which the normal state is set is provided, and the period stored in the unit (the period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing at which the normal symbol lottery is performed. By doing so, the game state at the timing when the normal symbol lottery is performed may be determined. In other words, any configuration may be used as long as it has a storage unit capable of storing the currently set game state and a storage unit capable of storing at least the game state set at a predetermined timing in the past.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1802, when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1802: Yes), the variation time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S1816). Here, the variable time is a time set beforehand in the second symbol display device 83 by the processing of S1810 or the processing of S1812 before the variable display is started.

  In the processing of S1813, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1816: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1816, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S1816: Yes), a stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1817). In the process of S1817, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S1810, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped on the second symbol display device (lighted display). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S1812, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. In addition, the period in which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period in which one spot is turned on in the blinking display (alternate display of “」 ”and“ X ”) indicating that the second symbol is changing. (Determined and displayed). This allows the player to easily understand that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S1817, when the second symbol display update process (S2208 of FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is next performed, the variable display on the second symbol display device is performed. Is completed, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S1810 or the process of S1812.

  After the processing of S1817 is completed, next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) (this lottery result) Is determined to be a normal symbol hit (S1818). When it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S1818: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a winning of a normal symbol (S1818: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the general figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819).

  In the process of S1819, when it is determined that the ordinary figure short variation flag 203t is not set to ON (set to OFF), that is, the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the current ordinary symbol is started is changed. If it is determined that it is in the normal state (S1819: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1821), and the process proceeds to S1820. I do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1819, when it is determined that the ordinary figure short variation flag 203t is set to ON, that is, it is determined that the gaming state at the time when the lottery (fluctuation) of the current ordinary symbol is started is the time reduction state. If it has been done (S1816: Yes), the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to off (S1820), and it is then determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time reduction state (medium time reduction) (S1821).

  In the process of S1821, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (S1821: No), the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (change) of the ordinary symbols is started this time is the normal state, and the current gaming state ( Since the timing of setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a) is in the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set. One time is set (S1824), and the flow shifts to the process of S1823.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S1821: Yes), the timing at which the lottery (fluctuation) of the current ordinary symbol is started, and the current gaming state (opening operation of the electric accessory 64a) Are set to the time saving state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 times (the electric accessory). 64a long opening operation is set) (S1822), and the process proceeds to S1823.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the ordinary symbol is executed, the timing of setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a executed based on the winning of the ordinary symbol, Only when both are in the time saving state, an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a.

  With this configuration, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening operation that is advantageous to the player. For example, in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the lottery of the normal symbol ( Even if the time-saving state is set before the fluctuation time (10 seconds) of the ordinary symbol ends, long opening is set as the operation of the electric accessory 64a. There is nothing. Similarly, in the normal symbol fluctuation (lottery) executed in the state where the time saving state is set, a win is won, and the normal state is set as the gaming state until the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops. Even in this case, the long opening of the electric accessory 64a is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (long opening of the electric accessory 64a) for the player.

  Furthermore, since the electric accessory 64a can be prevented from being long opened in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, it is easy to perform a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player. The time period can be limited during working hours. In the present embodiment, the game state at the timing when the lottery (change) of the ordinary symbol is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set are determined, and the game state set at each timing is determined. Although the above-described configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the electric accessory 64a based on the configuration, other configurations may be used.

  For example, the opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when the timing at which the lottery (change) of the ordinary symbol is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set are both in the normal state (S1824 in FIG. 48). (Opening operation set in step S1822 in FIG. 48) may be set (opening operation set in step S1822 in FIG. 48). With this configuration, a privilege (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is provided even for a normal symbol change executed before and after the time saving state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, the time saving state can be made more advantageous for the player.

  As described above, while the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol becomes very short as “10 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case where the normal state is set, and further, Since the opening period of the lower first entrance 64b2 is very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 → 2 seconds × 2”, the ball can easily enter the lower first entrance 64b2. Become. In addition, in this embodiment, when the big hit game is executed, the time saving state is configured to end, so that the normal state is set during the big hit game. On the other hand, when the small hitting game is executed, the time reduction state is set continuously unless the time reduction end condition is satisfied. During the winning game, a period in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the small winning game, and the electric accessory 64a is long opened, and a plurality of winning openings (a first specific winning opening 65a, a lower first winning opening). This is a specific period during which the ball can easily enter the ball 64b2).

  By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 illustrated in FIG. 2, the electric accessory 64 a and the lower first ball entrance 64 b 2 are disposed above the first variable winning device 65. It is preferable that the ball enter the two winning ports (the V winning device 65a and the lower first ball entry port 64b2) during the small hitting game, whereby the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the small hitting game. Can be increased, and a more advantageous privilege can be given to the player.

  Returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1820, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is set (S1823), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S1823, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S2206) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S1824 or S1822 are completed.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 31), and it is determined whether or not a game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the passage of the game ball is determined. If there is, this is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and suspending it.

  In the through gate passage process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number M of times of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S1903).

  Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal design holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1903: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1903: Yes), the normal The value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S1904).

  When the processing of S1904 is completed, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is stored in the free symbol holding area 203c of the RAM 203 in the free symbol holding area (holding first area). (S1905) is stored in the first area of (area to fourth reserved area), and the process ends. In the process of S1905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the initial area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the initial area.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, a state in which a ball can enter the lower first entrance opening 64b2 provided by winning the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. .

  By indicating the timing at which such a game state is provided based on the result of the prior determination of the general drawing, the player can play the game without overlooking a more advantageous game state than the normal game state. In addition, in the case of performing an effect using such a pre-determination result of the general figure, not only the effect based on the result of the determination of the success or failure of the general figure, but also the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a when the general figure is determined to be a hit. It is good to do a production that suggests the timing of By doing in this way, in the normal gaming state, the player plays the game aiming at the gaming area on the left side of the gaming board 13, and the lower first entrance 64 b 2 (the entrance with the electric accessory 64 a) is placed on the gaming board 13. , It is possible to switch to a game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right-handed) before the electric accessory 64a performs the opening operation, and it is in a normal gaming state. Even so, there is an effect that the possibility that the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 can be increased.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S2001). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt process is similarly executed in the payout control device 111, and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2101). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S2102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S2104). If it is turned on (S2104: Yes), the process proceeds to S2110. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch (see FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105). S2105: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S2110.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also shifts to S2110 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S2110, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2110). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process (S2111, S2112) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the initialization processing (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is executed.

  Similarly, the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is executed also when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S2111, S2112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2111), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2112). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process shifts to the process of S2113.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S2105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal. If there is any (S2107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S2108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2113). After that, the state of the probability change flag 203g and each value of the time reduction counter 203f are read (S2114), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (S2115). When the processing in S2115 ends, an interrupt is permitted (S2116), and the flow shifts to main processing described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In the main processing, roughly, a counter update processing and a power-off processing are executed.

  In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices). ) Is executed (S2201).

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormal signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2203). A jackpot control process is executed (S2204). The details of the jackpot control process (S2204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, but a process of setting the operation of the first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the big hit game process (S2204) is executed, the small hit control process (S2205) is executed. The small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S2206). In this electric auditors product opening and closing process (S2206), the opening and closing process of the electric auditors product 64a is executed. Thereafter, a display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2207).

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “○” or “X”) by the second symbol display device is executed (S2208). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing of passing the ball, and the second symbol display device displays the value. The variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is hit, the electric accessory 64a is opened for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S2210). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already elapsed (S2210: Yes), the process proceeds to S2201, and the above-described processes after S2201 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S2210: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2211).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2211). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2202 (S2212).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S2201 to S2208 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S2209, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 50 has been executed, the processing at the time of power-off after S2213 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2213), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S2214). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S2215), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2216), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S2209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S2201 to S2208 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S2211 and S2212 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, the information of the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing in S2201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S2201). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S2201. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S2204). The jackpot control process (S2204) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a first specific prize are performed. This is processing for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a.

  In the jackpot control process (S2204), it is first determined whether a jackpot scenario has been set (S2301). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S2301: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2301 that the jackpot scenario has been set (S2301: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302), and it is determined whether it is time to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2303). . More specifically, in the process of S2302, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2303, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts opening the jackpot scenario. Is determined to be a value corresponding to.

  In the process of S2303, if it is determined that it is the timing of the start of the jackpot scenario opening (the jackpot start) (S2303: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S2304), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of starting the jackpot scenario opening (S2303: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of starting a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305).

  In the process of S2305, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot is executed ( In step S2306, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2305 that the timing is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: No), it is next determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied ( S2307). Here, in the present embodiment, while the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in total, or When the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a has elapsed for a predetermined time (30 seconds), it is determined that the round end condition has been satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied (S2307: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a that is currently open in the process of S2308 is set to be closed. This processing ends. Note that the above-described determination processing in S2305 to S2307 is repeatedly performed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2307, if it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S2309), and the ending effect is performed. (S2309: Yes), the ending command for the big hit is set (S2310), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the big hit is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2309 that the timing is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2309: No), it is determined whether the timing is the end timing of the jackpot (S2311). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. In the process of S2311, if it is determined that it is the timing of ending the jackpot (S2311: Yes), a jackpot ending process for setting a game state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S2312), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot end processing (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is not the jackpot end timing (S2311: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the jackpot end process (S2312), which is one of the jackpot control processes (S2204 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. The big hit end process (S2312) is a process for setting the game state after the big hit end, as described above. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot ending process (S2312).

  In the jackpot ending processing (S2312), first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the winning state storage area 203j (S2401). Next, it is determined whether or not the current big hit is a big change big hit (a big hit type in which the positive change flag 203g is set to ON after the big hit game ends) (S2402). Here, in the process of S2402, determination is made based on the jackpot type set this time. In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the current big hit is a certainty big hit (S2402: Yes), the certainty changing flag 203g is set to ON (S2403), and the process proceeds to S2404. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when it is determined that the current big hit is not the probability variable big hit (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2404. Thereby, the low probability state of the special symbol is set as the gaming state after the big hit.

  Next, a value corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning read out by the processing of S2401 and the jackpot type is set in the time reduction counter 203f (S2404). Specifically, when “big hit A” is set as the big hit type, the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to “10000” in order to continue the high probability state of the ordinary symbol until the next big hit, and “big hit B” Is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to "100" in order to continue the high probability state of the ordinary symbol until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100 times.

  After the process of S2404 is completed, the big hit flag 203o is turned off, and the winning state storage area 203j is cleared (S2405). After that, a state command corresponding to the set gaming state is set (S2406), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time and the game state at the time of the win are determined, and two condition elements for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game are set. It is configured to set the contents of (probable change flag 203g, time reduction counter 203f). Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to watch both the jackpot type of the jackpot that has been won and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Next, the small hit control process (S2205), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process (S2205).

  In the small hit control process (S2205), first, it is determined whether a small hit scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the process of S1604 of the special figure 2 departure stop process (see FIG. 46) is executed, and it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set. In the process of S2501, if the small hit scenario has not been set (S2501: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the small hit scenario is set in the process of S2501 (S2501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the small hit scenario opening (S2503). More specifically, in the process of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is changed to the small hit scenario. Is determined to be a value corresponding to the start of the opening.

  In the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503: Yes), a small hit opening command is set (S2504), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of starting the small hit scenario (S2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the round of the small hit scenario (S2505).

  In the process of S2505, if it is determined that it is time to start the round of the small hit scenario (S2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process is executed (S2506), and this process ends. The small hit operation setting process (S2506) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the round start of the small hit scenario (S2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, five) are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is opened, or when the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses a predetermined time. Is determined, the round end condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S2507, if it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the processing of S2508, and this processing is performed. To end. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S2509).

  In the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is the timing of the start of the ending effect (S2509: Yes), a small hit ending command is set (S2510), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the big hit is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). Here, the small hit end timing indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

  In the process of S2511, when it is determined that it is the timing of ending the small hit (S2511: Yes), the small hit flag 203p is set to off (S2512), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and this process ends. Details of the second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the small hit operation setting process (S2506) which is one of the small hit control processes (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit operation setting process (S2506).

  In the small hit operation setting process (S2506), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of a small hit to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set by the data read in the processing of S2601 (S2602), and this processing ends.

  As described above, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power-off occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game may be terminated halfway. Defects can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the second winning process (S2513), which is one process of the small hit control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the second winning processing (S2513). This second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55), and is a process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning opening 65a as described above.

  In the second winning process (S2513), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is a round valid period (S2701). Here, the round effective period is a period during which the round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state to when the interval period (5 seconds) ends. In the processing of S2701, if it is not the round validity period (S2701: No), the winning counter 203u is reset (S2702), and this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2701 that the current time is the round validity period (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a winning in the specific winning opening 65a has been detected (S2703), and the process proceeds to the specific winning opening 65a. If the winning has not been detected (S2703: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2703, if a winning for the specific winning opening 65a has been detected (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203u and updated (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or more than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705). If the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or less than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705). S2705: No), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or more than the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) (S2705: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing plate 65f1 associated with) is set (S2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 72, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 58, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the power-on processing in S4117 is performed (see FIG. 59) due to the instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 59, upon receiving the power-off occurrence information from main controller 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 59), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S4117. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4117 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S4117 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S4116 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword of “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the flow shifts to S4008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S4117, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or may transmit an error command to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S4117 (see S4116 in FIG. 59). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag is on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The status setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after, for example, the power is completely shut off, and thus the process of step S4008 is performed via the processes of steps S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), the process skips S4009 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S4010, and sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is that when the process from S4004 to S4008 is performed via the process in S4006, all the storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004. When the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control unit 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the audio ramp control unit 113. Can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S4101 was executed (S4101). If the above has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. S4102 to S4110 are processes related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4111 and the variable display setting processing in S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. , The setting relating to the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S4104). The power-on notification processing is to perform notification for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be done. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is performed as a command by the display control device. Sent to 114.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and a sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and a sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S4109, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). After that, the processing shifts to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S4110, various counter update processes are executed (S4111), and the process shifts to the process of S4112. The details of the various counter updating processes will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, a command determination process (S4112) for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed, and the process proceeds to S4113. The details of the command determination processing (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4113, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 so as to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmitting to the user, is executed. Details of the variable display setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Upon completion of the process in S4113, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off processing is executed (S4117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S4118), and then the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4115: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4112). This command determination processing (S4112) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Hereinafter, the details of the command determination processing (S4112) will be described.

  In the command determination process (S4112), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and It is determined whether the 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: Yes), a stop type command receiving process is executed (S4202), and this process ends. Details of the stop type command reception processing (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether a state command has been received from the main control device 110. Is determined (S4203). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4203: Yes), a status command process is executed (S4204), and this process ends. The details of this state command processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62. However, based on the state command output from main controller 110, the game state of pachinko machine 10 (normal state, probable change state, latent state The processing for setting (state) in the state setting area 223j is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4205). Here, the special figure 1 change pattern command is a command for notifying a change pattern (change time) of the first special symbol.

  In the process of S4205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 change pattern command has been received (S4205: Yes), the special figure 1 change start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4206). The variation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4207), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is used in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. To notify the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (setting a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol) Used).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4205: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4208). The special figure 2 change pattern command is a command for notifying a change pattern (change time) of the second special symbol.

  In the process of S4208, when it is determined that the special figure 2 change pattern command has been received (S4208: Yes), the special figure 2 change start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4209). The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (S4210), and the process ends. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is used in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. To notify the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol) Used).

  In the process of S4208, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4211: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 included in the received reserved ball number command (that is, the first (The number of reserved balls in the variation display of the special symbol) is extracted, and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value ( S4212), this process ends. In the present embodiment, since the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not held and stored, the value of the first special symbol (special figure 1) reserved ball number counter 223c is set in the process of S4212. Only the process to be updated is executed.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first ball entrance 64, so that every time there is a starting winning, the process of S4212 is performed. The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the engine is started. If the reserved ball number command is notified based on winning, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol reserved ball number of the main control device 110 is corrected. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d.

  Also, in the processing of S4211, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4213). In the processing of S4213, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4213: Yes), the information of the received winning information command (whether or not a special symbol lottery is won, hitting type, and variation pattern) corresponds to the winning information. This is set in the storage area 223b (S4214), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4213 that no winning information command has been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not a hit-related command has been received from the main control device (S4216). In the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (S4216: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S4216), and this process ends. The details of the hit-related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63. However, as a result of the special symbol lottery, an effect corresponding to a big hit game or a small hit game executed when a big hit or a small hit is won. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether or not a command to reduce the number of remaining hours has been received from the main controller 110 (S4217). In the process of S4217, when it is determined that the command for the remaining working hours is received (S4217: Yes), the remaining times updating process (S4218) is executed. The details of the remaining number updating process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 66. However, based on the remaining short time command output from the main control device 110, the remaining symbol number updating process (S4218) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Processing for setting the contents of the effect display is executed.

  In the process of S4217, if it is determined that the command for the remaining working hours has not been received (S4217: No), it is determined whether a command for temporarily stopping has been received from the main controller 110 (S4219). In the process of S4219, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process is executed (S4220), and this process ends. The details of the temporary stop-related processing (S4220) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but a process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when a special figure 1 temporary stop command or a special figure 2 temporary stop command is received. When the special figure 1 change restart command or the special figure 2 change restart command is received, processing for setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4219 that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4221), and this processing ends. In the process of S4221, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the process of determining whether a status command has been received (see S4203 in FIG. 60). The processing is configured prior to the processing (see S4205 and S4208 in FIG. 60) for determining whether a fluctuation pattern command for each special symbol has been received.

  With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from main controller 110 at the same time, that is, during the first special symbol fluctuation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) of main controller 110. Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 33) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and in the game state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) executed thereafter, the game is executed. Even when a status command indicating that the status has been changed is set, the game status currently set on the sound ramp control device 113 can be determined earlier than the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

  Therefore, in the case where the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won in the state where the probable change state is set and the latent state is set during the change of the jackpot, the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the latent state is set. A variation effect (see FIG. 7A) corresponding to a variation pattern command that becomes a jackpot variation in the determined state can be easily set.

  Note that, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing according to the fluctuation pattern command is executed before the state command determination processing, the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the above-described jackpot fluctuation is definitely changed. Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display according to the received content is set. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the fluctuation display indicating that the latent state has been set at the same time as the start of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol. Since the fluctuation display indicating that the latent state has been set is delayed in this manner, the timing of notifying the player that the right-handed game is to be performed is delayed. Will give you the problem.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main control device 110 changes the gaming state after the jackpot determination (see S306 in FIG. 33) and the change pattern setting (S307 in FIG. 33). In contrast to executing the (game state update process (S308 in FIG. 33)), the sound lamp control device 113 first executes the process of determining the current game state (S4204 in FIG. 60), and thereafter It is configured to set a fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous gaming state from being set and executed even though the latent state is set.

  Also, by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 to define the order in which various commands output from the main control device 110 are received, the main control device 110 needs to define the output order of various commands. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, the stop type command receiving process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the stop type command receiving process (S4202). This stop type command reception processing (S4202) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113. Hereinafter, the stop type command receiving process (S4202) will be described in detail.

  In the stop type command receiving process (S4202), first, when a special figure 1 stop type command is received corresponding to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, and the special figure 2 If the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4301). Next, from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, out of reach, out of reach, etc.) is extracted (S4302). The process ends.

  The stop type extracted in S4302 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. The type of stop is stored so as to be identifiable. As a result, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage the respective stop types, and to execute an appropriate change display. Can be.

  Next, the state command processing (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this status command processing (S4204). This state command processing (S4204) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the status command processing (S4204) will be described.

  In this state command processing (S4204), a process of setting the current game state in the state setting area 223j based on the state command output from the main control device 110 is executed, and the game state shifts to the latent state. , A process for setting an effect (chance zone effect (see FIG. 6B)) for notifying the player that the latent state has been set, and the game state has shifted to the normal state. In this case, a process for clearing various flags and counters used to display the card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

  In the state command processing (S4204), first, the game state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223j provided in the RAM 223 (S4401). That is, it is determined in which gaming state the state command has been received. Next, it is determined whether the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402). If it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4402: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4403). In the process of S4403, if the received command is a status command indicating a transition to the latent state (S4403: Yes), a latent probability notification effect for notifying entry of the latent state is set (S4404). Then, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process shifts to S4406.

  On the other hand, in the processing of 4402, when it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402: Yes), or in the processing of S4403, the received command shifts to the latent state. If the status command is not the indicated status command (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4406.

  Next, it is determined whether the received command is a status command indicating a transition to a normal status (S4406). If it is determined that the received command is not the status command indicating the transition to the normal status (S4406: No), the processing of S4407 to S4410 is skipped, the processing of S4411 described later is executed, and this processing ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a status command indicating transition to the normal state (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4407). If it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4407: Yes), the value of the prize ball number counter 223u is cleared to 0 (S4408), the card notification flag 223q, and the card notification enable flag are set. 223s and the rush display completed flag 223t are set to off (S4409). Next, the contents of the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o and the remaining time storage area 223p are cleared (S4410), and the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the other state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4411). This processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to OFF (S4407: No), the processes of S4408 and S4409 are skipped, and the processes of S4410 and S4411 are executed. The process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the hit-related process (S4216), which is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the content of the hit-related processing (S4216). In the hit-related process, as a result of the special symbol lottery, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game or the small jackpot game executed when the jackpot or the small jackpot is won. In this case, a process corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a jackpot or small hit is won is executed.

  In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a hit game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball command is accumulated, and Processing for displaying a card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed based on the result.

  In the hit-related processing (S4216), first, it is determined whether or not the command received in the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) has received a big-hit-related command (S4501). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4501: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (S4502), and this process ends.

  Here, the jackpot-related process (S4502), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related processing (S4502). In the jackpot-related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won is performed. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

  In the jackpot-related processing (S4502), first, it is determined whether the jackpot-related command received in the jackpot-related processing (S4216) has received a jackpot start command (S4601). If a jackpot start command has been received (S4601: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4602), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4601 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S4603). If the round number command is received (S4603: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S4604), and the process ends. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number of rounds command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, if the main control device 110 is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has been started as a round update command, the audio ramp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and based on the value of the round number accumulation counter, the sound lamp control device 113 side executes the current round. Calculate the number and set the display round number command. Good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4603 that the round number command has not been received (S4603: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4605). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4605: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4605: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4606), and it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4607). When it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4607: Yes), a display ending command not including the card notification is set (S4608). That is, a process for preventing the display mode of FIG. 10A from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4607, if it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4607: No), the current jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. Is determined (S4609). If it is determined that the current jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: Yes), a display ending command including card notification is set (S4610), and the card notification flag 223q is set to ON. (S4611). That is, a process for displaying the display mode of FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S4609: No), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612). If it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to OFF (S4613), and the above-described processing of S4610 to S4611 is executed. The process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4612, if it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4612: No), the above-described process of S4608 is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the jackpot-related process (S4502 in FIG. 64), the game information (opening, In addition to the process of setting the display contents of the ending and the number of rounds), a process is performed to determine whether or not to display a card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10A).

  The card forgetting alert screen is displayed when a player wins a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls in a hit game (big hit game, small hit game), and borrows a card (ball) to the player. This is a notification mode for calling attention so as not to forget the valuable medium used at the time. In the present embodiment, the above-described card is used when the condition that the number of prize balls acquired in the period (continuous advantage period) from the normal state to the jackpot and the transition to the normal state again reaches the predetermined amount is satisfied. It is configured to display a forgotten warning screen.

  Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 64, the jackpot (the jackpot A, which can easily acquire a prize ball exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) in the jackpot (first hit) which is won in the normal state. If the jackpot is won, the card notification for displaying the card forgetting alert screen at the end of the jackpot game is executed. If the other jackpots (jackpot C, jackpot D) are won, the card notification is executed. It is configured not to.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a player who has not obtained a predetermined amount of prize balls is displayed with a card forgetting warning screen, and the player can continue playing games while borrowing balls. It is possible to prevent the player performing the game from feeling uncomfortable.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit game, a small hit game can be frequently set to be set in a game state (latency state) in which the small hit game can be easily executed. In some cases, a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls may be obtained. Therefore, the number of prize balls acquired by the player during the advantageous continuation period (the number of prize balls paid out during the advantageous period) is accumulated, and when the accumulated result exceeds a predetermined amount (250 shots), the execution is performed at that time. It is configured to display a card forgetting alert screen on the ending screen of the middle jackpot game or the small jackpot game. As a result, a card forgetting alert screen can be displayed to the player at an appropriate timing.

  In the present embodiment, the card forgetting alert screen is notified only once during one advantageous continuation period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the card forgetting alert screen from being displayed frequently and giving the player uncomfortable feeling. The method for displaying the card forgetting alert screen is not limited to the contents of the present embodiment. For example, a measuring means for measuring an advantageous continuation period is provided, and the elapsed time since the previous card forgetting alert screen was displayed. If the time exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), the card forgetting alert screen may be displayed again. In this case, since the card forgetting alert screen is once displayed (since the display condition for displaying the card forgetting alert screen is already satisfied), during the special symbol fluctuation period (for example, during the advantageous continuation period) In a case where a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds or more is selected in (2), a card forgetting alert screen may be displayed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current game situation by using the fixed concept of the player that the card forgetting alert screen is displayed after the big hit game ends. In addition, as a method of achieving the same effect, a big hit game may display a card forgetting warning screen using the opening period of the small hit game.

  Referring back to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4501 that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S4501), it is determined whether the received command has received a small jackpot-related command (S4503). If it is determined that the received command is the small hit related command (S4503: Yes), the small hit related process (S4504) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the small hit-related process (S4504), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit-related process (S4504). In the small hit-related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won is performed. The processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

  In the small hit-related process (S4504), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received in the hit-related process (S4216) has received a small hit start command (S4701). If the small hit start command has been received (S4701: Yes), a small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that the received command is not the small hit start command (S4701: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S4703: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S4703: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S4704), and it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4705). . If it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4705: Yes), a display ending command not including the card notification is set (S4706), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4705 that the card notification completion flag 223q is not set to ON (S4705: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4707). When it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4707: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to OFF (S4708), and a display ending command including the card notification is set (S4708). (S4709), the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4710), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4707, the card notification possible flag 223s is not set to ON (S4707: No), the process of S4706 described above is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even in a small hit game that does not satisfy the display condition for displaying the card forgetting alert screen in one game, even if the big hit is won in the normal state, If the accumulated value of the number of prize balls acquired during the game period (advantageous continuation period) until the normal state is set again satisfies the display condition (for example, the number of acquired prize balls reaches 250 shots), a small hit It is configured to display the card forgetting alert screen even after the game is over. As a result, a card forgetting alert screen can be displayed to the player at an appropriate timing.

  Referring back to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S4503, when it is determined that the received command is not the small hit-related command (S4503: No), it is determined whether a prize ball command is received (S4505). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4505: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4505: Yes), a value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball counter 223u (S4506). It is determined whether the notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4507). If it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is not set to ON (S4507: No), it is determined whether the value of the award ball number counter 223u added in the processing of S4506 is 250 or more (S4508). When it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter 223u after the addition is 250 or more (S4508), the card notification enable flag is set to ON (S4509), and the display prize ball number command is set (S4510). Then, the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4507, when it is determined that the card notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4507: Yes), or in the process of S4508, the prize ball number counter 223u after addition is less than 250. If it is determined (S4508: No), the process of S4509 described above is skipped, the process of S4510 is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined that the normal state has been set by the state command processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62), and the value of the award ball counter 223u is cleared. The prize ball number corresponding to the prize ball number command received during the period up to (the advantageous continuation period) is accumulated by the prize ball number counter 223u. Then, at the end of the hit game (big hit game, small hit game) (at the ending screen display timing), a card forgetting alert screen is displayed according to the value of the prize ball number counter 223u at the ending screen display timing.

  Thus, for example, when the jackpot (initial jackpot) that triggers the setting of the advantageous duration is a jackpot C (a jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain a predetermined amount (250 shots) of prize balls in one jackpot game). For example, when the small hit game is won during the advantageous continuation period, or when the big hit C is won again, the card forgetting warning screen can be displayed.

  Next, the remaining number update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the content of the remaining number updating process (S4218). This remaining number update processing (S4218) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113, and the main control device 110 sends Is received, the process of updating the contents set in the remaining short time count area 223k, the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, and the remaining time storage area 223p is executed.

  In the remaining number update process (S4218), first, it is determined whether or not a command to reduce the number of remaining hours has been received from main controller 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the remaining short time command has not been received (S4801: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4801 that the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4801: Yes), the display time reduction command corresponding to the received command is set (S4802), and this process ends.

  Next, the contents of the temporary stop related processing (S4220) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related processing (S4220). In the temporary stop-related processing (S4220), the processing for determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received, and the third symbol display device when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received. A process of setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed at 81 is executed.

  When the temporary stop related processing (S4220) is executed, first, it is determined whether a special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901), and if it has not been received (S4901: No), the fluctuation restart processing is performed. (S4902) is executed. Details of the change restart process (S4902) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4903). Then, it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time calculated in the processing of S4903 is shorter than 2 seconds (S4904), and if it is determined that it is shorter than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time is stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o. A period A indicating that the time is short is set (S4905), and the flow shifts to the process of S4902.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4904 that the remaining fluctuation time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), then the remaining fluctuation period is 2 seconds or more and is longer than 15 seconds. It is determined whether it is short (S4906), and when it is determined that it is 2 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), a period B indicating that it is a normal remaining fluctuation time is stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o. Is set (S4907), and the flow shifts to the process of S4902.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4906, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not less than 15 seconds (exceeding 15 seconds) (S4906: No), it indicates that the remaining fluctuation time is long in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o. The period C is set (S4908), and the flow shifts to the process of S4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when the special figure fluctuation is resumed is calculated at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), and the time corresponding to the period is calculated. By setting such information, an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining fluctuation time can be executed without delay at the timing of restarting the special figure fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, if the period information (period A to period C) set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is different depending on the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when the special figure fluctuation is restarted. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the remaining time is shorter, the period A is easily selected, and as the remaining time is longer, the period C is easily selected. The ratio may be configured to be different according to the remaining time, or the remaining period may be divided at predetermined intervals (for example, 30 seconds), and the periods A to C may be sequentially allocated to each division. You may comprise.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect executed based on the period information set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o and the remaining fluctuation time, The fun of estimating the fluctuation time can be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the fluctuation restart processing (S4902) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the change restart processing (S4902). The fluctuation restart processing (S4902) executes processing for setting an additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received.

  When the fluctuation resumption processing (S4902) is executed, first, it is determined whether a special figure 1 fluctuation resumption command has been received (S5001), and if it has not been received (S5001: No), this processing is ended. . On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 change restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), the remaining change time information stored in the remaining change time information storage area 223o is read out (S5002). ), The additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222c based on the read remaining fluctuation time information and the additional effect counter 223i (S5003). Next, a display additional effect command corresponding to the read additional effect type is set (S5004), the information set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area o is cleared (S5005), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure change is interrupted, the normal effect (the effect display executed when the special figure change is started) ends, and then the special figure change is restarted. In the period until the third symbol is swung, a swing effect for swinging and displaying the third symbol is executed, and when the special figure change is restarted, an additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (remaining change period) after the restart is executed. Although such a configuration is used, other configurations may be used.

  For example, it is provided with effect period discriminating means for discriminating a normal effect period in which a normal effect is executed, and is configured to execute an additional effect when the effect period discriminating means determines that the normal effect period has ended. Is also good. With this configuration, the normal effect and the additional effect can be continuously executed, so that an effect display more suitable for the player can be provided. Also, in this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is performed and the special figure fluctuation period after the restart, and during the error period, the additional effect is continuously executed. Alternatively, a swing effect of swinging and displaying the third symbol may be executed. Further, an error period determination unit for determining the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period determination unit determines that the error period is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as follows.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S4113). The variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is performed in accordance with the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a process of setting a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. In addition, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit G), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the variation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag 223d is off (S5101: No), the special figure 1 change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S5105. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 change start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a latent state (S5103). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the special figure 1 variable display setting process (S5104) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the details of the special figure 1 variable display setting process (S5104), which is one of the variable display setting processes (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. I do. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process (S5104). In the special figure 1 fluctuation display setting (S5104), when the current game state is the latent state, the first special symbol display is displayed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110. A process of setting a latent variation pattern command and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed.

  In the variation display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104), first, the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read (S5201), and the value corresponding to the variation time read in the process of S5201 is set to the sub special figure 1. The variable time counter 223m is set (S5202). Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is a value larger than 0 (S5203). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5203: No), a rush entry command for display is set (S5204), and the rush display completed flag 223t is set to ON (S5205). ). On the other hand, in the process of S5203, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter is greater than 0 (S5203: Yes), the above-described processes of S5204 and S5205 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5206. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a display latent variation pattern command for the first special symbol is set (S5206), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. In the processing of S5103, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), the command is extracted from the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command in the processing of S4205 in the command determination processing (see FIG. 60). A variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S5105). In addition, the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration are "10", it indicates that the command corresponds to the first special symbol, and if "01", it corresponds to the second special symbol. Is configured to correspond to

  The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol set in the processing of S5104 or S5105 is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing (see FIG. 59) of the main processing (see FIG. 59) The information is transmitted to the display control device 114 by S4102). The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, and receives a special variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display, which corresponds to the third symbol display device 81. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (ie, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). The data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted in accordance with the setting of the display (S5106).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5107). If it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S5107: No), the special figure 2 change pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the processing of S5111 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 change start flag 223e is set to off (S5108). Next, the processing of the special figure 2 variable display setting processing (S5109) is executed.

  Here, the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), which is one of the variable display setting processes (S4113 in FIG. 69), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process (S5109).

  In the variation display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), first, in the process of S4210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), a variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read (S5301), and the read variation is read. The value corresponding to the time is set in the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n (S5302). Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent state (S5303). If it is determined that the state is the latent state (S5303: Yes), it is determined whether the rush display completed flag 223t is on (S5304). If it is determined that the rush display completed flag 223t is not on (S5304: No), the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is read (S5305). Next, it is determined whether the remaining time read in the process of S5305 is less than 1 second (S5306). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than one second (S5306: Yes), the process of S5307 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5308.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5306, when it is determined that the read remaining time is 1 second or more (S5306: No), a rush entry command for display is set (S5307), and the rush display completed flag 223t is set to ON. (S5308). Next, based on the extracted fluctuation pattern, a display latent fluctuation pattern command for the second special symbol is set (S5309), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5303 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5303: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S5304 that the rush display completed flag 223t is set to ON. (S5304: Yes), the processing of S5305 to S5308 described above is skipped, the processing of S5309 is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is set in a state where the latent state is set in the state setting area 223j, that is, the latent state is set during the jackpot variable period. When the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation is set, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and when it is determined that the special figure 2 is not changing. Is configured to set a rush entry command as an effect mode of variable display. That is, a screen (see FIG. 7A) for notifying the player that the rush has entered the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the target special figure 1 change is executed is displayed. are doing.

  On the other hand, when setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation in which the jackpot fluctuation period is in the latent state, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and the special figure is determined. If it is determined that No. 2 is fluctuating, as a staging mode of the fluctuating display, a screen indicating that the vehicle is in a latent state without setting a rush entry command for display (see FIG. 6B). It is configured to display.

  Thus, when a screen for instructing a rush entry for display is set and a right-handed game is performed at the time when a screen (see FIG. 7A) for notifying the player of the entry into the rush is displayed, immediately It is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, and to provide a game without a sense of incongruity to the player.

  In addition, when setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation in which the jackpot fluctuation period is in the latent state, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and the special figure 2 is determined. May be forcibly terminated, and a new special figure 2 change may be executed.

  Note that the timing of setting the display rush entry command when the game state shifts to the latent state while the special figure 2 is changing is not limited to the content of the present embodiment, and a game that does not give a player a sense of incompatibility is provided. What is necessary is just a structure which can do. For example, when it is determined that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 during the change is completed at the timing when the latent state is set, a rush entry command for display may be set, or the change at the timing when the latent state is set. The remaining time until the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the middle may be determined, and a rush entry command for display may be set when the determination result becomes a predetermined time (1 second). In this case, the predetermined time to be set is required from the time when the player operates the operation handle 51 and starts the right-handed game to the time the ball fired by the right-handed game enters the second ball entrance 640. The time may be shorter than the period, and may be appropriately set according to the configuration of the game board 13.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The display variation pattern command of the second special symbol set in the process of S5109 is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). This is transmitted to the control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol, and receives a special variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display corresponding to the third symbol display device 81. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed. Then, the data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5110).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S5111). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5111: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5111: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on. Sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to off and, if the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to off (S5112).

  In the processing of S4201 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 60), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S5113), and this processing ends. If the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. If the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. . Note that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the type of the big hit when the big hit occurs. Is done. If the determination result is a miss, the stop type is set without referring to the stop type.

  Next, various counter updating processes (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the various counter updating process (S4111). The various counter updating process (S4111 in FIG. 72) is one process of a main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, and updates the values of the various counters provided in the RAM 223. This is the process of executing the update.

  In the various counter updating process (S4111), first, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401). If it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5402). On the other hand, in the processing of S5401, if it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5401: No), the processing of S5402 is skipped and S5403 is performed. Move to the processing of. Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S5404).

  Next, the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the reading of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n are executed (S5405), and the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is read from the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n. Is subtracted to calculate the remaining time (S5406). The remaining time calculated in the processing of S5406 is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (S5407), and the values of other various counters are decremented by 1 (S5408), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5403, when it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5403: No), the above-described S5404 to S5407 are skipped. , S5408, and terminates the present process.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 73, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to the hardware configuration. , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main process by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of a process corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. Will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when performing random access, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs being transferred are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S6001) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effector.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. The remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. May be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start program of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is transferred. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. The part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. The processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102 and S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  Accordingly, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from among the boot programs is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, and thereby grasps that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S6003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. The image controller responds to the transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 85A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thus, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)), a simple image at power-on (a main image at power-on and a fluctuation image at power-on) (not shown) is drawn. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is stored in the third video. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued. When the main control unit 110 receives the change pattern command for display from the main control unit 110 via the sound lamp control unit 113, that is, when the change pattern command for power supply is received, the change image at power-on is displayed immediately during the change effect period, and the simple change You can make a production. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after power-on, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S6005, interruption permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S6006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processing corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process are not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed to display the image on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process has been executed, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is ON, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the sound lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S6305) are used. , And sends the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stopped symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination processing, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / back out, reach out) is displayed. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), a variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in the case where it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table actually occurs in the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having a time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated while updating the pointer 233f. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpots A to G, small hits A to C, out of reach, or completely out of reach) indicated by the stop type command for display. (S6601), and compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed. A stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to ON (S6603), and returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Note that the start of the change is always determined at least several seconds in the main control device 110, so that no more than two display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of step S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S6602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player mistakes the pachinko machine 10 for the "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection, if the "special symbol jackpot" is actually set, the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disconnection. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, and thus the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the opening command processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 78A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to off (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. The round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both turned off (S6805), the round number command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the ending command processing (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether there is a display rush entry command among unprocessed commands (S6414), and display is performed. If there is a rush entry command for use (S6414: Yes), rush entry command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the rush entry command processing (S6415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the rush entry command processing. The rush entry command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rush entry command processing, first, a rush entry display data table corresponding to the display mode of the rush entry effect indicated by the display rush entry command is determined, and the determined rush entry display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, it is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

  Next, based on the rush entry display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6931, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6934). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both turned off (S6935), the rush entry command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no rush entry command for display (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an additional effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a command (S6416: Yes), additional effect command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the additional effect command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 (b) is a flowchart showing the additional effect command processing. This additional effect command process executes a process corresponding to the display additional effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the additional effect command processing, first, an additional effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the additional effect indicated by the display additional effect command is determined, and the determined additional effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Are set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

  Next, based on the additional effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6955), the additional effect command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no additional production effect command for display (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is an image change command (S6418: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag 233w that notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to OFF (S7002), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after change is determined from the rear image determination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

  In the task processing, if it is specified that either the back A or B is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002 is used. The type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the type of the RAM in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6420). If (S6420: Yes), an error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S7102 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6416, when it is determined that there is no error command (S6420: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the processing of S6401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S6402 to S6422 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S6401 to S6422 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extraction and execution of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 77 (b)), which are the processing corresponding to each command, are performed. A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No) ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of a sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and the like for each sprite are specified. And various parameters necessary for drawing.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, a pointer update process is performed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f specifying the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is the End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( In step S7406, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 82, the description is continued. After the pointer updating process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer updating process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image and the like. And various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or greater than 1 (S7208: No), the display setting process ends and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the effect of the confirmed display has not yet been performed, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The content is cleared (S7210) by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and a certain time has elapsed since the end of the finalized display effect. Thereafter, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7222), a demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), and the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set the drawing content.

  In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process of setting a display data table that defines that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85 and FIG. 86, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is read from the character ROM 234 from the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S7601: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7602 (S7602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and the process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are performed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so as to be maintained without being overwritten during power-on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated with the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and store them in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7705.

  Also, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the processing of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after setting a transfer instruction of image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7706 (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the processing of S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S7705: No), the processing shifts to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), the back image change flag 233w is provided for each back image type. Among the rear image determination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the flow shifts to the process of S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the sub state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 of the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, in the transfer data table, the image data of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, and thus, the predetermined data is defined in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on the transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information A drawing list (FIG. 29) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting processing (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type of the storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the rearranged sprites. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored. ) And the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. In addition, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the rendering process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image drawing processing is being performed.

  In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be able to be simultaneously executed in parallel. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, irrespective of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when one variable display is being executed, another variable display may not be executed. Then, when there is a reserved ball, a variation display may be executed in order from the reserved ball whose start winning is temporally older. With this configuration, the control can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the ordinary symbol), the probable change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability of the ordinary symbol) State), time saving state (low probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol) and latent game state (high probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol) are provided. I have. The latent state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player.

  In other words, when the latent state is set, the fluctuation time for indicating the lottery of the second special symbol, which tends to be a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, is set to another game state. By setting the length to be shorter than the case where the lottery is performed, a lottery advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel playability in which the player is expected to set the latent state.

  Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, in addition to the big hit, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened even in the case of a small hit, so that the variation time of the second special symbol is short. In the state, the prize ball can be continuously increased. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in expectation of a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probable state is the most advantageous game state, but in the present embodiment, the latent state is more advantageous than the probable state, so that novel gaming properties can be provided.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). Fluctuating method). With this, even while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changing, if one of the symbols is stopped with a big hit or a small hit stop symbol, the other variable display indicates the remaining variable time or lottery. Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with the off symbol. Thus, during execution of the big hit or the small hit, the other variable display is fixedly displayed as the hit or the small hit, and it is possible to prevent a problem that the big hit or the small hit is started repeatedly.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed in the state where the probable change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set. The high-probability state of a normal symbol shifts to the low-probability state, and the gaming state shifts from the probable state to the latent state. While the latent state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for indicating the result of the lottery of the second special symbol is set to be short, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed many times. This is the period during which it is possible (the special figure 2 fluctuation advantage period).

  In the present embodiment, since it is configured to win the small hit with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is performed during the period in which the latent state is set as the game state. , A small win game executed frequently is executed, and a gaming state advantageous to a player who can acquire many prize balls (an advantageous state in FIG. 2) is achieved.

  As described above, the period during which the latent state is set in the present embodiment (the special figure 2 fluctuation advantage period) is during the fluctuation display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that has won the jackpot in the probability change state. Because the special figure 1 is in the process of changing the big hit, when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends, the big hit game is executed. In this way, since a plurality of states (the special figure 2 advantageous state and the jackpot game state) that are advantageous to the player are continuously set, it is possible to continuously give the player various benefits. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in one special symbol (special symbol 2) and a small hit game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special symbol 1) is interrupted (variation display period). Is suspended), and when the small hitting game is finished, the suspended variable display period measurement is restarted. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hit game, and therefore, regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period, First, it is possible to provide a certain special figure 2 fluctuation advantage period to the player.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) that is changing is displayed as a stop display mode indicating that it is off. It is configured to stop forcibly. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit game is executed during a big hit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the fluctuation of the other special symbol is made different according to the result of the lottery of one special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot (a lottery result that can give the first privilege to the player), the variation of the other special symbol is changed to the fact that the lottery result is out of order. When the stoppage is displayed in the display mode shown and the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (a lottery result in which a second privilege different from the first privilege can be given to the player), the fluctuation of the other special symbol is changed. Is stopped until the grant of the second privilege ends (until the small hit game ends), and is restarted after the grant of the second privilege ends. In addition, when the lottery result of one special symbol is out of order, the change of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

  With this configuration, it is possible to change the lottery content (the lottery result, a period until the lottery result is displayed) of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of the one special symbol, A variety of playability can be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can provide a privilege to the player, the control content for the other special symbol variation is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that gives the most advantageous privilege (big hit game) to the player, the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result that gives the privilege. Even if the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of order, it is suppressed that the player is given an excessive privilege, and the lottery result (small hit) in which the privilege given is smaller than the big hit game In the case of, without changing the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed, without changing the lottery result during the small hit game, the fluctuation table It is possible to interrupt only the measurement period.

  Therefore, in a state in which a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1 and special figure 2) are simultaneously changing, by giving the least advantageous privilege to the player, the most advantageous privilege given later is given. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the game is not performed, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is uncomfortable.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the game state, a short-term (0.5 second) variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2), The small hit game is configured to be executed frequently. The condition in which the latent state is set as the gaming state is defined as a case in which the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state in which the probability changing state is set, and the condition in which the latent state is ended is defined as the first special symbol. Is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, and the big hit game is executed. Therefore, the big hit game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small hit game. A second game period is set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be set continuously, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probable change state, the latent state is set from the start of the jackpot fluctuation, and the latent state is set. Is set so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

  Therefore, at the same time when the latent state is set (based on the fact that the latent state is set), the player is notified of the period in which the latent state is set (FIG. 7A ))reference.

  However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can simultaneously change the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol is also changed to the second special symbol in the state where the probable change state is set. Both special symbols may fluctuate.

  In such a case, even if a display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) has been set is displayed at the timing when the latent state is set (see FIG. 7A), the second state that is currently fluctuating is displayed. Until the special symbol stops fluctuating, the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state cannot be executed, and the small hitting game is not executed irrespective of the RUSH state. There was a fear.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for shifting to the latent state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probable change state), the variation state of the second special symbol (whether there is a variation, (The remaining fluctuation period), and based on the result of the determination, the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is made different.

  Specifically, when the condition for shifting to the latent state is satisfied, when it is determined that the state of the second special symbol can be changed, the RUSH state is notified. Make up. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the change of the second special symbol is not started and the small hit game is not executed, even though the RUSH state is notified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the condition for shifting to the latent state is satisfied, a period from when the state of the second special symbol can be changed to when the latent state ends is determined. If the determined period is less than the predetermined period, the RUSH state is not notified. Thus, it is possible to suppress the start of the big hit game without executing the small hit game, despite the fact that the RUSH state has been set.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the probable change state, at the time when the jackpot change starts, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is shifted to the low probability state so as to be in the gaming state. When the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery by setting the latent state, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is not shifted to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. , The probability change state is continued even during the change of the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide different game characteristics depending on the type of the special symbol.

  In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, even when the jackpot is won by lottery of the second special symbol in the probability change state, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is changed to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. May be configured to set the latent state as a gaming state by shifting to, or only when a specific jackpot type is set among a plurality of jackpot types, the The latent state may be set as the gaming state by shifting the high probability state of the symbol to the low probability state.

  Furthermore, the number of jackpots won during the advantageous continuation period is measured, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined number, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is shifted to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. , A latent state may be set as a game state.

  In the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by lottery of the first special symbol in the probable change state, a latent state is set in a period until the jackpot change ends at the time when the jackpot change starts. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the fact that it is predicted that a jackpot will be won in the startup winning process (see FIG. 47), the jackpot change corresponding to the predicted winning information is terminated. It may be configured to set a latent state until a certain period (a plurality of fluctuation periods).

  In the present embodiment, when a variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected in the state where the latent state is set, a constant variation pattern table is always set regardless of the number of times the second special symbol varies during the latent state setting. (See FIG. 19 (b)). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of times the second special symbol changes after the latent state is set reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50). It is also possible to provide a determination means for determining whether or not the determination has been made, and to make the data table for selecting the variation pattern different based on the determination result of the determination means.

  Specifically, when the number of times of the change of the second special symbol has not reached the predetermined number (for example, 50 times), the data table in which the average of the change time is about 2 seconds is referred to, and the change of the second special symbol is changed. When the number of times has reached a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to refer to a data table in which the average of the fluctuation time is about 1 second. Thereby, when the fluctuation pattern in which the long fluctuation time is set as the large fluctuation of the first special symbol is selected, more small hit games can be provided to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the latent state is set during the jackpot change in the probability change state, but in addition to this, the special symbol lottery result is out of a specific or small hit. In such a case, the latent state may be set during the fluctuation display, or during the probable state, the number of times the special symbol lottery result is out of a specific or small hit reaches a predetermined number. In such a case, a latent state may be set.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, when a probability change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set, and a large hit is won in a lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). In addition, the game state during the change of the big hit is set as a latent state, and when the latent state is set, the small hit game is easily executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the above-described first embodiment, the game state is changed during a symbol determination period (a period in which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) in which the result of drawing a special symbol is displayed. It is configured to be. In other words, when a win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the probability change state is set, the start timing of the symbol determination period in which the lottery result is displayed (the first symbol indicating the big hit) At the timing when is stopped and displayed), the latent state is set as the gaming state.

  Further, the second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that a different symbol confirmation period is set based on the result of the special symbol lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the length of the period in which the latent state that is advantageous to the player is set according to the length of the symbol determination period that is set. In addition, as compared with the configuration in which the latent state is set in accordance with the change time of the special symbol (the period in which the special symbol is changed) as in the first embodiment described above, the symbol determination period (special Since the latent state is set corresponding to the period during which the symbol is stopped, the display mode corresponding to the special symbol in the state where the latent state is set can be simplified. The control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

  Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, once the probability change state is set, the probability change state is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won. In the second embodiment, however, the special symbol hit point is set. Even if the winning has not been achieved, the probable change state is terminated when a predetermined end condition (the number of special symbol changes after the probable change state is set reaches the predetermined number of times (50 times)) is satisfied. In that it is configured in With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game for a player who shifts to the latent state during the period in which the probability change state is set.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 88, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of a game when a specific big hit (big hit C) is won by lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in a state where the probability change state is set. . As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a state where the probability change state is set, the jackpot game is started from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation stops (see FIG. 88 (c)). The latent state is set in a period (symbol confirmation period) until it is executed.

  Then, in a state in which the latent state is set, a game for performing a lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed as in the first embodiment. In addition, when the small hit of the special figure 2 is won during the symbol fixing period of the special figure 1, the measurement (subtraction) of the symbol fixing period of the special figure 1 is interrupted while the small hit game is executed. ing. In addition, in the second embodiment, even when a lottery result of a special symbol is out of place or a small hit, a different symbol confirmation period is set according to the lottery result. Thereby, the player desires that a long period be set as the symbol determination period as the lottery result of the special figure 1 (the lottery result that has won the jackpot) corresponding to the period in which the latent state is set, In the state where the latent state is set, it is desired that a short period be set as the symbol determination period in order to execute the lottery of the special figure 2 more.

  In other words, in the second embodiment in which the symbol confirmation period is changed according to the lottery result, a case where a long symbol confirmation period is desired and a case where a short symbol confirmation period is desired according to the game state and the type of the special symbol. Can be provided to the player. Further, in the second embodiment, different symbol determination periods are set for the same variation pattern in which the same variation display can be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the symbol determination period is predicted in advance by the special symbol change display content for the player, and which symbol determination period is set for the current special figure lottery. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the special symbol is actually displayed until the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, because of the above-described configuration, a variation effect (an effect mode executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) performed in response to one variation time (variation pattern) is provided. Since it is configured to set a plurality of types of symbol determination periods, the time required for one special symbol lottery (after the special symbol lottery is performed, the next special symbol lottery can be performed) ) Can be unified even if the time is complicatedly set.

  In the example described with reference to FIG. 88, a state in which the probable change state is set, that is, when the number of remaining working hours is 47, the flow of the game when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won is shown. And the latent state is set from the time when the jackpot fluctuation stops. In addition, when the probability change state ends (when the value of the probability change counter 203aa becomes 0) (for example, the 50th special figure lottery after the probability change state is set), the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won. Is configured such that the latent state is set from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts.

  With this configuration, in the state where the probable change state is set, the advantageous periods of different lengths are set based on the timing of winning the jackpot in Toku-zu. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while desiring to win the jackpot at a timing when a long advantageous period is set, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, a game state set for the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed when the probability change state is set will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the relationship between the contents of the special figure 1 game and the awarded score after the probability change state is set.

  As shown in FIG. 89, in the second embodiment, the game state is variably set based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the state in which the probable change state is set, and the number of lotteries (the number of special figure changes). It is configured to Specifically, in the second embodiment, the probable change state is set so that the number of lotteries of the special symbol (the number of fluctuations) reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times) without winning a jackpot. When the number of lotteries (number of times of change) of the special symbol is won from 1 to 49, a special symbol indicating the jackpot is displayed during the change of the jackpot, and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed. During the confirmation period, a latent state is set. As a result, a latent state game (RUSH game) during the symbol determination period and a jackpot game after the completion of the latent state are given as a bonus to the player.

  Next, when the lottery number (number of times of change) of the special symbol is the 50th big win, the latent state is set during the change of the big hit and during the symbol determination period. As a result, a bonus game (RUSH game) from the jackpot change to the end of the symbol determination period and a jackpot game after the completion of the latent state are given to the player as benefits. That is, in the second embodiment, in the state where the probable change state is set, the condition for shifting to the latent state (the jackpot winning) is satisfied when the specific condition (the specific number of lotteries (the 50th)) is satisfied. In the case where the condition is satisfied, a benefit more advantageous to the player is provided than when the condition for shifting to the latent state is satisfied in a state where the specific condition is not satisfied.

  Then, when the number of lotteries of the special symbol exceeds 50, the predetermined number of changes is reached, and the normal state is set as the gaming state. If the jackpot is won during the normal state, the normal state continues during the change of the special symbol and during the symbol determination period, and the jackpot game is executed.

  On the other hand, when the number of lotteries (number of changes) of the special symbol is out of the range from the first to the 49th after the probable change state is set, the probable change state is maintained during the change of the special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period. Continuing, if it is out of the 50th, since the latent state is set during the change of the special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period, the latent state from the special figure change to the end of the symbol confirmation period A game (RUSH game) can be executed.

  Although the detailed description will be described later, in the second embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, the special symbol fluctuating time and the symbol confirmation period in the probable change state are other than the jackpot. , Small wins), it is configured to make it easier to select a long time, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation time is “60 seconds to 180 seconds” Is selected, and the symbol determination period of “5 seconds to 150 seconds” is selected as the symbol determination period. If the lottery result of the special symbol is other than a jackpot (for example, a loss), the It is configured such that the fluctuation time of “5 seconds to 150 seconds” is selected as the fluctuation time, and the symbol determination period of “0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds” is selected as the symbol determination period.

  With this configuration, the latent state game (RUSH game) according to the result of the special symbol lottery and the number of lotteries is 330 seconds at the maximum (when the big hit is won at the 50th special figure change), the minimum. 5 seconds (when the jackpot is won at the 1st to 49th change of the special figure), and the player can be provided with a certain width. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of predicting how long the current latent state continues.

  Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the special symbol lottery result, when the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of times of change) since the probability change state is set to 50 times, during the change of the special symbol, and Since the latent state is set during the symbol determination period, even if the jackpot is not won during the probability change state, the latent state game (RUSH game) is given to the player. Can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the latent state game (RUSH game) than the configuration of the first embodiment in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is provided only when the jackpot is won. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player cannot experience a latent state game (RUSH game) despite having played the game for a long time and is bored with the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set based on the fact that the jackpot has been won during the probability change state, a longer latent state is set than when the latent state is set without winning the jackpot. It is configured to be easy. Thus, the longer the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed, the easier it is to execute the big hit game after the end of the latent state game (RUSH game). Therefore, it is possible to cause the player in the latent state game (RUSH game) to perform the game while expecting the big hit game to be executed.

  Note that, unlike the above-described configuration of the present embodiment, in a case where the latent state is set without winning the jackpot, a part of the case where the latent state is set based on the winning of the jackpot is equivalent to a part. Alternatively, a special symbol lottery result is set to a fluctuation time or a symbol confirmation period corresponding to a non-big hit (out, small hit) so that a latent state game (RUSH game) of a longer length is executed. Is also good. As a result, it is possible to provide a situation in which it is advantageous for the player not to win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and to provide a surprising game.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when a jackpot is won during the probable change state, a long latent state is easily set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the state is set, a long latent state may be set. In this case, for example, the number of times of probability change (the number of times of lottery of a special symbol in which the probability variation state is set continuously (the number of times of variation)) is 50, and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state, that is, the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/20 , And a long latent state may be set when the result of the special symbol lottery is 50 consecutive misses (about 7%).

  Next, among display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, display contents different from those in the above-described first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, since the latent state is set during the symbol determination period, the special figure 1 for the effect content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set. The display mode of the display area Dm1 or the special figure 2 display area Dm2 is different from that of the first embodiment. FIG. 90A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 90A, in the second embodiment, the latent state is set during the period in which the first special symbol is stopped (fixed display), so the latent state is set. The display of the effect mode (super chance zone display) showing the state in which the change of the second special symbol is executed over the timing, and the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. This is different from the display screen of the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 8A) in that the process is performed during a period in which the second symbol for displaying is stopped (fixed display). The other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 90 (a), the third symbol display mode ("777") for indicating that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) has won the jackpot is stopped and displayed. This indicates that the latent probability state is set based on the fact that a jackpot has been won in the first special symbol during the probability change state. In the example shown in FIG. 90 (a), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 in which the third symbol is displayed in a display mode that can be visually recognized by the player is formed. By grasping the display mode of the third symbol displayed on Dm1 and the effect mode indicating that the latent state displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been set, the flow of the game in the future is understood. A game can be played in a state in which information (information on whether or not a jackpot game is executed after the end of the latent game) is obtained in advance.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the latent state is set based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, a falling lottery (special symbol) is performed when the special symbol is drawn in the latent state. Is performed so that the lottery for shifting the high probability state to the low probability state is not performed. Therefore, by identifying the display state of the third symbol displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, it is possible to know whether or not the current latent state is an advantageous latent state that is advantageous to the player. The game can be performed with peace of mind.

  In the second embodiment, the third symbol is displayed so that the player can easily identify the result of the special symbol drawing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In order to make it difficult for a player to identify, the display area is reduced or the display screen is not provided on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, provided on a light emitting body attached to the game board 13 or on a component other than the third symbol display device 81). (A liquid crystal display device or the like). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know what triggered the latent state to be set, so that the jackpot game is executed after the completion of the latent state game (RUSH game). It is possible to play a game while predicting whether or not, or whether a drop lottery is being executed during a latent state game (RUSH game).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol is changed from when the third symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 until the fixed display period (symbol fixed period) elapses. Although it is configured to stop completely without changing, it is not limited to this as long as it informs the player that the special symbol confirmation display period (symbol confirmation period) is currently in progress. During the fixed display period, the variable display of the third symbol is stopped. However, the display mode (color) of the third symbol may be gradually changed, or the third symbol may be so changed that the player cannot be identified. The design may be configured to swing.

  In addition, a new lottery (variation) of the special symbol is given to the player because the right of the newly executed special symbol lottery has not yet been acquired, whether the present is in the final display period (the symbol final period). ) May be configured to set a display mode for allowing the player to identify whether or not the state is not executed. For example, “fixed display” or “waiting” is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. May be displayed, or the display mode (color, design) of the third symbol may be changed between “fixed display” and “standby”. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress erroneous recognition that a new lottery is not started during the final display period despite the state where the lottery is held.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90 (b), the display contents at the time of entering the latent state game (RUSH game) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when a latent state game (RUSH game) enters. As shown in FIG. 90 (b), in the present embodiment, since the latent state is set during the period when the first special symbol is stopped (fixed display), the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed. The effect of indicating the entry is executed during the period in which the second symbol for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is stopped (fixed display) in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1. This is different from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8B). The other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. It is different in that it is. Other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, the big hit type selection table 202aa is replaced with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab is replaced with the small hit type selection table 202e. Is different from the above-described first embodiment in that a variation pattern selection 2 table 202ac is provided in place of the variation pattern selection table 202f, and a deviation type selection table 202ad is provided.

  The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is different from the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment in that the type of the jackpot type is changed, and various counters (hour saving counter 203f, probability change counter 203aa) set after the end of the jackpot. The difference is that the contents of the fixed time counters 203ad and 203ae) are changed, and that the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each big hit type is changed. Here, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa specifies the same jackpot type as the jackpot type specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) of the first embodiment described above. The values of the time saving counter 203f, the probability change counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are defined for each big hit type.

  Specifically, the jackpot type (jackpot A1 to jackpot A3) in which the same jackpot operation content as the jackpot A in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the above-described first embodiment is executed is selected (the jackpot is won). When the gaming state is the normal state or the latent state, the value of "100" is set to the time-saving counter 203f, and the value of "50" is set in the time-saving state or the probable state. Thus, it is defined that a value of “50” is set in the probability change counter 203aa.

  Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, the jackpot A1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot A2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot A3 is set to "150 seconds". The jackpot A1 is defined in the range of the counter C2 (0 to 99) of “0 to 19”, the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of “20 to 23”, and the jackpot A3 is defined in “24”. That is, in the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (jackpots A1 to A3) is executed in 25% of the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 80% (20 / 25) is the jackpot D, 16% (4/25) is the jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is the jackpot A3.

  That is, in the present embodiment, even if a jackpot in which a jackpot game most advantageous to the player is won is won, a short symbol confirmation period is used as a period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the lottery result to the player. If selected, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed will be short. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention not only to the winning of the big hit but also to the length of the symbol determination period for the special symbol lottery, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Further, in the second embodiment, a configuration in which the symbol determination period is defined in association with the jackpot type is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (jackpot type), The lottery for selecting the symbol confirmation period may be executed independently. In this case, since a plurality of symbol determination periods can be combined with a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide a gaming property that is difficult for a player to predict.

  Next, similarly to the above-described jackpots A1 to A3, jackpots B1 to B3, jackpots C1 to C3, and jackpots D1 to D3 are respectively defined.

  Specifically, the jackpot type (jackpot B1 to jackpot B3) in which the same jackpot operation content as jackpot B in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the above-described first embodiment is executed is selected (the jackpot is won). When the gaming state is the normal state or the latent state, the value of “0” is set to the time-saving counter 203f, and the value of “100” is set in the time-saving state or the probable state. Therefore, it is defined that a value of “0” is set to the probability change counter 203aa.

  Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, the jackpot B1 is set to “5 seconds”, the jackpot B2 is set to “60 seconds”, and the jackpot B3 is set to “150 seconds”. The jackpot B1 is defined in the range of the counter C2 (0 to 99) "25 to 29", the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23", and the jackpot A3 is defined in "24". That is, in A2 of the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (jackpots A1 to A3) is executed at 25% of the jackpot winning in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 80% ( 20/25) is the jackpot D, 16% (4/25) is the jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is the jackpot A3.

  Next, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93 (a), the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) of the above-described first embodiment in each small hit type (small hit type). The difference is that the win A to the small hit C) are further subdivided and defined. Otherwise, it is the same as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B). Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  Specifically, as the small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit A in the above-described first embodiment is executed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 falls within the range of “0 to 9”. The "small hit A1" with the symbol determination time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "10 to 89", and the "small hit A2" with the symbol determination time of "0.5 seconds" is "90 to 93". , A "small hit A3" with a symbol confirmation time of "1.5 seconds" is defined.

  Then, as the small hitting type in which the small hitting operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hitting B of the above-described first embodiment is executed, the value of the small hitting type counter C5 is set in the range of “94 to 95”, and the symbol is determined. "Small hit B1" with a time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "96 to 97", and "Small hit B2" with a symbol determination time of "0.5 seconds" is a value of "98". The "small hit B3" with a fixed time of "1.5 seconds" is defined. Further, as the small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit C in the first embodiment is performed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is set to “99” and the symbol determination time is set to “1. A small hit operation (opening operation) of "5 seconds" is specified.

  Next, the contents of the departure type selection table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. This out-of-class selection table 202ad is used to select the out-of-class type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of range, and a different symbol corresponding to the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. The fixed time is specified.

  In this embodiment, the same counter value (the value of the small hit type counter C5) is used when the special symbol lottery result is a small hit and when the special symbol lottery result is missing because the special symbol lottery result cannot overlap. ) To select the type. Thus, the number of counters included in main controller 110 can be reduced. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and a configuration may be adopted in which different counters are used depending on whether the special symbol lottery result is a small hit or not.

  FIG. 93B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the departure type selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), the symbol type (out-of-range type) whose symbol confirmation time is 0.2 to 1.5 seconds corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. It is defined corresponding to the value of the type counter C5.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to set a lottery result, a small hit, and an out of lottery result as a special symbol lottery result, and it is possible to set a different symbol confirmation time for each lottery result. It is composed. Thereby, even if the lottery results of the special symbols are the same, different symbol determination times can be set.

  Here, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and the latent state is set during the symbol determination period, a longer time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the symbol determination time. Since the period during which the latent state is set can be lengthened, it is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is out of order, the longer the symbol fixed time is selected, the smaller the number of games per unit time (special symbol lottery frequency), which is disadvantageous for the player.

  Furthermore, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) in the case where the latent state is set during the period in which the special symbol indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a big hit is stopped and displayed. During the game (RUSH game) where the lottery is executed, if the lottery result of Toku-zu 2 is a small hit or a miss, a long symbol determination time is selected, and a predetermined latent state is selected. Since the number of special figure 2 lotteries that can be executed during the period (the symbol determination period of the special figure 1) is reduced, it is disadvantageous for the player.

  In this way, the degree of advantage of the set symbol determination period can be varied according to the result of the special symbol lottery, so that a novel playability can be provided to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the period during which the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set by varying the symbol determination period of the special symbol, and the symbol is executed during the latent state. By varying the number of special symbol lotteries, the degree of advantage provided to the player is configured to be different, but other configurations may be used, such as a special symbol lottery Only when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol indicating that the winning has been performed is longer than the predetermined period, a privilege for displaying a preferable image to the player may be provided, or the music played during the jackpot game may be provided. The selection operation may be configured to be executable during the symbol determination period.

  Next, the contents of the time saving / probability change 2 table 202ac2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving / probability change 2 table 202ac2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, the time saving / probability variation 2 table 202ac2 is different from the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 19A) in the variation pattern corresponding to the special figure 1. They differ in that they differ in length. Otherwise, it is the same as the time saving / probability change table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A). Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the latent state is set during the special symbol stop display period (symbol determination period) when a special symbol lottery (lot of special figure 1) is won in a jackpot during the probable change state. With this configuration, the variable display period of the special figure 1 during the probable change state is configured to be shorter than that of the first embodiment.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 95, the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a probable variable counter 203aa is provided instead of the probable variable flag 203g. The difference is that a symbol fixing flag 203ac, a special figure 1 fixing time counter 203ad, and a special figure 2 fixing time counter 203ae are added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  The probability change counter 203aa is a counter for continuing the number of special symbol lotteries executed in the special symbol high-probability state (latent state, probability change state), and is a period during which the special symbol lottery is executed with a high probability. It is for showing.

  The value of the probability change counter 203aa is determined at the timing when the probability change flag 203g is set to ON in the jackpot termination process (see S2312 in FIG. 54) according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 54). 92 is set, and the value is referred to in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) (S451 in FIG. 98), and the jackpot lottery according to the value set in the probability change counter 203aa is performed. This is executed (see S403 and S404 in FIG. 98). It is also referred to when the second special symbol lottery is executed (see S953 in FIG. 102).

  Then, the value is decremented by 1 at the timing when the symbol fixing period of the special symbol (special figure 1, special symbol 2) has passed, and reset to 0 at the timing when the symbol fixing period of the special symbol which has won the jackpot has passed. .

  The special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is a flag for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed. It is during the period (during the symbol confirmation period). This special symbol 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON in the first special symbol fixing period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) (see S2802 in FIG. 100), and the first special symbol change stop process 2 (FIG. 99) Of S257). Then, when it is determined that the symbol confirmation period has elapsed (S853 in FIG. 99: Yes), it is set to off.

  The special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed, and when the flag is turned on, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. It is during the period (during the symbol confirmation period). This special symbol 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is different from the special symbol 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab in that the type of the special symbol to be processed is changed from the first special symbol (special symbol 1) to the second special symbol (special symbol). The only difference is that the method is changed to 2), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ac are counters for measuring the symbol fixed period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2). When the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) 1 is stopped and displayed, a value indicating the current symbol determination period is set in a corresponding counter. Then, in the processing during the fixed time (see S860 in FIG. 101) that is periodically executed, the value of the counter is subtracted, and the values of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ac become 0. In this case, a process of ending the symbol fixing period of the special symbol is executed.

  In the second embodiment, different symbol confirmation periods are set according to the type for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery (see FIGS. 92 and 93). Then, during the symbol determination period, the latent state is set as the gaming state.

  Next, information stored in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96, in the RAM 223 of the second embodiment, in addition to the electrical configuration of the above-described first embodiment, a special figure 1 decision counter 223aa, a special figure 2 decision counter 223ab, and a remaining decision time information storage area 223ac and a decision flag 223ad are added.

  The special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is a counter for measuring a period (symbol confirmation period) in which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the main controller 110 determines a symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Is received, a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 is set.

  The value set in the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa is periodically decremented by various counter update processing 2 (see FIG. 111) executed every millisecond. In the second embodiment, the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the symbol determination period of the special symbol (first special symbol). By managing the value of the one confirmation counter 223aa, it is possible to set remaining period information indicating the remaining period in which the latent state is continuously set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hit of the second special symbol is won during the symbol fixing period of the special figure 1 (during the latent game), the value of the special figure 1 fixing counter 223aa is determined during the small hit game. Is configured to interrupt the process of subtracting. Therefore, since the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 is not subtracted while the small hit game is being executed, the lottery of the second special symbol can be appropriately executed during the symbol determination period.

  Note that, in addition to the configuration of the above-described second embodiment, a process of accumulating a period during which the subtraction process of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa is suspended may be provided. Specifically, there is provided a small hitting game counter that measures a period during which the small hitting game is being executed, and the small hitting game counter is used to continuously set the small hitting game during the latent state. May be calculated, or a suspending counter for measuring a period during which the flag for suspending the subtraction process of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is set to ON is provided. The medium counter may be used to calculate the cumulative period during the small hit game in the latent state that is continuously set.

  As described above, the result of the current latent state game (RUSH game) is notified to the player by calculating the cumulative interruption information in which the period in which the subtraction process of the symbol fixed period of the special figure 1 is interrupted is calculated. Can be. Furthermore, as the detailed game results of the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of balls acquired during the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of wins per small win, and the above-described interrupted cumulative Based on the information, a game result indicating whether there are more benefits acquired than the design value (or more than the past history), and whether the number of acquired balls is larger than the number of winning small hits. It may be configured to notify the player of the game result indicating the game result or the game result indicating whether the interrupted cumulative information is long for the number of winning small hits. Alternatively, the system may be configured to simply notify the cumulative number of acquired balls, the cumulative number of small hits, and the cumulative interruption information.

  The special figure 2 confirmation counter 223ab is a counter for measuring a period (symbol confirmation period) during which the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the main controller 110 sends a symbol confirmation period of the second special symbol (special figure 2). Is received, a value corresponding to the symbol fixing period of the special figure 2 is set. The specific contents are the same as those of the above-described special figure 1 determination counter 223aa except that the measurement target is changed to the design determination period of the special figure 1 and the symbol determination period of the special figure 2 is used. Description is omitted.

  The remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac stores the remaining time (remaining fixed time) of the symbol fixed period at the time when the subtraction process of the symbol fixed period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (temporary stop of the special figure 1). It is a data area for storing the remaining determination time information shown. In the second embodiment, an effect mode at the time of restarting the subtraction process of the symbol determination period is set based on the remaining determination time information stored in the remaining determination time information storage area 223ac. This makes it possible to predict the period until the latent state ends by grasping the effect mode executed when the small hitting game ends and the symbol determination period subtraction process is restarted.

  When it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106) of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4219 in FIG. 106: Yes), the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac is stored. The remaining determination time information (period A to period C) set in the temporary stop related processing 2 to be executed (see S4253 in FIG. 108) is stored (see S4956, S4958, and S4959 in FIG. 108). Then, in the resumption process (see S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108), the reading is performed when setting the effect mode for resuming the subtraction process of the symbol fixed period. It is issued (see S5002 and S5052 in FIG. 109) and is referred to when determining the additional effect type (see S5003 and S5053 in FIG. 109).

  Since the information for indicating the remaining period of the latent state game is notified by the establishment of various notification conditions as described above, the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the latent state game is performed. The information indicating the remaining period that can be executed can be obtained by grasping the effect form of various effects executed during the latent state. Therefore, the effect can be watched by the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the second embodiment, the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the remaining period in which the latent state game can be executed is divided into predetermined ranges, and the remaining period information for indicating the divided range is provided by the player. Is configured to inform the player of the remaining period of the latent state game roughly, and to provide the player with a fun of predicting a specific remaining period. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific remaining period is notified to a player in seconds.

  The fixed flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the special symbol is in the stop display period (symbol fixed period), and is set to ON when the special symbol is in the stop display period (symbol fixed period). You. The in-determination flag 223ad is configured to be turned on regardless of which special symbol of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is in the symbol fixing period. I have.

  The determination flag 223ad is a symbol determination executed when it is determined that the symbol determination related command has been received in the command determination process 2 (see S4152 in FIG. 106) of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4254 in FIG. 106: Yes). It is set to ON in the related processing (see S4255 in FIG. 110) (see S5077 in FIG. 110). Then, when it is determined in the temporary stop related processing 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) that the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received (see S4951 in FIG. 108), the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is changed during the symbol determination period. It is referred to to determine whether or not (see S4953 in FIG. 108). Also, when it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command is received in the restart processing (S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop related processing 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) (S5001: Yes in FIG. 109). This is referred to to determine whether the fluctuating state of the special figure 1 is during the symbol determination period (see S5051 in FIG. 109).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, at the time when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (the time when the small hit game is executed) or at the time when the small hit game ends. It is determined whether the fluctuating state of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is during the fluctuating display period or the symbol fixing period, and based on the result of the determination, the toll figure 1 is temporarily stopped (the fluctuating display period, It is configured to set the processing when the subtraction of the symbol determination period is interrupted) and the effect mode when the special figure 1 is restarted (the subtraction of the variable display period and the symbol determination period is restarted).

  With such a configuration, the processing is appropriately executed at the timing when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is in the fluctuation state at the timing of winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). can do.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the above-described first embodiment in that a special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 32) is used. (See FIG. 97), first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), and first special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 38). First special symbol change stop processing 2 (see FIG. 99) and second special symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (see FIG. 102) instead of the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 40), and second special symbol change stop processing The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see FIG. 103) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45), and the special figure 2 off stop processing 2 (see FIG. 105) is executed instead of the special figure 2 off stop processing (see FIG. 46). The first special Pattern confirmation period setting process (see FIG. 100), with the difference that adding a new second special symbol determined period setting process (see FIG. 104). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, in the content of the control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, a point that is significantly different from the above-described first embodiment will be briefly described. In the first embodiment described above, the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set during the variable display period of one special symbol (special figure 1). More specifically, in a state in which the probable change state is set, a latent state is set during the fluctuation display period of the special symbol that has won the jackpot, and a latent state game (RUSH game) is performed until the fluctuation display period ends. And the big hit game is executed immediately after the variable display period ends. This allows the player to continuously execute two different privilege games (a game in which small hits frequently occur in the latent state and a big hit game), and the player can frequently execute the bonus games in a short period of time. Benefits can be granted.

  Furthermore, since the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed in a state before the jackpot game is executed, the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed with confidence. In other words, even when the game result of the first half is not good, the big hit game in which the bonus given to the player is generally larger than the small hit game is set in the latter half of two consecutive bonus games. Thus, it is possible to enthusiastically obtain a privilege in a game (big hit game) executed in the second half.

  In addition, since the latent state game (RUSH game) is configured to be performed during execution of the jackpot fluctuation, a period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed may be set in advance. it can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed for an unexpectedly long time and a privilege is excessively given to the player.

  In addition, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed varies according to the fluctuation pattern selected when the jackpot is won. In other words, since it is configured to determine whether or not the jackpot game is executed and the length of the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) by one lottery of the special symbol, the latent state game ( The processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced as compared with the case where a process using a dedicated selection table is executed to preset the length of the game period of (RUSH game).

  However, in the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) is determined only by the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol. In order to prepare a plurality of (RUSH games) game periods, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of variation patterns (variation times) in advance, and there is a possibility that a data area for storing the variation patterns may be squeezed.

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the above-described first embodiment, a period in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol confirmation period) is also a period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. It is configured such that the length of the symbol confirmation period is changed according to the symbol type based on the special symbol lottery result.

  With such a configuration, the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) can be set by adding (combining) the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the symbol determination period, so that the latent state A plurality of patterns can be set for a game period of a game (RUSH game) with a small data amount.

  Furthermore, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the latent state game (RUSH game), a different symbol confirmation period is set in accordance with the lottery result, so that the symbol is set. The lottery frequency of the special figure 2 executed during the predetermined latent state game (RUSH game) period (variable display time of the special figure 1) can be varied depending on the symbol determination period.

  That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol in which the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) is set, it is desired that a longer symbol determination period is set, and the latent state game (RUSH game) is set. In the lottery of the second special symbol that is repeatedly executed during the game, it becomes a gaming property that it is desired to set a shorter symbol determination period, and the novelty that a different lottery result depending on the special symbol type to be drawn is desired. Some playability can be provided to the player.

  Further, in the second embodiment, a process for shifting the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low-probability state (subtraction process of the time-saving counter 203f) is executed at the start of the special symbol change, and the special symbol high-probability state is executed. To the low-probability state (subtraction processing of the probability change counter 203aa) is executed at the end of the special symbol determination period, and the special symbol high-probability state is set. When the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number of times (50), the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state, and the special symbol is specially set in the state where the high probability state is set. When the number of times of symbol change (number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times), it is configured such that a high probability state of a normal symbol can be shifted to a low probability state.

  In other words, if the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of lotteries) reaches 50 in a state in which the probable change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set, the change (the 50th fluctuation) ) Is started, the game state shifts to the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), and the timing when the variation (the 50th variation) ends (the symbol confirmation period ends) ), The game state can be shifted to a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol).

  With this configuration, even if the jackpot has not been won, the latent state can be set only for the predetermined specific period (the 50th fluctuation period (including the symbol confirmation period)). , It is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the latent state game (RUSH game).

  First, with reference to FIG. 97, a special symbol variation stop process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the content of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154). The special symbol variation stop process 2 (S154) is different from the special symbol variation process (S154) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S251 and S252 are added. The difference is that the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) is executed instead of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) and the second special symbol variation stop process (S213).

  In the special symbol variation process 2 (S154), if it is determined in the process of S204 that the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203m is 0 (S204: No), the special symbol 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is turned on. It is determined whether the setting has been made (S251). When it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) is executed, and the process proceeds to S209. Details of the first special symbol change stop processing 2 (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to OFF (S251: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, and the process proceeds to S209. Move on to processing.

  If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not 0 (greater than 0) in the processing of S206 described above (S206: No), or if the processing of S208 and S257 is executed, It is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 203n in FIG. 2 is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S209: No), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 symbol determination in-progress flag 203ac is set to ON. (S252).

  In the process of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol determination in-progress flag 203ac is not set to ON (S252; No), that is, by the processes of S209 and S252, the present is the second special symbol (special figure 2). If it is determined that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not to be changed, the second special symbol change start process is executed (S210). The process ends. The details of the second special symbol change start process (S210) are the same as those in the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON (S252: Yes), that is, during the symbol fixing period of the second special symbol (special figure 2). If it is determined that the above is the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263), the process is terminated. Details of the second special symbol change stop processing 2 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the content of the first special symbol big hit determination process 2 (S356). The first special symbol big hit determination process 2 (S356) is different from the first special symbol big hit determination process (S306) in the first embodiment in that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is larger than 0 instead of the process of S402. This is different in that a process (S451) of determining whether or not the process is performed is performed.

  That is, in the first embodiment described above, when the special symbol high probability state is set, the special symbol high probability state is continued until the special symbol jackpot is won. Although the probable change flag 203g for indicating the high probability state is used, in the second embodiment, the special symbol jackpot winning (first termination condition) is set as a condition for terminating the special symbol high probability state. In addition, there is a second ending condition that is satisfied when the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50). Therefore, the probability change counter 203aa is used to measure the number of times the special symbol has changed (the number of lotteries) during the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. The probability change counter 203aa is for measuring the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of lotteries) until the above-described second end condition is satisfied, and updates the value based on the execution of the special symbol lottery. It is configured to be.

  It should be noted that any configuration other than the present embodiment may be any configuration as long as it is possible to determine whether or not the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied. For example, the probability change flag 203g used in the first embodiment and the second variable The probability variation counter 203aa used in the embodiment may be used, or a variation number counter that always measures the variation number (lottery number) of the special symbol regardless of the game state may be provided. The number of times the special symbol changes during the probable change state may be determined based on the number of updates of the change number counter.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the number of times of the change of the special symbol, that is, the number of times the number of times of the change of the first special symbol (the special figure 1) and the number of times of the change of the second special symbol (the special figure 2) are added. The end condition (second end condition) for terminating the probable change state is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the number of times of change (number of lotteries) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is measured. The FIG. 1 change number counter and the special figure 2 change number counter which measures only the change number (lottery number) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are provided. End conditions (end conditions for terminating the probable change state) may be set.

  Further, in the second embodiment, as a termination condition for terminating the special symbol high probability state (for example, the probable change state), in addition to the first termination condition based on the special symbol jackpot winning, the number of times the special symbol is changed Although the second ending condition based on the (number of lotteries) is provided, other ending conditions may be provided. For example, the lottery result of the special symbol may be different from a specific lottery result other than the big hit (for example, a small hit). A third ending condition that is satisfied when the number of times has reached a predetermined number of times may be provided. Further, the third ending condition may be a lottery result of a first special symbol, a lottery result of a second special symbol, May be set for each.

  In addition, a time counter is provided for measuring the time during which the special symbol high-probability state is set. The fourth end condition that is established when the clock counter has counted a predetermined time, and the special symbol high-probability state are set. A fifth ending condition that may be established based on the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed in the state where the lottery is performed and the number of lotteries may be provided.

  In addition, when any of the above-described plurality of termination conditions is satisfied, the timing for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is set to a timing other than the timing used in the second embodiment. For example, for example, immediately before starting the special symbol lottery, immediately after the special symbol lottery is executed, the timing to start the special symbol fluctuation, or a predetermined time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation (for example, 5 seconds), the timing at which the change of the special symbol has stopped, the timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, and the stop display period of the special symbol (symbol confirmation). The transition may be made at any timing of the end timing of the period.

  By providing a plurality of ending conditions for ending the special symbol high-probability state and a timing of ending the special symbol high-probability state when the ending condition is satisfied, a special Since it is difficult to understand how long the high probability state of the symbol continues and at what timing (at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, at the time of the fluctuation stop, at the end of the symbol fixing period), it is nervous to the player. The game can be performed while giving a feeling.

  Other processes of the first special symbol big hit determination process 2 (S356) are the same as those of the first special symbol big hit determination process (S306), and thus detailed description is omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 99, a first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257), which is one of the special symbol variation processes 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change stop processing 2 (S257). The first special symbol change stop process 2 (S257) is a process (S851-S858) executed during the special symbol symbol determination period, in contrast to the first special symbol change stop process (S207) in the first embodiment described above. , S860) is different from that of the first embodiment in that the content of the reset processing for stopping and displaying the first special symbol (special figure 1) that has won the jackpot is different. Other processes are the same as the first special symbol change stop process (S207), and thus detailed description is omitted.

  Here, returning to FIG. 97, the conditions under which the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) is executed will be described. In the first special symbol change stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99), a process of stopping the change of the special symbol, a process of setting a period for stopping and displaying the special symbol (symbol determination period), and a process of determining the set symbol are set. It is configured to execute a process of measuring a period and various execution processes corresponding to a lottery result of a special symbol after a symbol determination period has elapsed.

  Accordingly, in the process of S206 in FIG. 97, that is, in the process of determining whether or not the timing to end the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the timing of stopping the change of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) (The value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is 0) (S206: Yes in FIG. 97), and the processing of S251, that is, the current state of the first special symbol (the special figure 1) When it is determined in the process of determining whether or not the stop display is being performed, the stop display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being performed (the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to ON). (S251 in FIG. 97: Yes).

  Returning to FIG. 99, the description will be continued. In the first special symbol change stop processing 2 (S257), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 in-determination flag 203ab is set to ON (S851). Here, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed and the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257) is performed to stop and display the special figure 1, that is, in the processing of S206 of FIG. When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) is executed by determining that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter is 0, the special figure 1 in-determination flag 203ab is not set to ON. In the processing of S851, it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is not set on (set to off) (S851: No), and the first special symbol fixing period setting processing is executed (S852). ).

  In the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852), a process is executed to set a period (symbol determination period) for stopping and displaying the special symbol. Here, referring to FIG. 100, a first special symbol determination period setting process, which is one of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the second embodiment. (S852) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852). In the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852), a determination time (symbol determination period) is set, and a command to be transmitted to the first symbol display device 37 is set. When the lottery result of 1) is a big hit, a process for shifting the high probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low probability state is executed.

  In the second embodiment, as a condition for shifting a high probability state of a normal symbol to a low probability state (time saving end condition), a case where a special symbol jackpot is won (first time reduction end condition) and a normal symbol In the state where the high-probability state is continuously set, the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) (second time-saving ending condition); If the first time-saving end condition described above is satisfied, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing of starting the symbol fixing period), When the two-hour end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set at the timing when the special symbol change display is started (at the timing when the special symbol lottery is executed). .

  In this manner, a plurality of conditions (time saving termination conditions) that trigger the transition of the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low-probability state are provided, and the timing of transition to the low-probability state is varied according to the established time-saving termination condition. With this configuration, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set at any timing for the player who is playing the game in the game state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set (the time saving state, the probable change state). Since it can be made difficult to predict whether the game state will transition to the game state (normal state, latent state), it is possible to always keep an eye on the game content and provide a game that does not get tired.

  In the second embodiment, the state of the ordinary symbol is shifted with the above-described contents, but other configurations may be used, for example, immediately before starting the special symbol lottery, or the special symbol. Immediately after the lottery is executed, the timing to start the change of the special symbol, the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the change of the special symbol, the timing when the change of the special symbol is stopped, It is configured that the transition is made at any one of a timing when a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the special symbol is stopped and displayed and a timing when the special symbol stop display period (symbol determination period) ends. May be.

  In the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852), first, a value indicating a determination time (symbol determination time) corresponding to a stopped symbol is set in the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad (S2801). In the second embodiment, the fixed time corresponding to each type selected in the various tables used in the special symbol lottery (big hit type selection 2 table 202aa, small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and off type selection table ad). Since the (symbol determination period) is defined, a value indicating a determination time (symbol determination period) corresponding to the type that is stopped and displayed this time is set in the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a jackpot and the jackpot type selected using the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa (see FIG. 92) is the jackpot A3, the determination is made. Since 150 seconds is defined as the time (symbol determination period), a value indicating 150 seconds is set in the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad.

  Next, the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set on (S2802), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set on (S2803). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S2803: Yes), that is, this time, it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol for which the fixed time (symbol fixed time) is set is a big hit. In this case, the value of the time reduction counter 203f is reset in order to shift the high probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low probability state (S2804). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is not set to ON (S2803: No), the process of S2804 is skipped, and the process shifts to S2805. Thereby, only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol can be set at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  It should be noted that, for example, when the special symbol jackpot is won (first time reduction end condition), and when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is continuously set, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (the number of lotteries) becomes a predetermined number (the number of lotteries). (For example, 50 times) (second time-saving end condition) and when the two time-saving end conditions are satisfied based on the same special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the first time-saving end condition is satisfied. Since the process for determining whether or not the second time-saving end condition is satisfied is performed with priority over the process for performing the special time-saving termination condition, the special symbol jackpot is won when the special symbol symbol determination period is set. Even in this case, the process of S2804 is skipped.

  After executing the processing of S2803 or S2804, it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203aa is greater than 0 in the processing of S2805 (S2805). If it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S2805: Yes), a state command indicating a latent state is set (S2806), and the flow shifts to the processing of S2808. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2805 that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is 0 (S2805: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S2807), and the flow shifts to the step S2808. After executing the processing of S2806 or S2807, a special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S2808). Next, the change of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S2809), and the present process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 99, the description will be continued. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S851 that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON (S851: Yes), that is, during the symbol fixing period of the first special symbol (special figure 1). When it is determined that there is, the process of S852 is skipped and the process proceeds to S853. In the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97), it is determined that the special figure 1 in-determination flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes in FIG. 97), and the first special symbol variation stop process 2 ( When S257 in FIG. 99 is executed, it is determined in the process in S851 that the special figure 1 symbol determination in-progress flag 203ab is set to ON.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is 0 (S853). That is, it is determined whether or not the present time is the timing when the symbol determination period of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad is not 0 (1 or more), that is, it is determined that the present is in the symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special figure 1). In this case (S853: No), the processing during the fixed time (S860) is executed, and this processing ends. The process during the fixed time (S860) executes a process of updating the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period, or updates the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period temporarily stopped based on the execution of the small hitting game. For example, processing for resuming the processing is executed, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad is 0 (S853: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the end timing of the determination time (symbol determination period) is reached. Then, the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to off (S854). Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S855). When it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S855: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is decremented by 1 (S856). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is 0 (S855: Yes), the process of S856 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S857. In the process of S857, a state command corresponding to the values of the time-saving counter 203f and the probability change counter 203aa is set (S857).

  In the present embodiment, by executing the process of S856 described above, after the special symbol stop display period has elapsed (after the symbol determination period has elapsed), the process of subtracting the value of the probability change counter 203aa is executed. When the value of the later probability change counter 203aa becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state. As a result, the probable change termination condition (the condition for shifting the special symbol high-probability state to the low-probability state) that is satisfied when the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) is satisfied. In this case, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the elapse of the special symbol stop display period, so the special symbol is displayed during the variable display period of the target special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period. It can be a stochastic state. Therefore, for example, even if the above-mentioned probable change end condition is satisfied by the change (lottery) of the first special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol is displayed during the change display period of the first special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period. Can be executed (lottery) of the second special symbol in a state where is set.

  The content of the state command set in the process of S857 described above will be specifically described. When the value of the time-saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set), the probability change counter is set. When the value of 203aa is larger than 0, a state command indicating that the gaming state is the probable change state is set, and when the value of the probable change counter 203aa is 0, it indicates that the gaming state is the time saving state. A status command is set. When the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set) and the value of the probability change counter 203aa is larger than 0, the gaming state is a latent state. Is set, and when the value of the probability change counter 203aa is 0, a state command indicating that the gaming state is the normal state is set.

  Further, in the process of S857, when the value of the probability change counter 203aa is larger than 0 (is 1 or more), the residual probability change number command is set as the value of the probability change counter 203aa, that is, information indicating the residual probability change number. The status command and the remaining probability change number command set in the process of S857 are output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110. Is done. The voice lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110, and executes a process corresponding to the command received in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106). Thus, the current game situation can be properly determined on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the first time-saving end condition (the condition that is satisfied when a jackpot is won) is satisfied, the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol is changed to the low-probability state at the stop display timing of the special symbol. When the second time reduction end condition (the condition that is satisfied according to the number of times of the special symbol change (number of lotteries)) is satisfied, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is changed to low at the special symbol change start timing. When the state is shifted to the probability state and the probability change end condition (the first probability change end condition that is satisfied when the jackpot is won, the second probability change end condition that is satisfied according to the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of lotteries)) is satisfied Is configured to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state at the end timing of the special symbol stop display period (symbol confirmation period).

  With such a configuration, the period in which the latent state in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player can be set as the gaming state can be made different depending on the time-saving termination condition that is satisfied. In addition, it is possible not only to expect whether or not a special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, but also to expect that the length of a period in which an advantageous gaming state is set becomes longer.

  Next, a special figure 1 determination period end command is set (S858), and the same processing as the processing of S801 to S805 in the first embodiment described above is executed. Next, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h and the probability change counter 203aa are reset (S859), the big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and this processing ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 101, during the fixed time period processing (S257 in FIG. 99) which is one of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. S860) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the processing during the fixed time (S860).

  In the process during the fixed time (S860), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901). The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery and the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed (see S1602 in FIG. 46). Then, during the period in which the small hitting game is being executed, the first special symbol variation stop process 2 is not executed in the process of S201 of the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 97). That is, in the processing of S2901 of the processing during the fixed time (see S860 of FIG. 101), it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON only after the small hitting game is over. This is only when the fluctuation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) is executed.

  Therefore, when it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), a special figure 1 resume command is set (S2902), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. 203v is turned off (S2903), and the flow shifts to S2904. That is, in the processing of S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the small hitting game has been completed, and the small hitting game is executed. Then, in order to restart the symbol fixed period updating process which has been temporarily stopped, the processes of S2902 and S2903 are executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2901: No), the processing of S2902 and S2903 is skipped and S2904 is performed. Move to the processing of.

  In the processing of S2904, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is decremented and updated by 1 (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2905), and this processing ends.

  Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the content of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953). The second special symbol big hit determination process 2 (S953) is different from the second special symbol big hit determination process (S905 in FIG. 40) in the first embodiment in that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is replaced with the value of the S1002. The difference is that a process (S1051) of determining whether the value is greater than 0 is performed. Other processes are the same as those of the second special symbol big hit determination process (S903), and thus detailed description is omitted. Also, the content of the process executed in S1051 is the same as the content executed in S451 of the first special symbol big hit determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98), and thus the detailed process is performed. Description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263), which is one of the special symbol variation processes (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. explain. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change stop processing 2 (S263). The second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) is different from the second special symbol variation stop process (see S213 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1551 to S1563 are added and S1506. The difference is that the processing of S1560 is provided in place of the processing of, and the processing of S1509 and S1510 is deleted. The other processing is the same as the second special symbol change stop processing (S213 in FIG. 45), and thus detailed description is omitted.

  In the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263), the symbol determination period elapses after the variation time of the special symbol elapses, similarly to the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99). This is different from the first embodiment in that the control target is changed from a first special symbol (special figure 1) to a second special symbol (special figure 2). Of the various processes executed in the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263), the various processes of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) are simply controlled. The detailed description of the process that only differs the symbol type will be omitted.

  In the second special symbol change stop processing 2 (S263), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 symbol determination in-progress flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551). When it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551: Yes), the process of S1552 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1553. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1551 that the special figure 2 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to OFF (S1551: No), the second special symbol determination period setting processing (S1552) is executed.

  Here, referring to FIG. 104, the second special symbol which is one of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see S263 in FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. The determination period setting process (S1552) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552). The second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552) is a process in which the symbol type targeted for the process executed in the first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) is the first special symbol. To the second special symbol, the command to be set is the special symbol 2 finalizing command corresponding to the second special symbol, and the symbol type to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the second special symbol. The only difference is that the other processing contents are the same. Therefore, referring to the contents of the above-described first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100), detailed description of this process is omitted.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. After executing the processing of S1551 or S1552, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553), and the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is not 0 (ie, If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S1553: No), the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is updated (S1562), and the display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1563). ), End this processing.

  The processing of S1563 is to update the display of the second special symbol that has been stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays a symbol on the first symbol display device 37 to indicate that the symbol is stopped (including a display blinking at a high speed enough to recognize that the player is lit). Thus, in the process of S1563, an instruction to turn on the second special symbol is output to the first symbol display device 37.

  In the case of using a configuration in which only a special symbol is continuously turned on during the symbol determination period as in the present embodiment, for example, the second special symbol determination period setting process (see S1552 in FIG. 104). In the process of S3009, an instruction to stop and change the second special symbol (stop display) is output, and information indicating a period during which the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol determination period) is also output. During the period, the second special symbol may be set in advance so as to be lit. With this configuration, in the process executed in a short cycle, it is not necessary to execute the process for updating the display content of the first symbol display device 37 each time, so that the processing load of the main control device 110 is reduced. Can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 determination time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553: Yes), the special figure 2 symbol determination in-progress flag 203ac is set to off (S1554). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S1555). If it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to OFF (S1555: No), the probability change counter 203aa is set. It is determined whether or not the value is larger than 0 (S1556).

  When it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S1556: Yes), the value of the probability change counter 203aa is decremented by 1 (S1557), and the process proceeds to the SW valid time counter 223h1558. On the other hand, in the processing of S1555, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S1555: Yes), or when the value of the probability change counter 203aa is determined to be 0 in the processing of S1556. (S1556: No), the process of S1557 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1558.

  In the processing of S1558, a state command corresponding to the values of the time-saving counter 203f and the probability change counter 203aa is set (S1558), and then a special figure 2 finalization period end command is set (S1559). The same processing as S1501 to S1505 is executed. Here, in the processing of S1501, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S1501: No), the special figure 2 departure stop processing 2 (S1561) ), And terminates the present process.

  When the processing of S1505 is completed, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is turned off, the value of the probability change counter 203aa is reset (S1560), and the same processing of S1507 as in the first embodiment described above is executed. Then, the present process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 105, the special figure 2 departure stop processing 2 (S263), which is one of the second special symbol change stop processing 2 (S263) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. S1561) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 departure stop processing 2 (S1561). The special figure 2 departure stop processing 2 (S1561) in the second embodiment is different from the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1508) in that the processing of S1607 to S1610 is not executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment is different from the control process of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment in that the command determination process (see FIG. 59) is replaced with the command determination process 2 (Refer to FIG. 106), in that various counter update processing 2 (refer to FIG. 111) is executed instead of various counter update processing (refer to FIG. 71), and the same processing is executed otherwise. More specifically, the processing executed when various commands output by changing the control content executed by main controller 110 from the first embodiment are received, and various commands added from the second embodiment are added. A process for updating the counter value has been added.

  First, the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4162). The command determination process 2 (S4162) is different from the command determination process in the first embodiment (S4112 in FIG. 60) in that the processes of S4251 to S4255 are added. Other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  When the command determination process 2 (S4162) is executed, first, the same processes of S4201 to S4216 as the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment described above are executed. If it is determined in the processing of S4215 that no hit-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4215: No), it is next determined whether or not a remaining-number-related command has been received (S4251). ).

  Here, as the command relating to the remaining number of times, the remaining short time command indicating the number of remaining times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is continuously set (set by the processing of S603 in FIG. 36). Command), and a remaining probability variable number command (a command set by the processing of S857 in FIG. 99) indicating the remaining number (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. If it is determined that the remaining number related command has been received (S4251: Yes), the remaining number updating process 2 (S4252) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 107, the remaining number update process 2 (S4252), which is one of the command determination processes 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the content of the remaining number update process 2 (S4252). The remaining number update process 2 (S4252) is different from the remaining number update process (S4218) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S4851 to S4852 are added. Specifically, the difference is that a process for transmitting a command for displaying the number of times of remaining probability change to the display control device 114 is added.

  In the remaining number update process 2 (S4252), first, it is determined whether or not a command to reduce the number of remaining hours has been received from the main controller 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the remaining working hours command has been received (S4801: Yes), a display remaining working hours command corresponding to the command is set (S4802). On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining working hours command has not been received (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4851. Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining probability change number command has been received (S4851). If it is determined that the residual probability variable number command has been received (S4851: Yes), a display residual probability variable number command corresponding to the command is set (S4852), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining probability change number command has not been received (S4851: No), the present process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. In the process of S4251, if it is determined that the command related to the remaining number of times has not been received (S4251: No), it is determined whether the command related to the temporary stop has been received (S4219). Here, the temporary stop related command includes a special figure 1 temporary stop command set when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v for temporarily stopping the first special symbol is set to ON (see S1603 in FIG. 46). And a special figure 1 restart command (see S2902 in FIG. 101) set when the temporarily stopped first special symbol is changed or the stopped display is restarted. If it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 108, the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), which is one of the command determination processes 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related processing 2 (S4253). The temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) is different from the temporary stop related process (S4203) in the first embodiment in that a process for calculating the remaining fixed time is added.

  In the temporary stop related processing 2 (S4253), when the change display of the first special symbol or the elapsed time of the stop display is temporarily interrupted (temporarily stopped), the temporarily stopped first special symbol is displayed. A process for executing an effect mode corresponding to the variable display mode or the stop display mode on the third symbol display device 81 is performed. In the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), first, it is determined whether a special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4951). When it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has not been received (S4951: No), the restart processing (S4952) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the restart processing (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4951 that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4951: Yes), that is, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) accompanying the execution of the small hit game, or If it is determined that it is time to temporarily stop the stop display, it is next determined whether the in-determination flag 223ad is set to ON (S4953). Here, when it is determined that the in-determination flag 203ab is set to ON (S4953: Yes), the first special symbol is being stopped and displayed (during the symbol determination period), and thus the set symbol determination time is set. The remaining time of the (symbol confirmation time of the first special symbol) is calculated (S4954), and the flow shifts to the process of S4955.

  In the process of S4954, the value of the special figure 1 decision counter 223aa, that is, the value indicating the remaining time of the symbol decision time of the first special symbol, is read to calculate the remaining time of the set symbol decision time. Next, it is determined whether the remaining time of the symbol determination time calculated in the processing of S4954 is less than 2 seconds (S4955). When it is determined that the remaining time is less than 2 seconds (S4955: Yes), a period A indicating that the remaining determination time is short is set in the remaining determination time information storage area 223ac (S4956), and the process of S4952 is executed. Then, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4955 that the remaining time is not less than 2 seconds (more than 2 seconds) (S4955: No), then the remaining time is more than 2 seconds and less than 60 seconds Is determined (S4957). In the processing of S4957, when it is determined that the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4957: Yes), the remaining remaining time information storage area 223ac indicates that the remaining time is the normal remaining time. The period B shown is set (S4958), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process ends.

  In the process of S4957, when it is determined that the remaining time is not less than 60 seconds (more than 60 seconds) (S4957: No), the remaining determination time information storage area 223ac indicates that the remaining determination time is long. The period C is set (S4959), the processing of S4952 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4953 that the in-determination flag 223ad is set to OFF (S4953: No), that is, if it is determined that the present is during the variable display period of the first special symbol, The processing (see S4903 to S4908) for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed in the temporary stop related processing (see S4220 in FIG. 67) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and the processing in S4952 is performed. Move to. Note that the process for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment, and thus a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a restart process (S4952) which is one of the temporary stop related processes 2 (S4253) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the restart processing (S4952).

  In the second embodiment, the change (lottery) of the second special symbol can be executed not only during the variable display of the first special symbol (during the variable display period) but also during the stop display (during the symbol determination period). Because of the configuration, when the small hitting game is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol, the stop display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (the subtraction of the symbol determination period is temporarily interrupted). It is configured as follows. Further, at the timing when the small hitting game is finished, the stop display of the first special symbol is restarted (the subtraction of the symbol determination period is restarted). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the state of the first special symbol when the variable display or the stop display of the first special symbol is restarted is determined, and the effect mode after the restart is set based on the determination result. It is configured to

  In the restart processing (S4952), first, it is determined whether a special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001). If it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S5001: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether the in-determination flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051). When it is determined that the in-determination flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051: Yes), that is, when the timing of receiving the special figure 1 restart command is during the stop display of the first special symbol, the remaining determination is performed. The remaining effect time information stored in the time information storage area 223ac is read (S5052), and the additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection 2 table 222aa based on the read remaining time information and the additional effect counter 223i ( (S5053), the display additional effect command corresponding to the additional effect type determined in the process of S5053 is set (S5054), and the information set in the remaining determined time information storage area 223ac is cleared (S5055). Then, the in-determination flag 223ad is set to off (S5056), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5051, if it is determined that the in-determination flag 223ad is set to OFF (S5051: No), that is, the timing at which the special figure 1 restart command is received indicates that the first special symbol is being changed and displayed. If there is, the same processing as S5002 to S5005, which is the same as the above described change resumption processing (S4902 in FIG. 68) of the first embodiment, is executed, and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. In the process of S4219, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), it is determined whether a symbol fixing related command has been received (S4254). If it is determined that the symbol determination related command has been received (S4254: Yes), the symbol determination related process (S4255) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol determination related command has not been received (S4254: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4221), and this processing ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 110, a symbol determination related process (S4255) which is one of the command determination processes 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol determination related process (S4255).

  In the symbol determination related process (S4255), first, it is determined whether a special figure 1 determination command has been received from the main control device 110 (S5071). If it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received (S5071: Yes), a display special figure 1 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5072). Next, a value corresponding to the received command is set in the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa (S5073), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5074. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5071 that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S5071: No), the processes of S5072 and S5073 are skipped, and the process shifts to the process of S5074.

  In the process of S5074, it is determined whether a special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074). If it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074: Yes), a display special figure 2 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5075), and the value corresponding to the received command is set to the special figure. 2 is set in the decision counter 223ab (S5076), the decision flag 223ad is set to ON (S5077), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5074 that the special figure 2 confirmation command has not been received (S5074: No), the processes of S5075 and S5076 are skipped, the process of S5077 is executed, and this process ends. I do.

  Next, various counter update processing 2 (S4161) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the various counter updating process 2 (S4161).

  In the various counter updating process 2 (S4161), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is decremented by 1 (S5452). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa is 0 (S5451: No), the process of S5452 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5453. In the process of S5453, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5454), and the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa. Then, the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is read (S5455). Next, the remaining time is calculated by subtracting the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n from the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa read in the processing of S5455 (S5456). Next, the processing of S5407 and S5408 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5453, when it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5453: No), the processing of S5454 to S5456, S5407 is skipped, and the processing of S5408 is executed. Then, the present process ends.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment described above, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to change simultaneously (so-called “figure 2”). , Simultaneous fluctuation type), a lottery game (RUSH game) can be executed by executing the lottery (fluctuation) of the special figure 2 during the period in which the latent state is set as the game state. Was configured.

  Further, as a condition for setting the latent state (a condition under which the RUSH game can be executed), in the state where the probability change state is set, the first probability change end that is established when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special drawing 1 A condition and a second probable change end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of change of the special symbol (number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times) are provided. If the first probable change end condition is satisfied, a jackpot is won. During the period in which the special symbol (special symbol 1) indicating that the game has been stopped is displayed (symbol confirmation period), the latent symbol is in a latent state, and when the second probability change end condition is satisfied, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The period (variable display period) and the symbol determination period are configured to be in a latent state.

  In addition, the length of the symbol confirmation period is configured to be different according to the result of the special symbol lottery, and the symbol confirmation period is set longer when the jackpot is won than when the jackpot is not won. Was configured as follows.

  In addition, in the case where a jackpot has been won in the lottery of one special symbol (special figure 1), an invalid lottery that does not win a jackpot in the lottery of the other symbol (special symbol 2) is executed. And the value related to the condition for changing the game state is not updated by the invalid lottery. Specifically, the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed during the period of winning the big hit in the lottery of the special figure 1 (during the fluctuation display period of the special symbol winning the big hit and during the symbol fixing period). Even if it does, the value of the probability change counter 203aa is configured not to be updated (subtracted).

  In the second embodiment configured as described above, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 in the state where the probability change state is set, the jackpot game for the jackpot winning is executed (variable display). Until the end of the period and the symbol confirmation period), the value of the positive change counter 203aa is not updated (subtracted) even if the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed many times, so that the special figure 2 can be safely used. Can be executed.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the type of the probability change ending condition is increased as compared with the above-described second embodiment, and the period in which the latent state is set is longer than in the above-described second embodiment. are doing. Specifically, the third embodiment is configured such that, when the small win is achieved in the special figure 1 in the state where the probable change state is set, the probable change end condition (third probable change end condition) is satisfied as the probable change end condition. When the probability change end condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted from the probability change state to the latent state when the small hitting game is started.

  Further, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol is set (the value of the probability change counter 203aa) and the period during which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set (the value of the time reduction counter 203f) are made the same (for example, “4”). )), When the probability change state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set, and if the jackpot is not won, the game state is shifted from the probability change state to the normal state. It is composed.

  That is, in the third embodiment, while the probable change state (the special symbol and the normal symbol are both in the high probability state) is set, the small symbol is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the ordinary symbol is changed to the low probability state. By shifting, the period from the start timing of the small hitting game to the setting of the low probability state of the special symbol can be set to the latent state.

  With this configuration, it is possible to vary the period in which the latent state in which the gaming state is advantageous for the player is continuously set according to the timing of winning the small hit in the lottery in Toku-zu. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the special symbol lottery result, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not get tired.

  Further, in the third embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the final change in which the probable change state ends, a change pattern having a long change time is easily selected. As a result, even if the final variation of the probable change state is reached without winning a small hit, a long-time latent state can be set, so that a game that has the player's expectation to the end is performed. Can be made.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 112, a description will be given of the types of benefits granted based on the game contents of the special figure 1 in the probable change state in the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram summarizing the relationship between the game content of the special figure 1 game and the added privilege after the probable change state is set. As shown in FIG. 112, in the present embodiment, the probable change state is set in a predetermined period (four special symbol fluctuations) after the end of the big hit, and the number of fluctuations during the probable change state (after the big hit) The number of special figure changes) and the result of the special figure lottery are different from each other in the contents of the privilege given to the player.

  Specifically, in the first and second variation of the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, if the lottery result (the lottery result of the special figure 1) is a big hit, there are many players. In addition to the jackpot game in which the prize ball can be acquired, the period in which the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is a jackpot (symbol determination period) is a period in which the latent game (RUSH game) can be executed. ) Is set. When the lottery result (lottery result of Toku-zu 1) is a small hit, a small hit game is executed based on the lottery result of Toku-zu 1 as a period in which a latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. Then, a period (symbol confirmation period) until the number of special symbol fluctuations after the big hit reaches four times is defined.

  In other words, when the small hit is won in the first special figure 1 lottery after the end of the big hit, the timing when the small hit game is started (the timing when the first special symbol change is stopped and the small hit game is executed) ), The latent game (RUSH game) is set in a period from the end of the big hit to the end of the fourth special figure change. Therefore, the period in which the latent state (RUSH state) is set is “extremely long” in which the longest period can be set. In addition, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is out of the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (lot of special figure 1) after the probable change state is set, no privilege is given to the player. Is not given.

  In the third special figure 1 change (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, the latent state is set under the same conditions as the first and second times after the probability change state is set. Make up. Here, when the small hit is won, the period until the end of the fourth special figure change is set as the latent state in addition to during the small hit game. The period during which the latent state is set is shorter than when the small hit is won in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (the special figure 1 lottery).

  Further, in the third embodiment, as the number of special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probable change state is set during the probable change state increases, the fluctuation having a longer fluctuation time when a jackpot is won is increased. The pattern is configured to be easily selected. Therefore, the period during which the latent state is set can be easily made longer than when a jackpot is won in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (the special figure 1 lottery) after the above-described probability change state is set. be able to.

  Next, in the fourth special figure change (special figure lottery) after the probability change state is set, that is, in the special figure final change in the probability change state, the special figure change is started regardless of the result of the special figure lottery. The period from to the end (until the symbol determination period has elapsed) is set as the latent state. In the third embodiment, when a big hit is won in the special figure final change in the probable change state (fourth special figure change after the probable change state is set), it is easy to set a long fluctuating time. Therefore, the length of the period during which the latent state is set is “long”.

  If the special figure final change in the probable change state does not win the jackpot, the normal state is set after the elapse of the symbol determination period, and the fifth and subsequent special figure lotteries are executed.

<About the effect display contents in the third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 112, the period during which the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set according to the transition condition (probable change end condition) that is satisfied is different. In the probable change state, a suggestion effect (a bingo game) for indicating to the player the possibility of the latent state being set and the timing at which the latent state is set is executed. Make up.

  The display contents of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, among the elements displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the above-described embodiments, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 113 (a), the display contents of the big hit game end screen (ending screen) in which the probability change state is set will be described. FIG. 113 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen at the end of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 113A, in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the main display area Dm has the same special figure 1 display area Dm1 and special figure 2 display area as those in the above-described second embodiment. Dm2 and a guide display area Dm3 are formed. In addition, a special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4 indicating the number of reserved balls of the special figure 1 and a special figure 2 reserved number display area Dm5 indicating the reserved ball number of the special figure 2 are provided. , Are formed.

  FIG. 113 (a) shows an end screen of the jackpot game executed based on the special figure 1 big hit, and shows that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a big hit in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. In addition, the stop display mode "777" of the third symbol is displayed, and "-" indicating that the special figure 2 change is not executed is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. In addition, in the guidance display area Dm3, a character "left-handed" is displayed to indicate that the big hit game has been performed in a left-handed game.

  In the third embodiment, similarly to the above-described second embodiment, the game content (right-handed or left-handed) displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the big hit game is the same as the game content when the big hit is won. It is configured so that In other words, the state shown in FIG. 113 (a) is a jackpot won during a left-handed game.

  Further, a bingo card 820 used in a probable change state set after the end of the jackpot game is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. Here, the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, during the period in which the probable change state is set, bingo is provided as a suggestion effect for indicating to the player whether the latent state is set or whether the jackpot is won. The game is configured to be executed.

  In this bingo game, a bingo card 820 (see FIG. 113 (a)) in which arbitrary numbers are arranged for nine squares (3 × 3) is displayed on the jackpot end screen (ending screen). The numbers are announced based on the drawing of Toku-zu 1 executed in the state where the probability change state is set, and the player is notified based on the announced numbers and the arrangement of the numbers described on the bingo card 820. An effect indicating a game result (lottery result of Toku-zu 1) is executed.

  Next, the display contents (effect contents) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the bingo game will be described with reference to FIGS. When the bingo game is started (when the change in the special figure 1 in the probable change state is started), the display shown in FIG. 113B is executed. FIG. 113 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents displayed when the special figure 1 change (first time) is executed after the end of the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 113B, when the special figure 1 change (first time) is executed, a display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. . Then, “3” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4, and it is subtracted (updated) from the value (“4”) shown in FIG. Is shown.

  Also, in the lower left area of the main display area Dm, a number “1” is displayed as a bingo game lottery result 821 based on the lottery result of this time (special figure 1 change (first time)), and the lower right area is displayed. , A remaining number display 822 indicating the remaining number of bingo games “last 3” is displayed. Here, for example, an effect example in the case where the special figure 1 change (fourth time) in the probability change state is a big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 114.

  FIG. 114A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the bingo game during the change of the special figure 1 change (the third time) when the special figure 1 change (the fourth time) in the probable change state is a big hit. 114 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time). In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 112, in the final variation of the probable change state (variation of the special figure 1 (fourth time)), the latent state is set at the timing when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. During the latent state, a latent state game (RUSH game) in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed by the right-handed game is executed.

  Therefore, immediately after the final change of the probable change state is executed (after the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 change (third time) has elapsed), the latent accuracy state is set so that the player can immediately perform a right-handed game. The production result (bingo two rows aligned display) to inform that the setting is made is before (during the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time)) the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) where the latent state is set It is configured to be executed. With this configuration, the latent state can be set in a state in which the player sufficiently understands that the latent state is set.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, if a large hit or a small hit has not been won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the final change of the probable change state (in the case of a loss), a short time is set. It is configured so that the effect result (bingo two-row aligned display) for notifying that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time (1 second) is selected and that the latent state is set in the bingo game is not displayed. . Thereby, it is not necessary to actually notify the player that the latent state is set for a short time, and it is possible to execute a failed production of the bingo game. In addition, when a short-time latent state is set, the fact that the player is to perform a right-handed game is not displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, so that it is possible to suppress troublesomeness in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 114 (a), the description will be continued. In FIG. 114 (a), the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the third time) is performed, and the lottery result “1” of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the first time) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the second time) “8” is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm as the past history 823, and “5” is displayed as the current lottery result 821. Then, in the bingo card 820, squares corresponding to “1,” “8,” and “5” displayed in this bingo game are changed to “cross marks”, and two lines of lines are formed and displayed. .

  Further, “double bingo” is displayed as the status display mode 821 indicating the current status, and a comment “super lucky” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In this way, by informing the player that the bingo game was successful during the change before the special figure 1 change (fourth time) that actually wins the jackpot, the player can be directed to the effect. It is possible to provide a period for enjoying a successful satisfaction and to notify in advance that it is necessary to perform a right-handed game from the next fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, as a comment that notifies that a right-handed game is performed from the next fluctuation (a comment that notifies that the right-handed game condition has been satisfied (the condition for setting the latent state has been satisfied)). Although "It's almost a right-handed game" is displayed in the sub display area Ds, a configuration is provided in advance to notify the player of the timing at which the latent state is set, that is, the timing at which the right-handed game is performed. For example, the remaining period until the special figure 1 change (third time) ends (the remaining period obtained by adding the remaining change display period of the special figure 1 change (third time) and the symbol confirmation period) is calculated. A calculation means may be provided, and information (information for indicating the remaining change period of the special figure 1 change (third time)) based on the calculation result of the calculation means may be notified to the player.

  In the third embodiment, when a ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 (when the starting condition shown in FIG. 2 is satisfied) in a state in which the probable change state is set as the game state, It is configured such that a fluctuation pattern of a short fluctuation time (0.5 second to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result. Accordingly, if a right-handed game is performed in the state where the probability change state is set and the fluctuation (lottery) of the special drawing 2 is executed, the period during which the latent probability state can be set is set to the probability change state. This is extremely shorter than the case where the left-handed game is performed in the state and the variation (lottery) is executed in the special figure 2, so that the right-handed game in the probable change state can be regarded as a disadvantageous game disadvantageous to the player. . Therefore, in the probable change state in which “left-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress an intentional play of an irregular game different from the display content.

  Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a ball is thrown into the second entrance 640 in a state in which the probable change state is set as the game state (when the starting condition shown in FIG. 2 is satisfied) ) Is configured so that a fluctuation pattern of a short fluctuation time (0.5 to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result. The time may be configured to be a fluctuation time extremely longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (for example, 120 seconds).

  With this configuration, for example, when a right-handed game is performed in a state in which the probable change state is set ignoring the progress of the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, since the special figure 2 fluctuation for a long time (for example, 120 seconds) is executed, even if the latent state is set thereafter, for example, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the fourth time) which has won the jackpot Even if the display is started), since the special figure 2 change is being executed, a latent state game (a game in which the special figure 2 change is executed with the latent state set) is newly added. It can be difficult to execute.

  In the present embodiment, the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set based on the fluctuation period of the special symbol (special figure 1) and the symbol determination period. Is set (the start of the change of the special figure 2), the longer the period from the end of the change of the special figure 2 being executed to the end, the longer the period (the latent State game period) will be shortened. In addition, in order to reliably prevent the execution of the special figure 2 change in the state in which the probable change state is set, when a sufficient time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the latent state is set, When the right-handed game is started from the same, the latent state game period is similarly shortened. Therefore, in order to grasp the timing of executing the right-handed game, the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the player is performed. The display content on the screen can be watched.

  Then, when the right-handed game is performed during the latent state and the special figure 2 change is executed, the effect display in the RUSH game (the latent state game) shown in FIG. 114 (b) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed on the display screen. FIG. 114 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the fourth special figure change is the big hit after the end of the big hit (after setting the probable change state). In the present embodiment, as in the above-described second embodiment, when the latent state is set, a latent state game (RUSH game) in which the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed by a right-handed game is performed. That is, during the latent state, the right-handed game becomes an advantageous game, and the left-handed game becomes a disadvantageous game.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 114 (b), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the guide display area Dm3 is “right-handed”, and the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is a special figure 1 change (4). In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, a display mode indicating that the change of the special figure 2 is being executed is displayed. "0" indicating that there is no reserved number in Tokuju 1 is displayed, and "0" indicating that there is no reserved number in Tokuju 2 is displayed in the reserved figure number reserved area Dm5 of Toku 2.

  During the period in which the RUSH game is being executed, the character 811 imitating a rabbit runs from left to right while opening the treasure chest 812 found on the way (the same effect as in the first embodiment). Is displayed in the main display area Dm, and in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "RUSH in progress" indicating that the game is in the latent state game (RUSH game) are displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily inform the player that the current state is a latent state game (RUSH game).

  In FIG. 113 to FIG. 114 described above, as the probable change end condition for terminating the probable change state, the second probable change end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times of the change of the special symbol is satisfied, that is, the final change (4 An example of the display screen in the case where the latent state is set by the (second variation of the special figure) has been described. In the third embodiment, a first condition for terminating a probable change state (transition from a probable state to a latent state) (a condition for transitioning a high probability state of a normal symbol to a low probability state) is the first condition. Probable change end condition (probable change end condition that is established based on the jackpot winning), second probable change end condition (probable change end condition that is established based on the number of times the special symbol is changed), and third probable change end condition (based on the jackpot win) The game state is shifted from the certainty change state to the latent state when any one of the end conditions is satisfied.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (a), a display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the first probable change end condition is satisfied before the above-described second probable change end condition is satisfied. The contents are explained. FIG. 115A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of display contents executed during the third special figure change when the third special figure change is a large hit after the big hit (after setting the probability change state). FIG.

  In the third embodiment, when the first probable change end condition (winning of the special symbol jackpot) is satisfied, the special symbol for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed. The latent state is set during the period until the stop display ends (symbol confirmation period). Therefore, since the probable change state is set continuously during the variable display period of the special figure 1 (during the change of the special figure), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is specially displayed in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. A display mode indicating that FIG. 1 is performing variable display is displayed, and “left-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, "4" is displayed in the lottery result 821, and the bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode indicating that one line of lines has been established.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, when the above-described first probability change end condition is satisfied and the latent state is set during the symbol determination period of the special symbol, the third embodiment is a target. Different numbers can be displayed as the bingo game lottery result 821 multiple times during the special symbol fluctuation display period, and information for indicating the final result of the current bingo game is notified to the player in stages. It is configured to

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 115 (a), while the special figure 1 is in the variable display, a state is shown in which one line of lines is established. If the period (for example, 300 seconds) is the jackpot type (for example, the jackpot C) to be set, a different number is displayed as the bingo game lottery result 821 during the remaining period until the variable display of the special figure 1 ends. (For example, “5”) is newly displayed, and an effect is finally executed in which the result of the bingo game is “two lines formed”.

  In this way, the result (the number of established lines) of the bingo game is varied a plurality of times during the special symbol change display. This allows the player to know the contents of the privilege (RUSH game, jackpot game) given at the time of the end of the special figure change with the elapse of the special symbol change display period. The effect contents displayed on the display screen of the three symbol display device 81 can be continuously watched.

  In addition, when the type of the jackpot won this time is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) for which a short symbol confirmation period (for example, 5 seconds) is set, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) does not change. A number (for example, “3”) is displayed, and the result of the bingo game may be “one line formed”.

  With this configuration, while the number of the lottery results 821 displayed in the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) is unified, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) and the special symbol Can be associated with the contents (amount of privilege) of the privilege provided after the end of the variable display. Therefore, since the player can watch the content and the result of the bingo game, the effect can be enhanced.

  In the third embodiment, the number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) is unified regardless of the special symbol lottery result, and the bingo game result is obtained. The effect that makes the player throb as to whether the (number of established lines) increases or not is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the contents of the privilege (amount of privilege) given after the end of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and The number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) may be associated with each other. Thereby, it is possible to give a benefit that is more advantageous to the player when a lot of numbers are displayed as the lottery result 821 during the bingo game, and it is possible to enhance a staging effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (b), a description will be given of display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the third probability change ending condition is satisfied. FIG. 115 (b) schematically shows an example of display contents executed during the second special figure change when the second special figure change is a small hit after the big hit (after setting the probable change state). It is a schematic diagram.

  The third embodiment is configured such that the timing at which the latent state is set differs depending on the type of the established probability change end condition. Specifically, when the first probability change end condition is satisfied, a period (from the time when the stop display of the corresponding special symbol is started to the time when the stop display ends (until the big hit game is started)) (the target symbol) Is set as the latent state, and when the second probability change end condition is satisfied, the time from when the corresponding special symbol change display is started to when the stop display of the corresponding special symbol ends. The period (the variable display period of the target symbol and the symbol fixing period) is set as the latent state. That is, the latent state is set within the period of the special symbol 1 change regardless of whether the first probability change end condition or the second probability change end condition is satisfied.

  On the other hand, when the third probability change end condition is satisfied, a small hit is won in any of a plurality of (four) special figure 1 changes that can be executed within the period in which the probability change state is set. The latent state is set in a period from when the special symbol stop display indicating that the lottery result is a small win is started to when the special symbol stop display, which is the final variation of the probable change state, ends. . In other words, if a special figure lottery executed immediately after the probability change state is set (first special figure lottery) wins a small hit, the special symbol indicating the result (small hit) of the first special lottery is stopped. After being displayed, the special symbol lottery period (variable display period and symbol confirmation period) of the second to fourth times is passed, and until the stop display of the special symbol indicating the result of the fourth special figure lottery ends (a plurality of times). The latent state is set.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (b), when the third probability change end condition is satisfied, “ALL” for all numbers is displayed in the lottery result 821, and eight lines (all lines) are satisfied. Is displayed in a display mode indicating. Then, "341" indicating that the small hit has been won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, and "right" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to indicate that the latent state game (RUSH game) has started. ”Is displayed.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the third embodiment, whether or not the first probable change end condition or the second probable change end condition is satisfied is determined by a special figure change (a special figure lottery) in which each probable change end condition is satisfied. ) Is determined (prior determination) before execution is performed, whereas the third probability change ending condition is configured not to perform the preliminary determination.

  With this configuration, the progress of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed over a plurality of changes in the special symbol executed during the period in which the probable change state is set is indicated by the first probable change end. Since it can be set according to whether or not the condition or the second probable change end condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect without a sense of incongruity for the player, and when the third end condition is satisfied. Since the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 115 (b) is executed, an unexpected effect can be provided.

  In the third embodiment, it is configured to determine in advance whether the first probable change end condition and the second probable change end condition are satisfied, and do not preliminarily determine whether the third probable change end condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the preliminary determination is performed only on the second probable change end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times the special symbol has changed.

  In addition, as the above-described preliminary determination, at the end of the jackpot (during the ending period of the jackpot game), a preliminary determination is made for the special figure 1 stored and stored, and the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 stored and stored. It is configured to determine whether or not information corresponding to the lottery result is included, and to change the combination of numbers displayed on the bingo card 820 based on the determination result.

  With this configuration, a suggestion effect (bingo) that does not cause a sense of incongruity with respect to the number of special figure changes executed until the jackpot is won and the amount of privilege given to the player by winning the jackpot. Game). In addition, by having the player grasp the numbers displayed on the bingo card 820, it is possible to provide a pleasure of predicting future game results in advance.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of main controller 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. It is different in that it is. Other points are the same as those of the second embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the first random number table 202a is replaced with the first random number table 202ba, the small random number table 202bb is replaced with the small random number table 202b, and the small random number table 202bb is replaced with the big hit type selection two table 202aa. The big hit type selection 3 table 202bc is replaced with the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is replaced with the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ac. This is different from the second embodiment.

  The first random number 3 table 202ba is different from the first random number table 202a of the second embodiment described above (similar to the first embodiment, see FIG. 15A) in the low probability state of the special symbol. Is different in that the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined as “1” and the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined as the big hit in the special symbol high probability state are changed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 117A, the contents defined in the first random number 3 table 202ba will be described. FIG. 117A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), when the gaming state is the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol, the first special symbol or the first special symbol acquired in the lottery of the second special symbol is obtained. It is determined whether the value of the hit random number counter C1 is any of “0 to 9”, and if it is any of “0 to 9”, it is determined that the hit is a big hit.

  When the special state is a high probability state (probable state, latent state) of the special symbol as a game state, the value of the first random number counter C1 per first acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is determined whether it is within the range of “0 to 99”, and if it is within the range of “0 to 99”, it is determined to be a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, out of the 480 random number counters, in the low probability state of the special symbol, ten values are defined as values to be determined as big hits. The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/48. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1 / 4.8.

  The small hit random number 3 table 202bb is different from the small hit random number table 202b of the second embodiment described above (similar to the first embodiment, see FIG. 15B) in the first special symbol (special figure 1). The difference is that the lottery is changed to win the small hit. Here, with reference to FIG. 117 (b), the contents specified in the small hit random number 3 table 202bb will be described. FIG. 117 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is any one of “10 to 14”, If it is any of "10 to 14", it is determined that it is a small hit.

  In the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), since the same contents as those in the above-described small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) are defined, detailed description thereof will be omitted. That is, the third embodiment is different from the above-described second embodiment in that the third special embodiment is configured to be able to win a small hit in the first special symbol lottery. In the third embodiment, when a probability change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set, and a lottery is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal It is configured to execute a process of shifting the symbol high-probability state to the low-probability state, that is, a process of shifting the game state from the probable state to the latent state.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chance of shifting the gaming state to the latent state during the probable state, so that the player who is executing the game in the probable state is willing to play the game. Can be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the third embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol (1/48 (see FIG. 117 (a))) is higher in the special symbol high probability state. , The probability of winning a small hit of the first special symbol (1/32 (see FIG. 117 (b))) is configured to be higher. As a result, the latent state is set with a higher probability based on the small hit win than in the case where the latent state is set based on the win of the special figure 1 during the probability change state. For a player executing a game in a probable state, both a latent state game (RUSH game) and a jackpot game are executed, but a game aiming at a jackpot winning which is difficult to win, and a latent state Only the game (RUSH game) is executed, and both the game aiming at the small hit winning which is easier to win than the big hit winning can be performed.

  In the third embodiment, the probability of winning in the small hit of the special figure 1 is configured to be higher than the big hit winning probability of the special figure 1 in the high probability state of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Without having to do so, it may be configured to be lower than the jackpot winning probability of the special figure 1 in the high probability state. For example, the probability of winning the small hit of the special figure 1 may be set to a low probability such as 1/480. good. With such a configuration, in a state where the probability change state is set, if a small hit is won before a big hit is won, a latent state game (RUSH game) in which a big hit game is not executed is performed. Since the game can be executed, an unexpected game can be provided to the player.

  The jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is different from the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the above-described second embodiment in that the type of the jackpot type is changed and various counters set after the end of the jackpot (hour reduction counter 203f, probability change counter 203f). 203aa, the contents of the fixed time counters 203ad, 203ae) are changed, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each big hit type is changed. Here, the big hit type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 118 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is the jackpot type of each jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16 (a)) of the first embodiment described above. The jackpot operation contents differing only in the number of rounds to be executed are defined. For each jackpot type, the time saving counter 203f, the probability change counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time The value of the counter 203ae is defined.

  Specifically, the jackpot A whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) has a value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) of “0 to 49”. The jackpot operation content in which the round game for releasing the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is executed for two rounds (2R), and the value of “4” is set in the time-saving counter 203f, It is defined that a value of “4” is set in the probability change counter 203aa and a value indicating “5 seconds” is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

  For the jackpot B whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is defined in the range of “50 to 96”. The big hit operation in which the round game for opening the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of “4” is stored in the time-saving counter 203f, and the value of “4” is stored in the probability variable counter 203aa. The value “4” specifies that a value indicating “100 seconds” is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

  The jackpot C whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is defined such that the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of "96 to 99". The big hit operation in which the round game for opening the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of “4” is stored in the time-saving counter 203f, and the value of “4” is stored in the probability change counter 203aa. The value “4” specifies that a value indicating “300 seconds” is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

  The jackpot D whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is defined such that the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of “0 to 64”. The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of “4” is stored in the time-saving counter 203f, and the probability variable counter 203aa , And a value indicating “0.5 seconds” is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

  The jackpot E whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is defined such that the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of "65 to 99". The big hit operation in which the round game for opening the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of “4” is stored in the time-saving counter 203f, and the value of “4” is stored in the probability change counter 203aa. The value “4” specifies that a value indicating “1 second” is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set higher than in the above-described second embodiment, so that the jackpot is easily won, and the bonus (eg, the bonus given to the player in the jackpot game) Prize balls). With this configuration, the amount of privilege (prize ball) given to the player depends on the result of whether or not the latent state is set and the length of the period in which the latent state is continuously set. ) Can be greatly varied, so that a novel playability can be provided to the player.

  The small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) of the first embodiment described above in the details of the small hit type set when the special figure 1 is won. Is different in that it is added and specified. Here, the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b).

  FIG. 118 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) of the above-described first embodiment in that the symbol type is “special figure 1”. Is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) in that a small hit D is added as a small hit type corresponding to "." 16 (b)). Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  The small hit type selection 3 table 202bd indicates that if a small hit is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1), the first attacker (the first variable prize) regardless of the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. A small hit game in which an opening operation for opening the device 65) for 0.02 seconds is performed once is defined. That is, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 1, the small hit game in which it is difficult for the player to obtain the prize ball in the small hit game is executed.

  That is, in the third embodiment, the small hit winning of the special map 1 is not a purpose of giving a bonus (prize ball) to the player by the small hit game, but an opportunity to set a latent state as a game state. It is an object. Accordingly, when the small hit is won in the special figure 1 in the state where the probability change state is set, the right-handed game is executed immediately after the effect to notify the effect (see FIG. 115 (b)) is executed. Even if you do, the small hit game has already ended (because the time required for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the right area is longer than the small hit game period), so the latent state is smooth smoothly A game (RUSH game) can be executed.

  Further, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the small hit game can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity. In the present embodiment, since the opening time of the first variable winning device 65 for the small hitting game is set to be as short as 0.02 seconds, when the small hitting of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the winning is performed. Even if the game method is changed from the left-handed game to the right-handed game at the point in time (at the time when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed), the ball is changed to the first variable winning device 65 during the small hit game. Since it is difficult to make a prize winning, when the small hit is won in the special figure 1 in the normal state, an effect or guidance that emphasizes that the small hit is won on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is provided. The display area Dm3 is configured so that the display of “right-handed” for guiding the right-handed game is not executed.

  Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from performing a troublesome game operation. It should be noted that a notification means for notifying that the small hit of the special figure 1 has been won in the normal state may be provided, and a right-handed display is also provided when the small figure is being played based on the special figure 1 small hit in the normal state. May be executed.

  The variation pattern selection 3 table 202be is different from the variation pattern selection table 202f of the first embodiment described above in that the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 referred to when the probability variation state is set is replaced with the probability variation 3 table 202be1. Is different from the first embodiment in that a third latent table 203be2 is provided in place of the latent table 202f3 referred to when the latent state is set.

  Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 119A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be. As shown in FIG. 119 (a), in the third embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the same normal table 202f1 as that in the first embodiment is referred to, and the probability change state is changed. When it is set, it is stipulated that the probability changing three table 202be1 is referred to, and when the latent state is set, the latent probability 3 table 202be2 is referred to.

  In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the value of the time-saving counter 203f and the value of the probability change counter 203aa are the same after the end of the big hit, so Since the gaming state in which the value of the counter 203aa becomes 0 and the value of the time reduction counter 203f becomes larger than 0 is not set (that is, the time reduction state), it is referred to when the time reduction state is set. It does not have a fluctuation pattern selection table.

  Next, the contents of the third table for belief change 202be1 will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). FIG. 119 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third table 202be1 for probability change. As described above with reference to FIG. 118 (a), the third embodiment is configured such that the probable change state is always set to four special symbol fluctuations when a jackpot is won. Then, in the state in which the probable change state is set, a change pattern (refer to a different change pattern table) according to the number of special symbol changes (the number of special figure changes) from the end of the big hit and the lottery result of the special symbol. (Variation time) is selected.

  With this configuration, the latent state is set in accordance with the timing (the number of times of the special figure change) at which the condition for setting the latent state as the game state (big hit winning or small hit winning of special figure 1) is satisfied. Can be made different from each other (special figure change time). Therefore, not only the result of the lottery of the special symbol but also the number of times the special figure is changed can be watched by the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Specifically, when the symbol type of the special symbol is special figure 1 and the lottery result is “big hit”, when the number of special figure changes after the end of the big hit is “1-2 times”, , "Probable change A table 202bea (probable change A)", "3 times" refers to "probable change B table 202beb (probable change B)", and "4 times" refers to "probable change C". Table 202bec (probable change C) "is defined to be referred to. When the lottery result is “small hit, miss”, when the number of special figure changes after the end of the big hit is “1 to 3”, the “probable change A table 202bea (probable change A)” is referred to. In the case of “four times”, it is defined that the “probable change C table 202bec (probable change C)” is referred to.

  Furthermore, when the symbol type of the special symbol is special figure 2, "probable variation D table 202bed (probable variation D)" is referred to regardless of the lottery result and the number of special figure changes after the end of the big hit. Stipulated.

  Next, the contents specified in the various probability change tables (the probability change A table 202bea to the probability change D table 202bed) referred to in the probability change 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 (c) to 120. . FIG. 119 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probable variable A table 202bea, and FIG. 120 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the probable variable B table 202beb. FIG. 120 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probable variable C table 202bec, and FIG. 120 (c) is specified in the probable variable D table 202bed. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (c), in the probability variation A table 202bea, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set to “0” as the variation pattern determined when the jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). ~ 100 "is associated with a jackpot variation 1 (1 second)," 100 to 197 "is associated with a jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds), and a value of" 198 "is a jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds). ) Is associated. Also, when a small hit or a loss is won in the lottery of the special figure 1, a small hit variation 1 (1 second) or a missing variation 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Have been.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a), in the probability change B table 202beb, the value of the change type counter CS1 is set to “0” as a change pattern determined when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). A large hit variation 1 (1 second) is associated with a range of “-99”, a large hit variation 2 (2 seconds) is associated with a range of “100-149”, and a large hit variation 3 (2) is associated with a range of “150-198”. (300 seconds).

  As shown in FIG. 120 (b), in the probability change C table 202bec, the value of the change type counter CS1 is set to “0” as a change pattern determined when a jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). "Is associated with a jackpot variation 1 (1 second), a value of" 1 "is associated with a jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds), and a jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds) is in the range of" 2-198 ". Corresponding. Further, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 1, the small hit variation 2 (240 seconds) is associated irrespective of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Deviating fluctuation 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of CS1.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (c), in the probability change D table 202bed, as a change pattern determined when a jackpot has been won by lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. Big hit variation 1 (1 second) is associated, and if a small hit is won, small hit variation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. , Regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation 4 (0.5 seconds).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents defined in the third table for latent image 202be2 will be described. FIG. 121 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the third table for latent image 202be2. As shown in FIG. 121, in the third embodiment, in a state where the latent state is set, a fluctuation pattern in which a long fluctuation time is set when the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed is selected. It is configured so that:

  Here, in the third embodiment, in the state where the probability change state is set, the latent state is set when the small hit is won in the special drawing 1 lottery. In order to select the variation pattern with reference to the third table 202be2, it is necessary to win the small hit by the lottery of the special figure 1 during the probable variation state.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern (fluctuation time) is selected by referring to a different table according to the number of times of the special symbol variation in the state where the probable variation state is set. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to watch both the special symbol lottery result and the special symbol variation count (the variation count after the probable variation state is set) that is the lottery result.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment. FIG. As shown in FIG. 122, the RAM 203 of the third embodiment has a special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba and a special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb added to the RAM 203 of the above-described second embodiment. Are different in that Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is a flag for indicating that a small hit has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and when set to ON, the special figure 1 lottery Indicates that the small hit was won. The special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to be on during a period from the winning of the small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1 to the execution of the small hit game.

  The special figure 1 small hit middle flag 203bb is a flag for indicating that the small hit game is executed based on the small hit winning of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is set to ON. This indicates that the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special map 1 is being executed. In the third embodiment, in a state where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, when the small hitting game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1 is started, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is changed to the low probability state. It is configured to execute processing for shifting to.

  The special figure 1 small hitting flag 203bb is determined when the special figure 1 small hitting flag 203ba is set to ON in the special figure 1 departure stop processing (see S871 in FIG. 128) (S3201 in FIG. 128). : Yes), set to ON (S3207 in FIG. 128), and when it is determined in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) that it is the timing to start the small hit (see S2503 in FIG. 129), refer to (S2551 in FIG. 129).

  Next, in the process of S2551 in FIG. 129, when it is determined that the setting is turned on (S2551 in FIG. 129: Yes), that is, the small hitting game of this time is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 If it is determined that the small hit is executed based on the above, the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to 0. Then, if it is determined in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511 in FIG. 129: Yes), it is set to off.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (a). FIG. 123 (a) shows the audio ramp control device of the third embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM 222 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), the ROM 222 of the third embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the above-described second embodiment (first embodiment) in that, instead of the additional effect selection table 222c, the probability-change effect selection table 222ba. The difference is that the point is provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the probability change effect selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability change effect selection table 222ba. The probability change effect selection table 222ba is a data table for selecting the final mode of the suggestion effect (bingo game) described with reference to FIGS. 113 (b) to 115 (a), and wins a jackpot. The final mode is defined based on the number of changes (the number of changes in the special figure after the end of the jackpot) and the type of jackpot that can be won.

  Specifically, when the number of jackpot winning changes is “2”, that is, when the jackpot is won again with the second special symbol change after the end of the jackpot, the jackpot types to be won are “jackpot A” and “jackpot B”. ", The effect that one line (line) is established by bingo is set, and if" big hit C ", the effect that three lines (line) are established by bingo is set.

  If the number of jackpot winning changes is "3", that is, if a special jackpot is won for the third time after the end of the jackpot, if the jackpot type to be won is "jackpot A" or "jackpot B", In addition, an effect mode in which two lines (lines) are established with bingo is set, and in the case of "big hit C", an effect mode in which three lines (lines) are established with bingo is set.

  Finally, if the number of jackpot winning changes is "4", that is, if the special symbol change is performed for the fourth time after the end of the jackpot (the special figure final change in which the probable change state is set), the jackpot type to be won is Is "big hit A", an effect mode in which two rows (lines) are established by bingo is set, and if "big hit B", an effect mode in which three rows (lines) are established by bingo is set, and "big hit C" is set. If so, it is defined that an effect mode in which all rows (lines) are established in bingo is set.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the third embodiment, when a jackpot is won by the first special symbol change after the jackpot, a display screen at the end of the jackpot (a bingo card is usually used). A special display screen is displayed on the screen where 820 is displayed (see FIG. 113) to guide that the latent state is set after the end of the big hit.

  On this special display screen, an image congratulating the player is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "right-handed" for guiding a right-handed game is displayed in the guide display area Dm3. Thereby, at the end of the jackpot game, a game (right-handed game) suitable for the game state (latency state) after the jackpot game is completed can be performed, so that the period in which the latent hit state is set is made full. The lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed by utilizing.

  In the third embodiment, the display screen at the end of the jackpot is configured to display the special display screen in the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol change after the end of the jackpot, as described above. The timing for displaying the special display screen may be any timing as long as the big hit game is being performed, may be the timing when the big hit game is started, or may be the timing when a predetermined round game in the big hit game is executed. In this case, in the case where the jackpot is won in the normal state, it corresponds to the special symbol change executed next among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b before the round game of the jackpot game is started. Prior determination means for determining in advance whether the winning information (winning information corresponding to the first special symbol change after the end of the jackpot) includes information indicating that the jackpot is won, and the prior determination by the prior determination means is provided. As a result, if information indicating that the jackpot is won is included, "right-handed" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3 and the right-handed game is performed in order to cause the jackpot game to be performed in a right-handed game. An effect mode for causing the game to be executed is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and does not include information indicating that a jackpot is won. In this case, it may be configured to display a "left-handed" in the guidance display area Dm3.

  With such a configuration, when a jackpot is won in a normal state (a game state in which a left-handed game is performed), the jackpot game is displayed by the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 for guiding a game method during the jackpot game. The game content after the end can be predicted. Note that, in the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 similar to that of the first embodiment is used, when the big hit game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is performed, the left-handed game is performed. The configuration is such that the ratio of the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 does not change between the case and the case where the right-handed game is performed. Therefore, even if a configuration in which the gaming method (right-handed or left-handed) during the jackpot game is changed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is used, it is disadvantageous for the player during the jackpot game. It does not provide a simple situation.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the jackpot-related process 3 (see S4552 in FIG. 132) (S4605 in FIG. 132: Yes), the process at the end of the jackpot (see S4651 in FIG. 133) It is determined whether the winning information (winning information in FIG. 1) stored in the winning information storage area 223b includes winning information for winning a jackpot (see S5605 in FIG. 133), and the big hit is played. The newly generated winning information is also determined, and it is configured to be able to determine more winning information. However, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b (the winning information of FIG. 1) is determined. A timing other than the present embodiment may be set as a timing for determining whether or not there is hit information for winning a big hit, for example, The timing at which a winning game is started, the timing at which a specific number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is reached, or the timing at which a specific round game (the first round game) is completed may be used as the timing for executing the determination. good.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). FIG. 123 (b) illustrates the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM 223 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the RAM 223 according to the third embodiment is provided with a remaining probability change count area 223ba, a prefetching flag 223bb, and a remaining change count counter 223bc, with respect to the ROM 222 according to the second embodiment. Are different in that Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The remaining probability change count area 223ba is a storage area for storing a change count in which new winning information can be set as a special symbol change that can be executed during the probability change state. A value obtained by subtracting the number of winning information already stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133) is set in the remaining probability change number area 223ba (S5604 in FIG. 133). . Then, in the winning information related processing (see S4271 in FIG. 131), the set value is referred to (see S5504 in FIG. 131), and when the set value is larger than 0, that is, during the probable change state. When the winning information corresponding to the executable special symbol variation is newly receivable (S5504 in FIG. 131; Yes), the pre-reading process is executed as the special symbol variation executed during the probable variation state (when the winning information is hit). A process of determining whether or not it is included) is performed (S5505 in FIG. 131), and then the set value is subtracted by 1 (S5507 in FIG. 131).

  As described above, the probability change state is set by determining whether or not new winning information can be set as a special symbol change that can be executed during the probability change state using the remaining probability change count area 223ba. It is possible to determine whether or not the winning information newly received in the state corresponds to a special symbol change executed during the probability change state. Therefore, the stochastic effect performed during the probable change state can be set based only on the winning information corresponding to the special symbol change performed during the probable change state, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  The pre-reading hit flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that there is winning information that has been won in the special symbol jackpot, and when set to ON, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b has a jackpot. This means that there is winning information indicating that the winning has been achieved.

  The prefetching hit flag 223bb determines that the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b includes the winning information indicating that the big hit has been won in the big hit end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133). If this is done (S5605 in FIG. 133: Yes), it is set to ON (S5606 in FIG. 133). Also, in the winning information related processing (see S4271 in FIG. 131), it is determined that the winning information received this time corresponds to the special symbol change executed during the probable change state (S5504 in FIG. 131: Yes). When it is determined that the winning information includes the winning information indicating that the jackpot is won (S5505 in FIG. 131: Yes), it is set to ON (see S5506 in FIG. 131).

  It is referred to in the variable display setting process for probable change (see S5151 in FIG. 135), and when the pre-reading hit flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702 in FIG. 135: No), and when it is set to ON (S5702 in FIG. 135). The processing is executed so that a different effect mode can be set in S5702 (Yes in FIG. 135).

  The remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special figure until the winning of the big hit, and is stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the big hit end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133). When the winning information includes the winning information for winning the jackpot (S5605 in FIG. 133: Yes), the value corresponding to the number of times of the special symbol change until the special symbol corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot changes. Is set (see S5607 in FIG. 133). Then, when it is determined in the fluctuation display setting process 3 (see S4173 in FIG. 134) that the fluctuation display in the probable change state is to be set (see S5103 in FIG. 134), the fluctuation display setting process for the probabilistic change (S5151 in FIG. 135) (See S5703: Yes in FIG. 135) when it is determined that the special symbol for which the fluctuation display is set this time is the previous fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information that wins the jackpot. ), An effect mode using the probability change effect selection table 222ba is set.

<Control Process of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 according to the above-described second embodiment in that the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) is performed. 1 Special symbol big hit determination process 3 (see S376 in FIG. 125), first special symbol change stop process 3 (see S277 in FIG. 127) instead of first special symbol change stop process 2 (see FIG. 99), small hit control The difference is that a small hit control process 3 (see FIG. 129) is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 55). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. In the above-described second embodiment, the same processing as that of the first embodiment is performed, and thus, the points that are not described in detail will be described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, portions where the same processes as those in the above-described second embodiment are executed are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol big hit determination process 3 (S376). Since the third embodiment is configured to win the small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1, the first special symbol big hit determination process 3 (S376) is the first special symbol big hit determination processing in the second embodiment described above. It differs from the symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) in that the content of the process executed when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is not a jackpot is different. are doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) is executed, the same process as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) is executed. If it is determined that it is not (S406: No), the special figure 1 departure variation processing (S471) is executed, and this processing ends. The special figure 1 departure variation processing (S471) is executed when it is determined that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is other than the big hit, and it is determined whether or not the small hit is won, and the determination is made. The processing corresponding to the result is executed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 126, the special figure 1 departure variation processing (S471), which is one of the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. ) Will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation change processing (S471). The special figure 1 departure variation processing (S471) is for executing processing for displaying a small hit symbol or a deviated symbol on the first symbol display device 37, and targets a second special symbol (special symbol 2). This processing differs from the processing of the special figure 2 departure variation processing (S1011 in FIG. 41) in that the target special symbol is changed from special figure 2 to special figure 1.

  In the special figure 1 departure variation processing (S471), first, it is determined whether or not the execution data acquired from the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a small hit (S3101). When it is determined that the execution data is a small hit (S3101: Yes), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3102), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the small hit (S3103). ). Next, a small hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S3104), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the execution data is not a small hit (is out of place) (S3101: No), the out of place of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. (S3105), this process ends as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127, a description will be given of a first special symbol change stop process 3 (S277) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change stop process 3 (S277). The first special symbol change stop process 3 (S277) is different from the first special symbol change stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) in the above-described second embodiment when the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit. That is, in the processing of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is off (S801: No), the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S871) is executed. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 128, the process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The special figure 1 departure stop processing (S871), which is one of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277), will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S871). In the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S871), when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, a processing for starting a small hitting game is executed.

  In the special figure 1 departure stop processing (see S871 in FIG. 128), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201). If it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation during the fluctuation is forcibly stopped and displayed with the lottery result indicating the deviation. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S3202).

  Then, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating ON of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set (S3203), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is disengaged and stopped and displayed with a symbol (S3204). Next, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S3205), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set off (S3206), and the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is turned on. This is set (S3207), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is not set to ON (that is, the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order) (S3201: No), the process proceeds to S3201. The process ends.

  With such a configuration, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the change of the special figure 2 during the change can be forcibly stopped. During the latent state set at the start timing, it is possible to easily execute a new special figure 2 change. In the third embodiment, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won, the process of forcibly stopping the change of the special figure 2 being executed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order is used. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation is interrupted so that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation does not progress during the period in which the small hit game is being executed. You may.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The small hit control process 3 (S2255) will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit control process 3 (S2255). The small hit control process 3 (S2255) is different from the small hit control process (S2205) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S2551 and S2552 are added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the small hit control process 3 (S2255), when it is determined in the process of S2503 that it is the timing of the start of the small hit (S2503: Yes), the small hit scenario updated by the process of S2502 starts the small hit. If the content indicates the opening command, an opening command is set (S2504), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit middle flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551). If it is determined that the special figure 1 small hitting flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551: Yes), the time reduction counter 203f is set to 0 (S2552), and this processing ends.

  The third embodiment is configured to be able to win a small hit in both the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2). The value of the time-saving counter 203f is set (cleared) to 0 only when the player wins.

  That is, as a condition for terminating the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (the state in which the value of the time reduction counter 203f is larger than 0), the small hit winning of the special figure 1 (the start of the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1) Is set. With this configuration, it is possible to end the high probability state of the ordinary symbol by a predetermined number of times under conditions other than the case where the special symbol is changed. Therefore, in the state in which the probable change state (special symbol high probability state, ordinary symbol high probability state) is set, at any timing (any special symbol lottery), the latent probability state (game state advantageous to the player) (A high probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol), so that the player can always be motivated to play the game.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is configured so that the lottery (change) of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (four times). Therefore, the shorter the period from the setting of the probability change state to the winning of the small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1 is, the more the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the latent state can be increased. Therefore, the player can be more ambitious to play the game.

  In addition, in the third embodiment, when a lottery is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is not ended. Thus, even if the probability of winning a small hit in the drawing of Toku-zu 2 is set to be higher than the probability of winning a small hit in the drawing of Toku-zu 1, in the state where the probable change state is set, A situation in which a right-handed game is performed in order to execute the lottery can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2551, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hitting flag 203bb is not set to ON (S2551: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a lottery of a special symbol, a probability change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is required after the end of the jackpot game. Are set for a predetermined period (for four special symbol changes), and various transition conditions (transition state of latent state transition) for transitioning the high-probability latent state of the ordinary symbol to the low-probability state during the probable state. Is established, a latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set.

  In the third embodiment, as the latent state transition condition, a first latent transition condition that is satisfied when a jackpot is won during the probability change state, and a predetermined period during which the probability change state is set (special symbol variation 4). 2) when the final change of the second change is executed, and when a small hit is won in the lottery of a specific special symbol (first special symbol (special symbol 1)) in the probability change state. And the third latent transition condition that is satisfied. In this way, by configuring so that the latent state is set under various conditions, it is possible to provide the player with a playability that does not get tired.

  Further, the above-mentioned plurality of latent transition conditions are configured such that the period during which the latent state is set after the establishment is different, and when the first latent transition condition is established, a large hit is indicated. The latent state is set during the symbol confirmation period in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the second latent transition condition is satisfied, the latent symbol is hidden during the fluctuation period of the target special symbol change and during the symbol confirmation period. When the certain state is set and the third latent transition condition is satisfied, the certain state is changed from the timing at which the target small hit game is executed (the timing at which the first variable winning device 65 is opened as the small hit game). Is configured to be set until the timing when the symbol fixing period of the special symbol corresponding to the final change of the symbol ends.

  With such a configuration, in performing a game for setting the latent state during the probable change state, the game is not merely aimed at the latent state, but also performed when the latent state is set. Since the player can be watched closely, the player can play the game more enthusiastically.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the symbol fixing period of the special symbol is made different according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol. In addition, the variable display period (variation time) for indicating the special symbol lottery result is changed according to the number of times the special symbol has changed since the probability change state was set.

  Specifically, the lottery result of the special symbol that satisfies the first latent transition condition, that is, if the special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, the symbol confirmation period is 5 seconds to 300 seconds depending on the lottery result. It is configured to be set within the range. With this configuration, even if the player determines that the first latent transition condition is satisfied (even if the special symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed), the symbol determination period set thereafter is set. Since it is not possible to easily determine the length of the game, the game can be played while expecting that a long period is set as the period in which the latent state is continuously set.

  In addition, when the above-described second latent transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set based on a lottery result of a special symbol variation (final variation in the positive variation state) corresponding to the establishment of the second latent transition condition. The length of the period set as the latent state is configured such that, for example, in the final fluctuation in the probable state, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, It is configured so as to be equal to or less than the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the latent state (including the same). With this configuration, when the final fluctuation of the probable change state is out of place, the latent state is temporarily set internally, but during the probable state, the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed, It is possible to set a disadvantageous latent probability state disadvantageous to a player who makes it impossible (difficult) to obtain a winning game.

  In the case where the above-mentioned disadvantageous latent state is set, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 does not execute the effect mode for notifying that the latent state game (RUSH game) is to be executed. It is preferable not to notify the player that the latent state is set.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the final change of the probable change state, the disadvantageous latent probability state is configured to be set. For example, the lottery result of the special symbol If a long symbol confirmation period (for example, 100 seconds that can be set when the lottery result is a big hit) is set, or if the special symbol lottery result is missing, May be set to 300 seconds, which can be set when the lottery result is a big hit, as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected in (1).

  By configuring in this way, even if a big hit or a small hit is not won during the probability change state, a latent state that is advantageous to the player can be set, so that expectation is maintained until the end of the probability change state. While playing the game can be performed. Also, by setting the set symbol confirmation period and the fluctuation pattern to be the same as the period (time) that can be set when the big hit is won, it is expected that the big hit game will be executed after the completion of the latent state. be able to.

  In the above-described example, when a latent state game (RUSH game) is performed by setting the length of the symbol determination period to the same length as when the big hit is won, the special symbol lottery result is displayed. The special symbol (third symbol) may be stopped and displayed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the determination of the result of the lottery of the current special symbol being determined at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and a decrease in the willingness to play a game in the latent state game.

  Furthermore, the third embodiment is configured such that the length of the period during which the latent state is set varies according to the timing at which the first latent transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is configured such that the more likely the special symbol change number in the probable change state is, the longer the latent probabilities are likely to be set. Thereby, as the number of special symbol changes in the probable change state increases, that is, as the number of special symbol fluctuations that can be executed during the probable change state decreases, the latent probability state that is advantageous to the player is more likely to be set. You can want to win the jackpot as soon as possible (establish the first latent transition condition) or want to win the jackpot just before the end of the probable change state, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be done. In addition, when the jackpot is won in the final change of the probability change state, that is, when the first latent change condition and the second latent change condition are both satisfied in one special symbol change (lottery). Since the latent state is set from the period when the jackpot fluctuation starts, the latent state can be provided for a longer period.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the longer the establishment of the first latent transition condition is delayed, the more easily the latent state is set for a long period of time. The longest potential state period may be set when the number of fluctuations is an even number or when the jackpot is won in the third time), or the first potential transition condition is established as soon as possible. The configuration may be such that the latent state is more easily set for a longer period of time.

<Regarding the control processing of the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is different from the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 105). The difference is that instead of the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 105) and the variable display setting process (see FIG. 68), the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 134) is executed, and the other processes are the same. You. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the command determination process 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S4172). The command determination process 3 (S4172) is different from the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the above-described second embodiment in that the process of S4271 is executed instead of the process of S4214. Other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4162) in the second embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a prize information related process (S4271) which is one of the command determination processes 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning information-related processing (S4271).

  In the winning information-related processing (S4271), first, information indicating a gaming state stored in the state setting area 223j is read (S5501). Next, in the processing of S5501, it is determined whether or not the read gaming state (that is, the current gaming state) is undergoing a probable change (S5502). If it is determined that the read game state is in the changing state (S5502: Yes), the reading of the value of the remaining certainty change count area 223ba is executed (S5503). Next, in the process of S5503, it is determined whether or not the value of the read remaining probability change count area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504). If it is determined that the value of the remaining probability change number area 223ba is greater than 0 (S5504: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning information received this time has hit information (S5505). If it is determined that the winning information has hit information (S5505: Yes), the prefetching hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5506). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information in the winning information (S5505: No), the process of S5506 is skipped, and the process shifts to S5507.

  Next, the value of the remaining probability change count area 223ba is decremented by 1 (S5507), and the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S5508), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5502 that the read gaming state is not being changed (S5502: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S5504 that the value of the remaining probability change count area 223ba is 0, (S5504: No), the display winning command corresponding to the received winning information is set (S5509), the process of S5508 described above is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, a jackpot-related process 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related process 3 (S4552). The jackpot-related process 3 (S4552) is different from the jackpot-related process (S4502) in the first embodiment in that a jackpot end process (S4651) is added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the jackpot termination process (S4651), which is one of the jackpot-related processes 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot end processing (S4651).

  In the big hit end processing (S4651), first, all the information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read (S5601). Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information (S5602). If it is determined that there is no winning information (S5602: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is winning information (S5602: Yes), the number of winning information determined in the processing of S5602 is subtracted from the set number of times of probable change (n = 4) (S5603). Next, in the processing of S5603, the subtracted value is set in the residual probability change count area 223ba (S5604).

  Next, it is determined whether the read information has hit information (S5605). If it is determined that the read information has hit information (S5605: Yes), is the winning information corresponding to the next change (that is, the first change executed after the end of the big hit game) included in the winning information? Is determined (S5606). In the process of S5606, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next change includes the hit information (S5606: Yes), the player is notified that the latent state is set immediately after the end of the big hit. (S5607), and terminates the present process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next change does not include the winning information (S5605: No), the prefetch hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5608), and the winning information including the winning information changes. The number of times the special figure is changed is set in the remaining change number counter 223bc (S5609), a display ending command including a bingo game display mode is set (S5611), and the process ends.

  In the process of S5605, if it is determined that there is no information in the read state (S5605: No), the set number of probable changes (n = 4) is set in the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc (S5610), and the above-described S5611 is performed. Is performed, and this process ends.

  Next, a variable display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the content of the variable display setting process 3 (S4173). The variable display setting process 3 (S4173) is different from the variable display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment in that a variable display setting process for positive variation (S5151) is added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the variable display setting process for probable change (S5151), which is one of the variable display setting processes 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. explain. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the content of the variable display setting process for probabilistic change (S5151). In the variation display setting process for probable variation (S5151), when the current game state is the probable variation state, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is displayed based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Is set, and a process of transmitting to the display control device 114 is performed.

  In the variation display setting process for probable variation (S5151), first, it is determined whether or not the current variation is a small hit (S5701). If it is determined that the current fluctuation is a small hit (S5701: Yes), an effect mode such as an all-bingo, that is, an effect mode as shown in FIG. 114 (b) is set (S5709). Move on to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S5701, if it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a small hit (S5701: No), it is determined whether the prefetch hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702). If it is determined that the prefetch hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining fluctuation frequency counter 223bc is 1 (S5703). When it is determined that the value of the remaining change number counter 223bc is 1 (S5703: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the next change is read from the winning information storage area 223b (S5704).

  Next, based on the winning information read in the processing of S5704 and the number of times of change, the effect mode is set from the probable change effect selection table 222ba (S5705). Next, the prefetching hit flag 223bb is set to off (S5706), the remaining probability change count area 223ba and the remaining change count counter 223bc are reset (S5707), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5710. On the other hand, in the process of S5702, when it is determined that the prefetch hit flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No), or in the process of S5703, it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation frequency counter 223bc is not 1 (S5703: No), an effect mode in which bingo cannot be established is set (S5708), the value of the remaining fluctuation frequency counter 223bc is decremented by 1 (S5711), and the flow shifts to the process of S5710.

  Next, the extracted variation pattern command and the variation pattern command for display corresponding to the effect mode set in any of S5705, S5708, and S5709 are set (S5710), and the process ends.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the above-described embodiments, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to change simultaneously (so-called simultaneous change type), and the game state is invisible. A lot of small hit games (RUSH games) are executed by executing the lottery (fluctuating) of the special figure 2 while the state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set. It was configured to be possible.

  The once set latent state is the first latent end condition that is established based on the start of the big hit game, or the number of times the special symbol has changed since the high probability state of the ordinary symbol was set. It is configured to end when any of the second latent end conditions that are established based on the conditions is established.

  In the above-described first to third embodiments configured as described above, for example, when the first latent ending condition is satisfied, as the first advantageous game that is advantageous to the player, the latent gaming state ( RUSH game) is executed until immediately before the jackpot game, which is the second advantageous game, is started, so that the player can continuously execute a plurality of different advantageous games, Was able to give satisfaction.

  However, in each of the above-described embodiments, the probable state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) and the latent probability state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) are set. Although it is configured that a plurality of types of probable change end conditions for shifting to the state can be set, since only the above two types of probable end conditions for terminating the latent state are used, the There has been a problem that a period in which the certain state continues is easily predicted.

  To deal with such a problem, in the fourth embodiment, each time a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is executed, a lottery for shifting (falling) the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state. (Hereinafter, referred to as a drop lottery), and a low probability state of a special symbol is set when this drop lottery is won.

  With this configuration, it is possible to solve the problem that the player can easily predict the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, and this is an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player. The game can be performed while expecting the latent state game (RUSH game) to continue for a long time.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, during the period during which the variable display (special figure variable display) for displaying that one of the special symbols has won the jackpot, the other special symbol is displayed during the special figure variable display period. Even if a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result of the falling lottery is invalidated.

  Thereby, when the first certainty change end condition (the certainty change end condition that is satisfied based on the jackpot winning) is satisfied and the latent state is set, the latent state game (RUSH) executed during the latent state is set. In the game, since the drop lottery can be invalidated, the latent state game (RUSH game) can be made an advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) that can be executed for a long period of time.

  On the other hand, when the second certainty change end condition (the certainty change end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times of the change of the special symbol) is satisfied, and the latent state is set, the drop lottery is executed during the latent state. Therefore, there is a possibility that the latent state may be terminated early based on winning in the drop lottery. Therefore, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed is the above-described advantageous latent probability. A normal latent state game that can be shorter than a state game can be provided.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 136, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the probable change state in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a method of shifting four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the method of shifting the gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 used in the first embodiment described above, the content of the shifting of the gaming state in the case of winning the falling lottery is added. The difference is that the element until the condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied is different from the change in the transfer ratio at the time of winning the jackpot, and the other is the same. Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 136, in the fourth embodiment, a fall lottery for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is configured to be executed. If a win is made, the state shifts to a time saving state, and if a drop lottery is won during the latent state, the state shifts to a normal state.

  With this configuration, in order to set a latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, a probable state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set. In the state, the condition for shifting the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low-probability state (for example, time-saving-digestion) is more than the condition for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state (winning of the drop lottery). It must be established first.

  Therefore, whether or not the latent state is set is determined according to the timing of establishment of the transition condition of each symbol (special symbol, ordinary symbol), so that the player can watch the game content, Can be improved. Further, although details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the game method to be executed is the same (left-handed game) in the probability change state and the time saving state, and the effect content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Are also configured to be similar. Therefore, even if the falling symbol is won before the transition condition of the ordinary symbol (the condition for shifting the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low-probability state) is satisfied, it is difficult for the player to grasp the fact. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, a flow in which a latent state is set in the fourth embodiment and a flow of a game in the latent state will be described. FIG. 137 (a) is a timing chart schematically showing a flow in a case where the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probable change state (when the first probable change end condition is satisfied), and FIG. 137 (b) is a timing chart. 12 is a timing chart schematically showing a flow when the number of time savings becomes 0 during the probable change state (when the second probable change end condition is satisfied).

  As shown in FIG. 137 (a), in the fourth embodiment, when the special symbol high probability state (probable change state or latent state) is set, the special symbol high probability state is set to the low probability state. The lottery (falling lottery) for shifting to is performed every time a special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed, and when a jackpot is won during the probability change state (first probability change end condition) ) Is set as the falling lottery invalid period in which the falling lottery is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the latent state is set based on the second probability change end condition being satisfied, as shown in FIG. 137 (b), the falling lottery is effectively performed during the latent state game (RUSH game). Since the execution is performed, the latent state is shifted to the normal state based on winning in the drop lottery before the end of the special figure 1 change. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first probability change end condition is satisfied, a latent state game (RUSH game) that is more advantageous than when the second probability change end condition is satisfied can be executed.

<About the effect display contents in the fourth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the effect contents executed in the above-described first embodiment, the effect contents set during the probable change state are suggested (notified) to the player as to when the latent state is set. And an effect for indicating (notifying) that the player has won the falling lottery during the latent state game (RUSH game).

  Here, the effect contents added by the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 138 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an effect content for suggesting that a latent state game (RUSH game) is set when the second probability change end condition (reduction of the number of time savings) is satisfied. FIG. 138 (b) schematically shows the production contents for suggesting that the latent state game (RUSH game) is set when the first probability change end condition (big hit win) is satisfied. It is a schematic diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (a) and FIG. 138 (b), in the present embodiment, the trigger for setting the latent state according to the display mode of the effect symbol 813 displayed when the treasure chest 812 is opened. When the display mode of "444" is displayed as the effect symbol 813, it is notified that the second probable change end condition (reduction of the number of hours saved) has been satisfied, and " When the display mode of "Super RUSH" is displayed, it is configured to notify that the first probable change end condition (big hit win) has been satisfied.

  In the fourth embodiment, the display mode of the effect symbol 813 displayed as a result of the effect in the probable change state is configured to notify the player of an opportunity to set the latent state. A configuration other than the above may be used. For example, a plurality of display modes with different selection ratios according to the type of the probable change end condition that is established as the display mode of the effect symbol 813 to be displayed may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of predicting which probable change end condition has been satisfied.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 139 (a), a description will be given of a display content when a drop lottery is won during a latent state game (RUSH game). FIG. 139 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents when a falling lottery is won during a latent state game (RUSH game). In the fourth embodiment, each time a special figure lottery start condition for executing a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is established, a falling lottery is executed, and the special figure lottery start condition is satisfied. After that, during the period until the jackpot lottery is executed, that is, before the jackpot lottery is performed, the fall lottery is executed.

  Therefore, in the case of winning the falling lottery, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), while the special symbol (special figure 1) corresponding to the winning of the falling lottery is variably displayed, a latent state game (RUSH game) Is performed, and a new special figure 2 change is prevented from being executed after the falling lottery winning (after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state). In addition, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 is variably displayed from “right-handed” to “left-handed” while the special symbol (special figure 1) corresponding to the winning of the falling lottery is variably displayed. After the falling lottery winning (after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state), it is suppressed that a new special figure 2 change is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139 (b), a description will be given of the effect content executed when a jackpot is won during a latent state game (RUSH game). FIG. 139 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents executed when a jackpot is won during the latent state game (RUSH game).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 140, description will be given of the contents of an effect during an advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) that is advantageous to the player among the latent state games (RUSH game). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the latent state is set based on the first probability change end condition being satisfied, the falling lottery is invalidated during the setting period of the latent state. The lottery ineffective period is set, and the fact that the game is in the advantageous latent probability state game (super RUSH game) is displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The number of displays is increased, and a comment “during super RUSH” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, indicating that the game is being played in the advantageous latent probability state.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 146. First, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83. This embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that a fall lottery counter C6 used to determine the lottery result of the fall lottery is added.

  The falling lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in a range of “0 to 239”, and is updated at, for example, a 2-millisecond interval which is an execution interval of a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). Some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 52), and the updated values are stored in a counter buffer (falling lottery buffer) set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

  The value of the falling lottery counter C6 is referred to in the falling lottery executed when the special symbol high-probability state is set (when the probability change flag 203g is set to ON), and is acquired. When it is determined that the value of the falling lottery counter C6 is the determination value prescribed in the falling lottery table 202ca, the special symbol high-probability state shifts to the low-probability state (falls).

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 142, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment differs from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment in that a jackpot type selection table 202ca is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202d. The difference is that a table 202ca is provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the big hit type selection 4 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the big hit type selection 4 table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 143, in the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot is won and a jackpot game is executed, an operation content (operation scenario) for always releasing the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is included. It differs from the first embodiment described above in that it is set. In addition, the first embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the operation content (operation scenario) is set so that at least five or more rounds of the jackpot game are executed when the jackpot is won. Is different.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first embodiment, in order to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the special symbol has been won or the small hit, the operation content executed during the small hit game A jackpot game in which the same operation content as the (operation scenario) (a concept including a difference that makes it difficult for the player to determine) is defined, and a latent state, which is a game state in which the player has an advantage, is set. While the timing and the end timing are made difficult to understand, the fourth embodiment allows the player to easily determine whether a big hit or a small hit has been won (the big hit game By making the operation content different from the operation content of the small hitting game, the player can easily determine the operation).

  In this way, by allowing the player to easily determine whether the big hit game has been executed or the small hit game, the number of small hit games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be easily determined. Can be grasped.

  Next, the falling lottery table 202cb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the falling lottery table 202cb. The falling lottery table 202cb is a data table in which the determination value of the above-mentioned falling lottery counter C6 is stored. The value of the fall lottery counter C6 acquired when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (at the time of starting winning) is one of the values specified in the fall lottery table 202cb. Is set so as to shift to the special symbol low-probability state (fall down) when the judgment value matches.

  More specifically, four determination values “43, 107, 195, 222” are defined as the determination values for determining a fall in the special symbol high probability state. Here, the falling lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of “0 to 239”. Of the 240 possible values of the falling lottery counter C6, there are four determination values determined to be falling, and therefore, the probability of falling (transition to the low probability state of the special symbol) in the special symbol change state. Is 1/60 (4/240).

  In the fourth embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 6/480 (see FIG. 15A), and the small jackpot is won in the drawing of the special figure 2. The probability is set to be 221/480 (see FIG. 15B). That is, the probability of winning in the drop lottery is slightly higher than the probability of winning in the jackpot. That is, in the fourth embodiment, in the state in which the latent state is set, it is configured such that it is easy to win in the order of small hit, fall, and big hit.

  Note that the winning rates of the big hit, the small hit, and the fall in the special symbol high probability state are not limited to those shown in the present embodiment, and the easiness of winning may be made different. For example, it is set so that the falling probability (the probability of winning the falling lottery) is lower than the big hitting probability, and in the latent state, the big hitting game and the small hitting game are repeatedly enjoyed until the falling win. The small hit probability and the falling probability are set to be almost the same (for example, the small hitting probability is 1/3, the falling probability is 1/4), and the special symbol lottery is performed during the latent state. Each time the player is played, the player may be made to play the game. In addition, it is also possible to set the falling probability to be high (for example, ２) and to execute the special symbol lottery in the state where the latent state is set only when the falling has not occurred in the first falling lottery. good.

  In the present embodiment, the drop lottery table 202cb defines only a determination value for determining whether or not a special symbol has a high probability of falling, and a determination value for a special symbol in a low probability state is defined. It has not been. This is because it is useless to determine whether or not to shift to the special symbol low-probability state when the special symbol is already in the low-probability state.

  In the fourth embodiment, the falling lottery table 202cb is compared with a periodically updated falling lottery counter C6 to shift from the special symbol high-probability state to the special symbol low-probability state (falling). ) Is determined. That is, the timing of transition from the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) to normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) can be made random. . Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the latent state ends during the latent state game (RUSH game) performed during the period in which the latent state is set.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not to shift (fall) from the special symbol high-probability state to the special symbol low-probability state is determined by lottery (determination). ). For example, whether or not to shift from the high probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low probability state of the ordinary symbol may be determined by a lottery (a special figure lottery) executed every time the special symbol changes. This makes it possible to randomize how long the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol lasts, so that the probable state (the high-probability state of the special symbol, the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol) changes to the latent state (the high-probability state of the special symbol) , The timing of shifting to the normal symbol low probability state) can be made difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, during the period in which the probable change state is set, it is possible to always play a game while expecting the latent state to be set. Further, for example, it may be configured to be able to determine whether or not to shift from the low probability state of the special symbol to the high probability state of the special symbol.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. As shown in FIG. 144, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment in that a state update restriction flag 203ca is provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The state update restriction flag 203ca is a flag for indicating that the update of various parameters corresponding to various conditions for shifting the game state is restricted, and when the state is set to ON, various types are set. This indicates that the update of the parameter is restricted. In the fourth embodiment, when the status update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, the process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f is skipped.

  This state update restriction flag 203ca is used when the first special symbol big hit determination process 4 (see S386 in FIG. 147) determines that the first special symbol (special figure 1) has been won in the lottery (S406 in FIG. 147). : Yes), or when it is determined in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S975 in FIG. 150) that the jackpot has been won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (S1006 in FIG. 150: Yes) ) Is set to ON (S487 in FIG. 147, S1077 in FIG. 150).

  Further, it is referred to in the game state update processing 4 (refer to S388 in FIG. 149) (refer to S651 in FIG. 149), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S651: Yes in FIG. 149), the time saving counter 203f is The process of updating (subtracting) the value, that is, the process of updating the parameter (number of times reduced) corresponding to the condition for shifting the gaming state is skipped. If it is determined in the first special symbol change stop process 4 (see S287 in FIG. 148) that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S801 in FIG. 148: Yes), it is set to OFF. (See S871 in FIG. 148). Similarly, in the second special symbol change stop process 4 (see S293 in FIG. 151), if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S1501: Yes in FIG. 151), the process is also turned OFF. Is set.

  That is, in the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in any of a plurality of special symbols (special figures 1 and 2), the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, and the special symbol that has won the jackpot is set. During the period in which the variable display is executed, the game state is not shifted.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145 (a). FIG. 145 (a) shows the audio ramp control device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM 222 of an MPU 221. As shown in FIG. 145 (a), the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the first embodiment in that a latent mode selection table 222ca and a fall notification selection table 222cb are provided. are doing. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The latent mode selection table 222ca is a data table that is referred to when selecting an effect mode (latent mode) of an effect (latent performance) for notifying the player that the latent state has been set. . In the latent mode selection table 222ca, a plurality of rendering modes (corresponding to a timing of setting a latent status (a timing of winning a jackpot, a timing of reaching a number of time savings (missing a time saving)) and a mode setting rendering counter 223ca to be described later are associated. An effect mode) is defined, and it is possible to suggest to the player an opportunity to set a latent state according to the effect mode of the selected latent effect.

  Next, detailed contents specified in the latent mode selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (b). FIG. 146 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the latent mode selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 146 (b), when the information included in the status command received from the main control device 110 indicates that the current latent state is the jackpot latent state, the acquired value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca is obtained. Is defined as “invincible mode” in the range of “0 to 49”, “normal mode B” is defined in the range of “50 to 89”, and “normal mode A” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”. ing.

  When the information included in the status command received from main controller 110 indicates that the current latency state is the latency reduction latency state, the value of acquired mode setting effect counter 223ca is “0 to 49”. “Normal mode A” is defined in the range, “Normal mode B” is defined in the range of “50 to 89”, and “Normal mode B” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  The fall notification selection table 222cb is a data table for selecting a notification mode for notifying (suggesting) the player that the lottery has been won, and the time reduction state (normal symbol high probability state) continues. The notification mode is selected on the basis of the value of the remaining short-time count area 223k indicating the remaining period set in advance and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf.

  In the fourth embodiment, the game method (left-handed game) and the third symbol display device 81 are executed in a case where the probable change state is set as the game state and a case where the time reduction state is set. And the various display modes are the same. With such a configuration, it is configured such that the player cannot easily determine whether the current state is the probable change state or the time saving state. Further, since the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment performs the falling lottery, the pachinko machine 10 saves time at random timing in the state where the probable change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set. The state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set.

  Then, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol shifts to the low probability state in the state where the probability change state is set, the game state shifts from the probability change state to the latent state, and the latent state advantageous to the player is changed. While the certain state game (RUSH game) is executed, if the high probability state of the ordinary symbol shifts to the low probability state while the time reduction state is set, the game state is changed from the time reduction state to the normal state. Transition to the state.

  Here, the specific contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (c). FIG. 146 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb. As shown in FIG. 146 (c), the fall notification selection table 222cb is associated with the number of remaining short hours (information of the remaining short time area 223k) at the time of the fall winning and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf. Thus, a notification mode is defined.

  More specifically, when the fall is won, the remaining number of times saved is 0 (when the information stored in the remaining number of times saved area 223k indicates 0), that is, the high probability of the ordinary symbol is high. In the case where the lottery is won due to the fluctuation in which the state ends, “confirmed notification” is defined regardless of the value of the obtained fall notification effect counter 223cf. Then, when the timing of the winning of the fall is 1 to 49 in the number of remaining working hours, that is, when the period in which the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol is set has been half or more, the acquired fall reporting effect counter 223cf of the acquired fall "Information notification" is defined in the range of values "0 to 49" or "90 to 99", and "Fixed notification" is defined in the range of "50 to 89". When the number of remaining working hours is 50 to 98, that is, when the period in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set remains more than half, the value of the obtained fall notification effect counter 223cf is “0 to 89”. "Information notification" is defined in the range "", and "Fixed notification" is defined in the range "90-99".

  Here, when the “confirmed notification” is selected as the notification mode, the notification mode is such that the player can easily understand that the player has won the drop lottery, for example, the player has fallen on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Informing mode (for example, display of “sorry”) indicating the fact, or notifying that the player has won the falling lottery by voice or emission color of the decorative member is set.

  In addition, when “suggestion notification” is selected as the notification mode, a notification mode (for example, “pinch” display) for notifying the player that there is a possibility that the falling lottery has been won is set. . Although the detailed description is omitted, the “suggestion notification” is configured to be set when the notification condition is satisfied even when the falling lottery is not won. With this configuration, the “suggestion notification” is executed regardless of whether the player has actually won the falling lottery or has not won the falling lottery.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the mode of the notification (suggestion) production of whether or not the drop lottery has been won is determined by the remaining period (remaining time reduction) in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is continuously set. Period), and the longer the remaining short time period, the more difficult it is to set “confirmation notification”. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player knows that the player has won the falling lottery in a state where the remaining time is short, and the willingness to play during the remaining time is reduced.

  In addition, the setting frequency of the “suggestion notification” set in the case where the falling lottery has not been won may be configured to be variable based on the length of the remaining time short period. It is preferable that the "suggestion notification" is easily set in a state where the lottery has not been won. This makes it possible to vary the possibility of actually winning the falling lottery when the "suggestion notification" is executed based on the length of the remaining short time, so the "suggestion notification" is executed It is possible to make the player play the game during the remaining short time period while letting the player predict whether or not the drop lottery will be won while discriminating the frequency (number of times) and the number of remaining time saving times, thereby improving the interest of the game. it can.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145 (b). FIG. 145 (b) illustrates the audio ramp control device according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM 223 of an MPU 213. As shown in FIG. 145 (b), the RAM 223 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the first embodiment in that the mode setting effect counter 223ca, the latent mode storage area 223cb, and the number of small hits The difference is that a counter 223 cc, a fall flag 223 cd, a time saving notification flag 223 ce, and a fall notification effect counter 223 cf are provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The mode setting effect counter 223ca is a counter used when selecting a latent mode using the latent mode selection table 222ca. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

  The latent mode storage area 223cb is a storage area for storing the currently set latent mode, and stores (sets) the latent mode determined in the latent mode setting process (see S4451 in FIG. 154). (See S5804 in FIG. 154). Then, it is referred to in the special figure 1 change display setting process 4 (see S5171 in FIG. 159) (see S5251 in FIG. 159), and a change pattern command for display is set (see S5252 in FIG. 159). Similarly, it is referred to in the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (see S5175 in FIG. 160) (S5351 in FIG. 160), and a variable pattern command for display is set (S5352 in FIG. 160). The information (latent mode information) stored (set) in the latent mode storage area 223cb is determined when the gaming state has been shifted to the normal state in the state command processing 4 (see S4281 in FIG. 153). (See S4454 in FIG. 153).

  The small hit count counter 223 cc is a counter for measuring the number of small hits that have been won during the latent state. Upon reception, the value is incremented by 1 (see S4752 in FIG. 156). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of small hits won in the latent state (S4753 in FIG. 156). In the present embodiment, the small hit count display 825 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the small hit count counter 223 cc, and the small hit count is set during the period in which the latent state is set. When the number of wins reaches a predetermined number (a multiple of 10), the remaining time of the latent state is displayed.

  The falling flag 223cd is a flag for indicating that the player has won the falling lottery during the probability change state, and is set to ON to indicate that the player has won the falling lottery.

  The time saving notification flag 223ce wins the drop lottery during the probable change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol), and shifts to the time reduction state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol). And a flag for indicating that a fall notification effect (an effect executed when the fixed notification is selected in the fall notification selection table 222cb) for notifying the player of the shift has been executed. When set to ON, a fall notification effect is set.

  The fall notification effect counter 223cf is a counter used when selecting a fall lottery notification mode using the fall notification selection table 222cb. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

<Control Process of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 according to the above-described first embodiment in that the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is replaced by a first process. Special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 147), first special symbol change stop process 4 (see FIG. 148) instead of first special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 38), and game state update process (see FIG. 36) Instead of the game state updating process 4 (see FIG. 149), the second special symbol jackpot determining process 4 (see FIG. 150) instead of the second special symbol jackpot determining process (see FIG. 40), and the second special symbol change stopping process. The difference is that a second special symbol change stop process 4 (see FIG. 151) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the content of the first special symbol big hit determination process 4 (S386). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) is different from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above in that the special symbol is changed from the probable change state to the special symbol low probability state ( The difference is that a process of executing a lottery to determine whether or not to fall is added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), first, data of the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is on (S481). If it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is ON (S481: Yes), the big special jackpot of the second special symbol is being executed, and the process shifts to S412.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is off (S481: No), it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is on, that is, whether the probability change is being performed (S482). If it is determined that the probable change flag 203g is off, that is, it is not during the probable change (S482: No), the process proceeds to S404.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S482, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is ON, that is, when it is determined that the probability change is being performed (S482: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the fall lottery table 202m. (S483). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the falling lottery counter C5 matches any of the determination values (random numbers) specified in the falling lottery table 202m (that is, a value corresponding to the falling) (S484). ), When it is determined that the value is not the value corresponding to the fall (S484: No), the process proceeds to S403.

  On the other hand, in the process of S484, when it is determined that the value of the falling lottery counter C5 matches any of the determination values (random numbers) specified in the falling lottery table 202m (the value corresponds to the falling) ( (S484: Yes), the probable change flag 203g is set to off to shift (fall) from the probable change state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (S485). Then, a fall command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the transition (fall) from the special symbol probable state to the special symbol low probability state is set (S486), and the process proceeds to S404. Transition. Further, in the present embodiment, in the process of S406, when it is determined that the data of the current execution area is a big hit (S406: Yes), the processes of S407 to S411 are executed, and then the state update restriction flag 203ca is set. Is set to ON (S487), and this processing ends.

  By executing the special symbol change start process 4 (S386), a lottery for shifting (falling) to the low probability state of the special symbol and a lottery for determining whether the special symbol is a big hit are easily executed. be able to. In this embodiment, as a processing order in the special symbol probable change state, a lottery (falling lottery) is first performed to determine whether or not to shift to the special symbol low probability state, and then the special symbol big hit is determined. Although it is configured to execute a lottery to determine whether or not the processing will be performed, the processing order is not limited to this. The lottery of the jackpot may be performed first, and then the drop lottery may be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148, a first special symbol variation stop process 4 (S287) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change stop processing 4 (S287). The first special symbol change stop process 4 (S287) is added to the first special symbol change stop process (S207) in the above-described first embodiment (S871) to set the state update restriction flag 203ca to off. The difference is. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, a game state update process 4 (S388) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update processing 4 (S388). The game state update processing 4 (S388) is different from the game state update processing (S308) in the first embodiment in that processing (S651) for determining whether the state update restriction flag 203ca is on is added. Different. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the game state update processing 4 (S388), first, it is determined whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S651). If it is determined that the status update restriction flag 203ca is ON (S651: Yes), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S651 that the state update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S651: No), the process proceeds to step S601.

  Next, a second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the content of the second special symbol big hit determination process 4 (S975). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) is different from the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) in the first embodiment described above in that the special symbol is changed from the probable change state to the special symbol low probability state ( The difference is that a process of executing a lottery to determine whether or not to fall is added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, referring to FIG. 147, in the first special symbol big hit determination process 4 (S386) described above, a process of changing the target of the symbol from the first special symbol to the second special symbol is changed. Since it is only executed, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 151, a description will be given of a second special symbol change stop process 4 (S293) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change stop processing 4 (S293). The second special symbol change stop process 4 (S293) adds a process (S1571) of setting the state update restriction flag 203ca to off to the first special symbol change stop process (S213) in the above-described first embodiment. The difference is. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160. The control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is different from the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment in that the command judgment process (see FIG. 60) is replaced with the command judgment process 4 (Refer to FIG. 152). The difference is that a variable display setting process 4 (refer to FIG. 157) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (refer to FIG. 69), and the other processes are the same. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the command determination process 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (S4182). The command determination process 4 (S4182) is different from the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment in that a status command process 4 (S4281) is executed instead of the status command process (S4204). Other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, a state command process 4 (S4281), which is one of the command determination processes 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the status command processing 4 (S4281). The status command process 4 (S4281) determines whether a latent mode setting process (S4451) is added to the status command process (S4112) in the above-described first embodiment and whether a command related to a fall has been received. The difference is that processing is added. Other processes are the same as the status command process (S4112) in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  In state command processing 4 (S4281), when it is determined that the command received this time is a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4403: Yes), latent mode setting processing (S4451) is performed. Details of the latent mode setting process (S4451) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area (S4405), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4452. On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 this time is not a status command indicating transition to the latent state (S4403: No), the main control device 110 issues a fall command. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S4452). If it is determined that the fall command has been received (S4452: Yes), a fall effect setting process is executed (S4453). Details of the fall effect setting process (S4453) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4452 that the fall command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4452: No), the process of S4453 is skipped and the process of S4406 is executed. Next, after executing the processing of S4406 to S4411, the latent mode storage area cb, the small hit number counter 223cc, the fall flag 223cd, and the time saving notification flag 223ce are cleared (S4454), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 154, a latent mode setting process (S4451) which is one of the status command processes 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. . FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of the latent mode setting process (S4451).

  In the latent mode setting process (S4451), first, the type of the status command received this time from the main controller 110 is read (S5801). Next, based on the received status command and the value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca, the latent mode is determined using the latent mode selection table 222ca (see FIG. 146 (b)) (S5802). Next, in the processing of S5802, a display latent mode command corresponding to the determined latent mode is set (S5803), and the determined latent mode is set in the latent mode storage area 223cb (S5804). Next, a latent confidence notification effect for notifying entry of the latent state is set (S5805), a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5806), and the present process ends. I do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, a description will be given of a fall effect setting process (S4453), which is one of the status command processes 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the content of the fall effect setting process (S4453).

  In the fall effect setting process (S4453), first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent state (S5901). When it is determined that the current game state is the latent state (S5901: Yes), a latent state notification effect for notifying the end of the latent state is set (S5902), and the state command received from the main control device 110 is set. Is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5903), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5901, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5901: No), then the remaining working hours is 99 or more, that is, the remaining working hours area 223k. It is determined whether the value stored in is equal to or greater than 99 (S5904). When it is determined that the number of remaining working hours is 99 or more (S5904: Yes), a working hours notification effect for notifying entry of the working hours is set (S5905), and the working hours notification flag 223ce is set to ON (S5908). . On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5904 that the number of remaining working hours is not 99 or more (S5904: No), the processing of S5905 and S5906 is skipped, and the flow shifts to the processing of S5908. Next, the fall flag 223cd is set to ON (S5907), a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5908), and the present processing is ended. I do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 156, a small hit-related process 4 (S4574) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit-related process 4 (S4574). The small hit related process 4 (S4574) is different from the small hit related process (S4504) in the first embodiment in that a process for displaying remaining time information is added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted.

  In the small hit-related process 4 (S4574), first, when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the latent state. (S4751). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S4751: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the small hit counter 223cc (S4752). Next, it is determined whether the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753). When it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753: Yes), the information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read (S4754). A display time information command indicating remaining time information is set (S4755), and then a small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4751 that the latent state is not in progress (S4751: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S4753 that the value of the small hit counter 223cc is not a multiple of 10, ( S4753: No), the process of S4702 is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, a variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the content of the variable display setting process 4 (S4183). The variable display setting process 4 (S4183) is different from the variable display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment described above in that the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) is replaced with the variable display setting process for special figure 1. 4 (S5171), a variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5175) in place of the variable display setting processing for special figure 2 (S5109), and a fall notification process (S5173) is added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted.

  In the variation display setting process 4 (S4183), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is on (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 change start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a latent state (S5103). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the special figure 1 variable display setting processing 4 (S5171) is executed, and the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is displayed. The corresponding data is shifted (S5106). The details of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5103, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it is determined whether the fall flag 223cd is on (S5172). If it is determined that the fall flag 223cd is ON (S5172: Yes), a fall notification process (S5173) is executed. Details of the fall notification process (S5173) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set (S5105), and the flow shifts to the process of S5106 described above. Next, the processing executed for the special figure 1 in S5171 to S5173 is changed to the special figure 2 for the target.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 158, a fall notification process (S5173), which is one process in the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall notification process (S5173).

  In the fall notification process (S5173), first, it is determined whether the time saving notification flag 223ce is on (S8001). If it is determined that the time saving notification flag 223ce is on (S8001: Yes), a display latent variation pattern command for the first special symbol is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S8009), and this processing is performed. To end. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time-saving notification flag 223ce is turned off (S8001: No), the reading of the information on the remaining working hours area 223k is executed (S8002). Next, a fall notification mode is determined using the fall notification selection table 222cb based on the remaining working hours read out in the process of S8002 and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223ca (S8003). Next, in the process of S8003, it is determined whether the determined notification mode is the determined notification mode (S8004). If it is determined that the notification mode is the fixed notification mode (S8004: Yes), the time saving notification completion flag is set to off (S8005), and the falling flag 223cd is set to off (S8006). Next, a time-saving notification effect for notifying entry of the time-saving state is set (S8007), the above-described processing of S8009 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S8004, when it is determined that the determined notification mode is not the final notification mode (S8004: No), a display fall notification command corresponding to the fall notification mode determined in the process of S8003 is set ( S8008), the above-described process of S8009 is executed, and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (S4183), which is one of the variable display setting processes 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. S5171) will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171). The special figure 1 variable display setting processing 4 (S5171) is different from the special figure 1 variable display setting processing (S5104) in the first embodiment in that the latent display mode storage area 223cb is used instead of the processing of S5206. The stored latent mode is read out (S5251), and a process of setting a display latent variation pattern command for the first special symbol based on the extracted variation pattern and the latent mode is executed (S5252). They differ in points. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 160, the variable display setting process 4 for the special figure 2 (S4183), which is one of the variable display setting processes 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. S5175) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (S5175). The special figure 2 variable display setting processing 4 (S5109) is different from the special figure 2 variable display setting processing (S5109) in the first embodiment in that the latent display mode storage area 223cb is used instead of the processing of S5206. The stored latent mode is read out (S5351), and a process of setting a display latent variation pattern command for the first special symbol based on the extracted variation pattern and the latent mode (S5352) is performed. They differ in points. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted.

  As described above, the fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a drop lottery for shifting the special symbol high-probability state to the low-probability state based on the lottery result is provided. In the state where the probable change state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set, the time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state) at any timing It can be difficult for the player to predict whether or not to shift to.

  In addition, if the player wins the drop lottery during the probability change state and shifts to the time saving state, the player enters a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) which is a game state advantageous to the player. It is harder to shift (it is more difficult to shift than the probable change state), so once the probable state is set, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) is set It is also possible to play the game while pounding so as not to win the falling lottery before.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same game method (left-handed game) is performed in the case where the probable change state is set and the case where the time reduction state is set. It is possible to make it more difficult to grasp whether the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, immediately after the probability change state is set (for example, the first special symbol change), when the falling lottery is won, the player is notified that the probability change state is set. Without delay, the effect is to execute from the beginning (after the end of the jackpot) as if the time saving state was set as if the time saving state had been set. It is possible to suppress giving the player an unpleasant feeling that the probable change state higher than the game state has ended in a short period of time.

  In addition, in the fourth embodiment, an effect that suggests to the player the possibility of winning in the falling lottery during the probable change state (indicative notification) and an effect that notifies the player that the player has won the falling lottery (final notification) ) Can be executed, and the selection ratio between the suggestion notification and the confirmation notification is made different based on the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol which can be set continuously in the probable change state. Specifically, it is configured such that the more the number of remaining fluctuations in the probable change state is, the more difficult it is to execute the definite notification. This makes it possible to recognize that the state has shifted from the probable change state to the time saving state in a state where the number of remaining fluctuations is large, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. In addition, the effect of performing the suggestion notification is configured to be executed even when the drop lottery has not been won.

  In the present embodiment, the suggestion notification described above or the confirmation notification is configured to allow the player to determine whether the current game state is the probable change state or the time saving state. Other configurations may be used. For example, a special symbol variation pattern (variation time) that can be selected only during the probable change state or a special symbol variation pattern (variation time) that can be selected only during the time saving state A configuration may be adopted in which a player is made to predict a current game state based on a special pattern variation pattern to be provided and executed. In this case, the variation pattern dedicated to the probable change state and the variation pattern dedicated to the time reduction state do not differ greatly in their contents, but may be provided, for example, with an error whose variation time differs by one second. This allows the player to be notified of the current game state based on a slight error in the fluctuation display time of a degree of incongruity, thereby allowing the player to pay close attention to the fluctuation display of the special symbol to be executed. Further, in this case, one second of the error may be used, for example, in a period until the fluctuation of the third symbol is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and thereby, the fluctuation start timing of the third symbol Can be notified to the player of the current game state by a slight discomfort that is slower or faster than usual, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the fourth embodiment, the lottery result of the falling lottery associated with the other special symbol change (lottery) is invalidated during the period in which the jackpot change is being performed on one special symbol. . Thus, for example, during the period in which the latent state is set due to the first latent transition condition that is established based on the jackpot winning in the special map 1, the second special without the lottery winning is selected during the period in which the latent state is set. It becomes possible to continue receiving the lottery of the symbol (special figure 2). Therefore, it is possible to set a latent state that is more advantageous (it is easy to continue for a long time) than a latent state that is set by satisfying other latent transition conditions.

  In the fourth embodiment, when a special symbol change (lottery) is executed, a drop lottery is also executed. In other words, the fall lottery is configured to be executed when the execution condition of the special symbol change (lottery) is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific entrance (for example, the first entrance) That the ball has entered the ball entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the general winning opening 63), that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, that the conditions for executing the ordinary symbol change (lottery) have been satisfied, , A special symbol or a normal symbol is stopped and displayed, or a timing when the symbol determination period has elapsed may be used as an opportunity for executing the drop lottery. If the execution condition of the special symbol change (lottery) is satisfied, the falling lottery is executed. A determination may be made as to whether or not to execute, and a fall lottery may be performed based on the determination result. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at which timing the falling lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the player has won the falling lottery from being easily detected by the player.

  In the fourth embodiment, the fall probability is determined each time the fall lottery is executed with the same probability. However, the present invention is not limited to this. An easy) high-probability state and a low-probability state that is hard to fall (hard to win) may be provided. In this case, for example, based on the jackpot type, a high probability change state and a low probability change state are provided as the probability change states set after the end of the big hit, and in the high probability change state, the low probability state of the drop lottery is set, and the low probability change state is set. In the state, a high probability state of the drop lottery may be set. Further, the state of the falling lottery (high-probability state, low-probability state) may be changed based on the number of special symbol changes (lottery) executed after the probability change state is set. For the predetermined number of changes (for example, 10 times) after the state is set, the high probability state of the falling lottery that is easy to win the falling lottery is set, and then the low probability state of the falling lottery is set. May be.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set a period in which the player is likely to fall from the certainty-change state and a period in which the player is hard to fall, so that it is possible to provide the player with a sharp playability. Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning lottery is won, a process of shifting the special symbol high-probability state to the low-probability state is executed. Processing for shifting the high probability state to the low probability state may be executed. Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the falling lottery is won, the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state. For example, from the high probability state of the special symbol to the medium probability state (the jackpot probability is high). (A state lower than the probability state and higher than the low probability state), and the medium probability state may be configured not to shift unless the winning lottery is won.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described fourth embodiment, a fall lottery for shifting (falling) the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state has been configured. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues depending on the lottery result of the drop lottery. It was possible to play the game while expecting to continue.

  However, in the configuration of the above-described fourth embodiment, the falling lottery is configured to be executed each time the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is performed, so that the player determines whether or not the falling lottery is performed by his or her own intention. It was not possible to make a selection, and there was a risk that the willingness to play would be reduced. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, a prize winning device (variable prize for small hitting) in which a ball can be won during a small hitting game executed when the special symbol lottery result is a predetermined lottery result (small hitting). Device) 2650, and when it is detected that a ball has passed in an area (flow path) through which a ball winning the variable winning prize device for small hit 2650 can pass, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state. And a falling gate 2650e3 (see FIG. 164) is provided to shift to.

  With such a configuration, similar to the above-described embodiments, a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability of a normal symbol, In the state), it is possible to select whether or not the high-probability state of the special symbol falls due to whether or not the player fires during the small hitting game.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed is configured to be different depending on the type (small hit type) when the small hit is won. Depending on the opening operation pattern performed, the rate at which balls that have won the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 during the small hitting game pass through the fall gate 2650e3 is configured to be different.

  With this configuration, the content of the small hit game to be executed is predicted in order to prevent the special symbol high-probability state from falling down and to perform the game aiming to acquire the privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. This allows the player to select a game.

  In addition, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, in a latent state set during a period in which one special symbol is performing a big hit change, a small hit is won in the other special symbol change (lottery). Even if a ball passes through the falling gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol is not shifted to the low probability state.

  As a result, in the state in which the latent state is set, the special symbol high probability state in which the special symbol high probability state does not fall (it is difficult to fall), and the special symbol high probability state is more likely to fall than the advantageous latent probability state Disadvantageous state and the like can be set.

<About the structure of the game board in the fifth embodiment>
Next, a configuration of the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the right side area of the gaming board 13 is different from the configuration of the gaming board 13 of the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 2). In addition, the point that the variable winning prize device 2650 for small hits is provided, and the prize device (variable winning device for small hitting 2650) that is opened during the small hit game is provided upstream of the second ball entrance 640. Is different.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the right area of the game board 13, a small winning variable prize device 2650 is provided. The variable winning prize device 2650 for small hits includes a plurality of flow paths through which the winning ball flows down (a flow path for causing a high probability state of a special symbol to fall to a low probability state, and a high probability state of a special symbol to a low probability state). The winning prize ball flows down a different flow path in accordance with the timing at which the ball wins the variable winning device 2650 for small hits.

  The internal structure of the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 will be described with reference to FIGS. Next, the structure of the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the small winning variable prize winning device 2650.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the variable winning prize device 2650 for small hits is combined with the opening forming member 2650b protruding from the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side of the opening forming member 2650b to form a small hit. Member 2650c for screwing the variable prize winning device 2650 to the game board 13, and an LED is lit on the back side of the base member 2650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 2650c. An LED board 2650d on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 2650e that sandwiches the LED board 2650d with a base member 2650c, and a small jackpot winning hole (small jackpot) formed in the opening forming member 2650b Opening and closing unit 2650f having an opening and closing door 2650f1 for opening and closing the winning opening 2650a; A flow path cover body 2650g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 2650e to form a flow path, and switches the flow path of the game ball by projecting into the flow path formed by the back cover body 2650e and the flow path cover body 2650g. A switching member 2650h, a link member 2650i locked with the switching member 2650h, a back cover body 2650j disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 2650g, and fixed to the back side of the back cover body 2650j. It is composed of a flow path solenoid 2650k for operating the link member 2650i, and a fixing cover 2650m for covering the flow path solenoid 2650k from the rear side and fixing it to the rear cover body 2650j with screws.

  FIG. 163 is a sectional view of the variable winning prize device 2650 for small hits. FIG. 163 (c) is a top view of the small winning variable prize apparatus 2650, and FIG. 163 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the small winning variable prize apparatus 2650 along Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 163 (b), the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 is formed with a small winning prize opening (small winning prize opening) 2650a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The small winning prize port (small winning prize port) 2650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 163 (b). A bottom surface inclined downward and to the left is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 2650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 163 (b).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the opening of the small winning prize port (small winning prize port) 2650a allows a ball to enter by an opening / closing door 2650f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism which can be moved in and out from the game board 13 side. It can be changed between a normal open state and a closed state where it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the open / close door 2650f1, and the ball can roll on the upper part of the open / close door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 2650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the base member 2650c (the interior of the game board 13) so as to be retracted from the inside of the small jackpot (small jackpot) 2650a. ing.

  With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is closed, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 2650f1 of the variable winning device for small hits 2650, and the second ball is entered. It is configured to be guided to the mouth 640 side, and during the right-handed game (during the latent state), it is possible to make the ball enter the second entrance 640 while performing the right-handed game. This makes it possible to reduce the trouble of changing the game method to the left-handed game during the latent state in which the small hit game is frequently executed. Therefore, a game can be played more easily.

  In the open state, a surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the small hit variable prize device 2650, so that more game balls can be efficiently used for the small hit prize port (small win). (Winning prize port) 2650a. Therefore, during the small hit game, the ball can be reliably won by the small hit variable winning device 2650, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 163 (a) is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. 163 (b). As shown in FIG. 163 (a), the magnetic sensor 2650c1 having the detection port 2650a1 is fixed to the base member 2650c so that the detection port 2650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 2650e.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a configuration in which the sphere guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 2650e is distributed to a normal discharge channel 2650e1 and a special discharge channel 2650e2 described below.

  FIG. 164 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is operated so that the ball is distributed to the special discharge channel 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted, and a guiding piece 2650h2 for guiding the sphere. It is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover 2650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 2650h is rotated into the distribution channel from the back side of the flow path cover 2650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the sphere guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 2650h2 disposed diagonally left below and guided to the special discharge channel 2650e2. . The special discharge flow path 2650e2 flows down a falling route through which the inflowing ball passes through a fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 and a second normal discharge flow path 2650e5 branched from the special discharge flow path 2650e2. 2 normal switch) 2650e6, and a fall switch 2650e3 or a second normal switch 2650e6 that can detect the passage of a sphere that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 2650e2. It is detected and then discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned falling switch 2650e3 detects a ball during the small hitting game, that is, when the ball passes the falling route, a special symbol is formed. Is configured to transition (fall) to the low probability state. That is, the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for shifting the special symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state. In addition, the switching member 2650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 2650e2) or a flow path that can pass through a fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3, as a flow path of a ball that has won the small win variable winning device 2650 during a small win. This is for setting one of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 2650e1) that cannot pass (difficult) the gate (falling switch) 2650e3, and is set by turning on the flow path solenoid 2650k. The flow path is switched so that the ball that has won the small winning variable prize device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 164 (a)).

  In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the channel solenoid 2650k is set to off during a normal game, and the ball that has won the small hit variable prize device 2650 has the special discharge channel 2650e2. It is configured to flow down. Therefore, even when the small hitting game is not being executed, if an illegal state in which the opening / closing door 2650f1 of the small hitting variable prize device 2650 is opened and the ball is won is detected, the illegally winning ball is dropped. It is configured to pass through 2650e3.

  In this manner, the state in which the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to off is set to a state maintained for a long time in the pachinko machine 10, and the flow path configuration disadvantageous to the player (the small winning variable prize winning apparatus 2650) By adopting a flow path configuration in which a winning ball can pass through the falling switch 2650e3), the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed, and a penalty can be imposed on a game in which an illegal game is played.

  As described above, it is determined whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is ended by the flowing route in which the ball that has won the variable winning prize device 2650 for the small hit during the small hitting game ends. Can improve the interest of the elderly. It should be noted that passing through the entrance of the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 2650h2 of the switching member 2650h) from the small winning prize port (small prize winning port) 2650a of the small prize variable prize apparatus 2650. The required time is constituted by at least one second.

  At the end of the normal discharge channel 2650e1, a discharge confirmation switch (normal switch) 2650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided. Thereby, it can be determined whether or not all the winning balls have been ejected into the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 based on the total number of ball detections of the normal switch 2650e4, the second falling switch 2650e6, and the falling switch 2650e3. That is, the number of balls detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1 (the number of balls winning the variable winning device for small hitting 2650) and various switches (normal switch 2650e4, second falling switch 2650e6, falling switch) provided in the three discharge areas. 2650e3) is compared with the number of balls detected (the number of balls ejected from the small winning variable prize apparatus 2650) to determine whether or not balls remain in the small winning variable prize apparatus 2650. can do.

  In addition, the end timing of the small hitting game (the condition for ending the small hitting game (when a predetermined number (10) of prizes are won in the variable winning prize device 2650 for small hitting, or when the opening scenario of the variable prize winning device 2650 for small hitting is changed) At the time when the small hit ending period executed after the completion of the small hitting ending period is completed), if all of the game balls that have entered the small hit variable winning device 2650 are not discharged, the small hit variable It is preferable to determine the abnormality inside the winning device 2650, notify the abnormality to the outside, or stop the game so that the big hit game or the normal game is not started. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game progresses in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10 and an occurrence of a secondary abnormality can be suppressed.

  As described above, the ball that has won the small winning prize port (small winning prize port) 2650a of the small prize variable prize device 2650 is detected by the ball prize switch 2650c1, and based on the detected ball, the prize ball (book In the embodiment, ten prize balls are paid out for one ball prize, and whether the ball passes the fall switch 2650e3 by using the detected ball (passed the ball prize switch 2650c1). By being configured to be able to sort whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol ends during the small hit game, it can be determined. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated area for shifting the special symbol high-probability state to the low-probability state separately from the small hit variable winning device 2650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Next, the flow of a game in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. First, with reference to FIG. 165, a description will be given of a flow of a game when a jackpot of a first special symbol (special figure 1) is won in a state where a probable change state is set as a game state. FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 big hit is won during the probable change state.

  As shown in FIG. 165, in the fifth embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 in the state where the probable change state is set similarly to the above-described fourth embodiment, the latent The state is configured to be set (see FIG. 165 (a)). Then, during the period in which the latent state is set (during the change of the special figure 1 big hit), the small hitting game is performed by performing the right-handed game to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (the special figure 2). Frequently executed latent state games (RUSH games) are configured to be executed.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, the special symbol 1) (the jackpot is won based on the result of the lottery after the lottery is won by the special symbol lottery, the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result). ) Is configured so that the jackpot is not won in the lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special figure 2). Thereby, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special figure 1), a jackpot is won by lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special figure 2), and it is based on the jackpot winning of the other special symbol. By starting the big hit game, it is possible to prevent the period during which the latent state is set from being shortened. That is, in the fifth embodiment, when the latent state is set, the latent state game (RUSH game) is surely performed during the preset latent state setting period (for example, the jackpot fluctuation time in Tokujin 1). ) Can be executed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in a state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one of the special symbols (for example, the special symbol 1) (after the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery) In the period until the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state even if the ball passes the falling switch 2650e3 in the variable winning device 2650 for small hits. And a period in which the transition does not occur (falling invalid period).

  Therefore, if the latent state is set during the change of the special figure 1 that has won the jackpot, the special figure 1 fluctuation period is the fall invalid period, and the high probability state of the special symbol ends. The latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed without worrying about this. It should be noted that, although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the latent state has been set based on the jackpot winning of the special figure 1 (the latent state is set based on the establishment of the first latent transition condition). Is performed), and it is determined whether or not to execute an invincible effect (see FIG. 169) for notifying the player.

  By configuring so as to execute this invincible effect (see FIG. 169), it is possible to easily recognize that the fall invalid period is set in the currently set latent state, so that the player It is possible to perform a latent state game (RUSH game) with peace of mind. Further, in the fifth embodiment, even in the latent state in which the falling invalid period is set, there is a case where the above-described invincible effect is not executed. With this configuration, in the latent state game in which the invincible effect (see FIG. 169) is not executed, the fall invalid period may actually be set. When the winning variable prize device 2650 wins, the falling rate can be reduced.

  Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation elapses (see FIG. 165 (b)), the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. If the small hit game is not executed at this timing, the big hit game is started. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, when the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit change elapses, the start of the big hit game is postponed until the small hit game ends. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a big hit game is started during execution of a small hit game, thereby providing a game that is difficult to understand for the player.

  The same playing state (normal state) as during the big hit game is set for the interruption period from the elapse of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit change shown in FIG. 165 to the start of the big hit game. In the fifth embodiment, when the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit change elapses, the start of the big hit game is interrupted until the small hit game ends (postponed) ), But it may be controlled so that the small hit game and the big hit game are not executed at the same time. For example, the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit change elapses. , The running small hit game may be forcibly ended.

  In addition, although detailed description is omitted in the drawings, in this embodiment, as in each of the above-described embodiments, one special symbol (special figure 2) wins a small hit, and a small hit game is executed. During this period, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the latent state (favorable latent state) set based on the jackpot winning in the special figure 1 is set as the fall invalid period, a special symbol is provided to the player. It is possible to entertain the latent state game (RUSH game) without worrying that the high probability state will end. Further, the small hit game started during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed to the end.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 166, a description will be given of a flow of a game when a predetermined number of time savings is exhausted in a state in which the probable change state is set as the game state. FIG. 166 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when all the time savings are exhausted during the probable change state.

  As shown in FIG. 166, in the fifth embodiment, since the reduction of the number of time savings is performed at the start of the change of the special symbol, the value of the counter (time saving counter 203f) for continuously setting the time saving state is reduced. When it becomes 0, the latent state is set from the executed special figure 1 fluctuation (see FIG. 166 (a)). As shown in FIG. 166, the latent state set by exhausting a predetermined number of time savings is configured so that the drop lottery during the latent state period is effectively determined. Therefore, in the small hitting game executed during the latent state game (RUSH), the ball won by the variable winning device (variable winning device for small hitting 2650) may end the high probability state of the special symbol. There is a certain disadvantage potential state.

<Production effects performed in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, description will be given of characteristic effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment. In addition, the mode of the effect performed during the probable change state in order to indicate whether or not the latent state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the effect described in each embodiment described above. Since this is the same as the mode, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 167 (a), the effect content displayed when a small hit is won in a state where the latent state is set will be described. FIG. 167 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents when a small hit is won in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167 (a), in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, a display mode indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in a variable manner is displayed, and in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Indicates a display mode ("341") indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) has won the small hit. In the guidance display area Dm3, "right-handed" for guiding the game method in the latent state is displayed.

  The main display area Dm is displayed in a display mode for notifying that the character 811 has won a small hit, and the character “GET” is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment that "small hit game starts" indicating that a small hit game is started is displayed.

  When the small hit game is started, the display screen of FIG. 167 (b) is displayed. FIG. 167 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents during the small hit game. According to the diagram shown in FIG. 167 (b), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 has the same display mode as that of FIG. 167 (a) described above, that is, a display indicating that the special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner. Although the mode is displayed, in practice, during the small hit game, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted. Note that, unlike the display mode shown in FIG. 167 (b), the state where the special figure 1 is appropriately fluctuating (the state in which the fluctuation time is subtracted) and the state where the fluctuating display of the special figure 1 is interrupted The display mode displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 may be configured to be different from the state in which the change is performed (the state in which the fluctuation time is not subtracted).

  Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect is displayed in which the character 811 runs from the left to the right, and the treasure chest 812 appears from the traveling direction. In the present embodiment, during the small hit game, an effect of opening the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the display mode of the effect symbol 813 appearing from the treasure box 812 changes the current small size. The result of the winning game is notified to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 168 (a) and FIG. 168 (b), display contents for showing the game result of the small hit game in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 168 (a) shows the display contents when the falling switch 2650e3 detects a ball as a result of having made the small winning variable prize device 2650 win a ball during the small winning game, and the special symbol high probability state ends. FIG. 168 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example. FIG. 168 (b) shows the display content when the falling switch 2650e3 does not detect a ball as a result of making the variable winning prize device 2650 win a ball during the small hit game. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the above.

  FIG. 168 (a) shows that a rendering symbol 813 indicating a "cross mark" is displayed from the treasure chest 812, and that the character 811 has shifted from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state during the small hitting game. It is displayed in the failure display mode shown. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment indicating that the latent state game (RUSH game) is completed and the game method returns to the left-handed game is displayed. That is, during the latent state in which the RUSH game is performed (the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol), the game state is changed to the low probability state by shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state. In order to shift from the state to the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol), a comment for executing the left-handed game is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 168 (b), a staging pattern 813 indicating “V” is displayed from the treasure chest 812, and a display mode for informing the player that the RUSH game is to be continuously performed (that is, a leftward display pattern 813). The character 811 is displayed in a display mode in which the character 811 runs to the right.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect corresponding to the game result during the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed by the third symbol display device 81, The player can easily grasp the progress of the latent state game (RUSH game) simply by grasping the contents of the effect executed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the ball that has won the small hitting variable prize device 2650 during the small hitting game is changed to the probability changing switch 2650e3 in accordance with the type of the small hitting game executed during the latent state game (RUSH game). Are different in the ratio (possibility) of flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 provided with.

  Therefore, for example, on the display screen at the time of the small hit winning shown in FIG. 167 (a), the player selects whether or not to make the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 win a ball in the current small hit game. A comment (for example, "RUSH end if bad luck due to small win prize", "stop launch if uneasy") is displayed, and a character displayed at the time of winning a small win The display mode of 811 may be configured to be variable depending on whether or not the small hit type that has been won this time is a small hit in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is easily ended.

  With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to select whether or not to make the small prize variable prize device 2650 win a ball during the small hit game. Further, in the fifth embodiment in which the latent state is set only for a predetermined period (special figure 1 change time), the number of small hit games that can be executed during the latent state is limited. , The player can play a game while considering whether to obtain a privilege (prize ball) during the small hit game or to avoid the end of the latent game (RUSH game). Sex can be provided.

  Further, according to the display mode of the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen during the small hitting game shown in FIG. 167 (b), the type of the small hitting game being executed may be notified to the player. For example, it is preferable that the smaller the hit type being executed is the smaller hit type in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is easily terminated, the older and tattered treasure chest 812 is displayed. It is preferable to display a comment according to the display mode of the treasure box 812. Further, the display mode displayed during the small hit game is more specific than the content suggesting the small hit type (RUSH game continuation expectation degree) which has been won this time to the player when the small hit is won. It is preferable to be configured to notify the player of a (highly reliable) content.

  With this configuration, the player who has selected whether or not to make the small-winning variable prize device 2650 win a ball in the current small-hitting game based on the display screen displayed at the time of the small-hit winning is provided. Since a more specific RUSH continuation expectation degree can be indicated, the player himself / herself can be predicted whether or not the selected game content is correct.

  In this case, in particular, it is emphasized that the player who has selected not to win the ball in the variable winning prize device 2650 for small hits is a small hit type in which the RUSH game is difficult to end even if the ball is won. It should be configured to be able to notify. Specifically, a small hit type discriminating means for judging the type of the small hit game this time, and whether or not the ball has won the small hit variable prize winning device 2650 during a predetermined period since the small hit game was started. (Or a means for determining that a right-handed game has been executed after a small win), and the result of the determination by the small hit type determining means is a small hit type in which the RUSH game is difficult to end. In this case, if it is determined that the ball has not won the small hit variable prize winning device 2650 within a predetermined period after the small hit game is started, it is more advantageous to fire the ball in the present small hit game. It is preferable to provide a display means for displaying a fantastic comment (for example, "should have fired a ball", "weakling") indicating that the game has been obtained.

  This makes it possible to clearly notify the player that the player has lost the ball by not allowing the variable winning prize device 2650 for small hitting to win a ball. The variable winning device 2650 can be prompted to win the ball. In other words, when the RUSH game is terminated by causing the variable winning prize device 2650 for small hits to win a ball, it is determined that the current selection has failed based on the game result even if the fanning by the effect is not performed. Although the player can be aware of this, the player who has selected not to win the ball in the variable winning prize device 2650 for small hits cannot recognize whether or not the current selection result is advantageous. Is displayed, the player can easily know whether or not the current selection is successful.

  Further, a display mode for notifying the player who has selected not to win the ball in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 that the current small hit type is the small hit type in which the RUSH game is likely to end. (For example, "Stop firing and correct answer", "I feel good") may be displayed, and even if the small hit type this time is a small hit type in which the RUSH game is likely to end, The small hit game may display a fantastic comment (for example, "should have fired a ball", "wimpy") indicating that the person who fired the ball gained the privilege.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the display contents of the effect for notifying that the vehicle is in the latent state (advantageous latent probability state) in which the falling invalid period is set will be described. FIG. 169 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed at the end of the small hit in the advantageous latent probability state. As shown in FIG. 169, when the currently set latent state is the advantageous latent state in which the fall invalid period is set, the same latent mode setting processing as in the above-described fourth embodiment (FIG. 154). When the invincible mode is set as the current latent mode in S4451), an effect mode (“invincible mode”) indicating that the currently set latent state is an advantageous latent state for the player. Is displayed.

  When entering the invincible mode, the display mode of the character 811 becomes a display mode dedicated to the invincible mode (a display mode in which an aura is surrounded around). Then, “Lucky point × 0” is displayed as the cumulative display mode 819 with the number of balls passing through the fall gate 2650e3 during the invincible mode. The cumulative display mode 819 corresponds to a command indicating the number of balls detected by the falling switch 2650e3 output from the main control device 110 (or a command indicating the number of times of falling if the falling invalid period is not set). Numbers are displayed. As a result, the situation where the invincible mode has worked advantageously for the player can be reported in an easily understandable manner.

  Although not shown in FIG. 169, the small hit count display 825 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the above-described fourth embodiment may be displayed. And the cumulative display mode 819 may be displayed together. In addition, a non-game number counting means for counting the number of small hit games in which the player does not win the ball in the small hit variable winning device 2650, and the number counted by the non-game number counting means are displayed on the display means. May be configured.

  With this configuration, for example, for all the small hit games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game), the number of small hit games in which the player executes the game and the player Since the number of small hit games that have not been executed can be easily grasped, it can be used as a reference for future RUSH games.

<Electrical Configuration of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 170, the ROM 202 of the fifth embodiment differs from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment in that a small hit type selection 5 table 202da is provided instead of the small hit type selection table 202e. The difference is that an operation scenario storage area 202db is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection 5 table 202da. The fifth embodiment is configured such that only the second special symbol (special figure 2) wins the small hit, and when the small hit is won by the lottery of the special figure 2, the small hit type selection five table The small hit type is selected with reference to 202da.

  In the small hit type selection 5 table 202da, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of the value of the small hit type counter C5, and as shown in FIG. 171 (a), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is set. Is defined in association with “small hit A” in the range of “0 to 14”. The "small hit A" is a small hit type in which the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state for 1.5 seconds after the opening period of 1.5 seconds elapses during the small hit game. After the open state of 1.5 seconds has elapsed, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set. Since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, FIG. Omitted.

  In addition, "small hit B" is associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "15 to 59". This “small hit B” is set after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.1 second after the opening period of 0.5 second elapses during the small hit game. This is a small hit type for setting an open state for 1.4 seconds (second open setting) after an interval of 1 second. After the second release setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

  "Small hit C" is associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "60 to 79". The “small hit C” is set after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state for 0.5 second (first open setting) after the opening period of 0.1 second elapses during the small hit game. This is a small hit type in which an open state for 0.1 second is set (second open setting) after an interval of 1 second. After the second release setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

  “Small hit D” is associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of “80 to 99”. This “small hit D” is set after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state for 0.5 second after the opening period of 0.1 second elapses during the small hit game (first open setting). , A small hit type that sets an open state for one second (second open setting) after an interval of 0.3 second. After the second release setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

  The operation scenario storage area 202db is a data area in which an operation scenario of the flow path solenoid 2650h during the small hitting game is stored in advance, and the flow path solenoid 2650h performs the same operation regardless of the type of the small hitting executed. One operation scenario is set to execute.

  Here, the contents of the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 202db will be described with reference to FIG. 171 (b). FIG. 171 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario specified in the operation scenario storage area 202db. As shown in FIG. 171 (b), the operation scenario set in accordance with the start timing of the small hit game is defined in the operation scenario storage area 202db.

  Specifically, the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to be turned off until 1.4 seconds elapse from the small hit start timing, and from 1.4 seconds after the small hit start to the end of the small hit. During this period, the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to be on. An operation scenario in which the operation content of the flow path solenoid 2650h is defined is a loop counter in which a value is incremented by one every time main processing of the main control device 110 is executed every 4 milliseconds. It is managed by a counter (not shown).

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, whether or not the ball that has won the small prize variable prize device 2650 flows down the special discharge channel 2650e2 is determined by the selected small hit type and the channel solenoid. It is configured to be variably set according to the operation scenario of 2650h. Furthermore, the ball that has flowed down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 is branched into a ball that passes through the falling gate 2650e3 and a ball that does not pass (the second normal switch 2650e6) by the internal structure of the variable winning device for small hits 2650. It is composed.

  Specifically, in the small hit game in which “small hit A” is set as the small hit type, the opening period (1.5 seconds) corresponds to the period in which the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to off (1 from the start of the small hit). .4 seconds), the ball does not pass through the falling route, and the small hit game most advantageous to the player whose opening period is set long is executed.

  In the small hit game in which "small hit B" to "small hit D" are set as the small hit types, the first opening period is the timing at which the winning ball can pass through the falling route. Further, the opening period of “small hit C” and “small hit D” is as short as 0.1 second (shorter than “small hit B”). Since the first open period is 0.5 seconds long (because it is longer than "small hit B"), a small hit game in which the ball easily passes through the falling route is provided.

  In addition, the “small hit C” is the shortest period in which the first attacker (first variable winning device) 65 is opened in one opening operation, which is 0.6 seconds, which is the most disadvantageous for the player. It becomes a winning game. In the fifth embodiment, it takes about 0.5 seconds for the ball fired by the right-handed game to win the variable hitting prize device 2650 and reach the distribution channel distributed by the channel solenoid 2650h. It is configured such that the symbol determination period of the special symbol at the time of winning a small hit is 0.5 seconds.

  Therefore, immediately after the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 167 (a)), the right hitting game is started by starting the right hitting game. At this point, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball shot before stopping the right-handed game is won in the variable hitting prize device 2650 for small hits.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172, the RAM 203 of the fifth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment in that a small hit prize counter 203da, a fall passage counter 203db, and a passage flag 203dc are added. are doing. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The small hit prize counter 203da is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the small prize variable prize device 2650 during the small hit game. In the small hit entrance passage process (see S171 in FIG. 174), the ball passing is performed. If the timing at which the sensor (ball detection switch 2650c1) is determined to be on is determined to be during the opening period of the winning port for small hits 2650a (S3302 in FIG. 174: Yes), the value is incremented by 1 and The winning number command corresponding to the information indicating the value of is set (S3305 in FIG. 174). Then, in the small hit control process 5 (see S2271 in FIG. 176), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit game (S2511 in FIG. 176: yes), the value of the counter is cleared.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the fifth embodiment, based on the winning number command set in accordance with the value of the small hit winning counter 203da, the sound lamp control device 113 continues the latent state on the sound lamp control device 113 side. During the set period, the number of balls that have won the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 is accumulated. As a result, the number of winning balls in one latent state game (RUSH game) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, as described above, during the small hitting game, the player has the game property of selecting whether or not to make the ball win the small winning variable prize winning device 2650, Depending on the selection made by the player, the accumulated value of the number of balls won by the small hit variable prize device 2650 may greatly differ even for the same small hit game number. Therefore, it is possible to provide a detailed game result by displaying the number of winning balls on the variable winning device for small hits 2650 instead of the number of times the small hitting game is executed.

  It should be noted that both the number of balls that have won the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 and the number of times that the small hitting game has been executed are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or that the player wins during one small hitting game. The average value of the number of balls may be displayed, or the winning number may be displayed as a winning history for each small hit type of the executed small hit game.

  The fall passage counter 203db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed the fall gate 2650e3 during the small hit game, and the fall switch 2650e3 detects a ball in the fall gate passage process (see S172 in FIG. 175). In this case (S3402 in FIG. 175: Yes), the value is incremented by 1 (S3403 in FIG. 175), and a pass number command is set with information corresponding to the value after the addition (S3404 in FIG. 175). Then, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hitting game (S2511 in FIG. 176: yes), the value of the counter is cleared.

  In the present embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, that is, when the advantageous latent probability state is set, the number of balls passing the fall route is always counted. . As a result, when the “invincible mode” is set as the latent mode, the route passes through a route (falling route) in which the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state when there is no advantageous latent state. The number of balls played can be notified to the player (see the cumulative display mode 819 in FIG. 169).

  The passage flag 203dc indicates that the falling switch 2650e3 has detected a ball when the falling switch 2650e3 has effectively detected that a ball has been detected (when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to off). The flag is set to ON to indicate that the falling switch 2650e3 has detected a ball.

  This pass flag 203dc is determined when the ball has passed the fall gate 2650e3 and the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to OFF in the fall gate passage process (see S172 in FIG. 175) (S3405 in FIG. 175). : No) Set to ON. Then, when the passage flag 203dc is set to ON, the process of determining whether or not a new ball has passed the fall gate 2650e3 in the fall gate passage process (see S172 in FIG. 175) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process for dropping the high probability state of the special symbol is performed a plurality of times during one small hit game.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment in that a winning number counter 223da and a passing number counter 223db are provided. And are different in that they are added, and are otherwise the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The winning number counter 223da is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the variable winning device for small hitting 2650 during the small hitting game. In the ball passing related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179), the main control device 110 If it is determined that the winning number command has been received from the player (S8101: Yes in FIG. 179), the value is incremented by one, and information corresponding to the value after the addition is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for display. A number command is set (see S8106 in FIG. 179).

  Then, when the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the value of the counter is cleared. In other words, once the latent state is set, the winning number counter 223da sets the ball that has won the small winning variable prize device 2650 in a plurality of small winning games executed until the latent state ends. It is configured so that the number can be accumulated and measured.

  The pass number counter 223db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3, and determines that a pass number command has been received from the main control device 110 in the ball pass related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179). In this case (S8107 in FIG. 179: Yes), the value is incremented by 1 when the current latent state is the advantageous latent state (see S8110 in FIG. 179).

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment in that the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 55) is used instead of the small hit control process (See FIG. 176) is different from the small hit entrance passing process (see FIG. 174) and the falling gate passing process (see FIG. 175). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 174, a small hit entrance passage process (S171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit entrance passage process (S171).

  In the small hit entrance passage process (S171), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor is on (S3301). When it is determined that the ball passage sensor is not on (S3301: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball passing sensor is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is during the opening period of the winning hole for small hits (S3302). If it is determined that it is during the opening period of the winning port for small hits (S3302: Yes), a small hit entrance passing command is set (S3303). The small hit entrance passage command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the audio ramp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. Sent. One is added to the value of the small hit prize counter 203da (S3304). Next, in the processing of S3304, a winning number command is set based on the value of the small hit winning counter 203da after the addition (S3305), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, when it is determined that the opening period of the winning port for small hits is not during (S3302: No), an error command is set (S3306), and the flow path solenoid is set to off (S3307). Then, the present process ends.

  Next, a fall gate passing process (S172) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the content of the fall gate passing process (S172).

  In the fall gate passing process (S172), first, it is determined whether or not the passing flag 203dc is on (S3401). If it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is ON (S3401: Yes), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is not on (S3401: No), it is determined whether or not there is a passage at the fall gate (S3402). If it is determined that there is no passage through the fall gate (S3402: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a passage at the fall gate (S3402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fall passage counter 203db (S3403), and the number of passages is determined based on the value of the fall passage counter 203db after the addition. The command is set (S3404). Next, it is determined whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405). If it is determined that the status update restriction flag 203ca is ON (S3405: Yes), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state update restriction flag is not on (S3405: No), it is determined whether or not the falling gate passage valid period is in progress (S3406). If it is determined that it is during the fall gate pass valid period (S3406: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is set to off (S3407), and the pass flag 203dc is set to on (S3408). Next, a fall command is set (S3409), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3406, if it is determined that it is not during the falling gate passage valid period (S3406: No), an error command is set (S3410), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 176, a small hit control process 5 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit control process 5 (S2271). The small hit control process 5 (S2271) is different from the small hit control process (S2205) in the above-described first embodiment when it is determined in the process of S2511 that it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S2511: No). The difference is that a process of clearing the values of the small hit prize counter 203da and the fall passage counter 203db (S2571) and setting the passage flag 203dc to off (S2572) is added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179. The control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is different from the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first to fourth embodiments in the state command process (see FIG. 62). Instead, state command processing 5 (see FIG. 177) and hit-related processing 5 (see FIG. 178) are executed instead of hit-related processing (see FIG. 63). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the state command processing 5 (S4291) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of state command processing 5 (S4291). State command processing 5 (S4291) is different from state command processing 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment in that processing of clearing the winning number counter 223da and the passing number counter 223db is performed instead of the processing of S4454 (S4471). It differs in that it is added. Other processes are the same as the status command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the hit-related process 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the content of the hit-related process 5 (S4292). The hit-related process 5 (S4292) is different from the hit-related process (S4216) in the first embodiment in that a process related to ball passing is added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted.

  In the hit-related processing 5 (S4292), when it is determined in the processing of S4505 that the prize-ball command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4505: No), it is determined whether or not a ball-passing-related command has been received. (S4581). If it is determined that the ball passing related command has been received (S4581: Yes), the ball passing related process (S4582) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball passing related command has not been received (S4581: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the ball passing related process (S4582) which is one of the hit related processes 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the content of the ball passing related processing (S4582).

  In the ball passing-related processing (S4582), first, it is determined whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main controller 110 this time (S8101). If it is determined that the winning number command has been received (S8101: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 223da (S8102), and the reading of the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cb is performed. It is executed (S8103). Next, it is determined whether the latent mode read in the process of S8103 is the invincible mode (S8104). If it is determined that the mode is not the invincible mode (S8104: No), a suggestive effect indicating the end of the latent state is set (S8105), a winning number command for display is set (S8106), and the process ends. . On the other hand, in the process of S8104, when it is determined that the read latent mode is the invincible mode (S8104: Yes), the process of S8105 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S8106.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S8101, if it is determined that the winning number command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S8101: No), it is determined whether or not the passing number command has been received (S8107). If it is determined that the pass number command has been received (S8107: Yes), the value stored in the state setting area 223j is read (S8108). Next, in the process of S8108, it is determined whether or not the read value is a value indicating the time saving missing latency (S8109). When it is determined that the read value is a value indicating the time saving missing latency (S8109: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the passage number counter 223db (S8110). On the other hand, in the process of S8109, if it is determined that the read value is not the value indicating the time saving latency probability (S8109: No), the process of S8110 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S8111.

  Next, the reading of the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cb is executed (S8111). Next, it is determined whether the latent mode read in the process of S8111 is the invincible mode (S8112). If it is determined that the mode is not the invincible mode (S8112: No), a suggestive effect indicating the end of the latent state is set (S8113), a display pass number command is set (S8114), and the process ends. . On the other hand, in the process of S8112, if the read-out latent mode is determined to be the invincible mode (S8112: Yes), the process of S8113 is skipped, the process of S8114 is executed, and the present process ends.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed differs according to the type (small hit type) when the small hit is won. According to the opening operation pattern to be executed, the ratio of the ball that has won the small hit variable prize device 2650 during the small hit game passes through the falling gate 2650e3 is configured to be different.

  With this configuration, the content of the small hit game to be executed is predicted in order to prevent the special symbol high-probability state from falling down and to perform the game aiming to acquire the privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. This allows the player to select a game.

  In addition, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, in a latent state set during a period in which one special symbol is performing a big hit change, a small hit is won in the other special symbol change (lottery). Even if a ball passes through the falling gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol is not shifted to the low probability state.

  As a result, in the state in which the latent state is set, the special symbol high probability state in which the special symbol high probability state does not fall (it is difficult to fall), and the special symbol high probability state is more likely to fall than the advantageous latent probability state Disadvantageous state and the like can be set.

  In the above embodiments, the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of time savings) is performed at the timing of starting the change of the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol change start process (see S208 in FIG. 33)). ), The change (lottery) of the first special symbol and the change (lottery) of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed by a predetermined number of times. The time saving game (a game in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set) is configured to be executed. For example, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 100 (when the number of time savings is set to 100) ), The period from the start of the 100th special symbol change to the start of the 101st special symbol change is in a non-time saving state (low probability state of a normal symbol). Was Tsu.

  During the period in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the lottery (fluctuation) advantageous to the player can be executed even in the lottery (fluctuation) of the ordinary symbol different from the special symbol, The period from the start of the 100th special symbol change to the start of the 101st special symbol change, that is, the period from the start of the special symbol change for the number of times exceeding the predetermined number of time savings However, there is a problem in that the non-time saving state is set to cause a player to feel uncomfortable.

  However, if the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of time savings) is configured to be updated at the timing when the change display of the special symbol ends (timing when the symbol determination period ends), In a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the change (lottery) of the first special symbol and the change (lottery) of the second special symbol, the special symbol change (lottery) of a predetermined number of times reduced is set to the time reduction state. There is a problem that it is executed in a state where it is performed.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, a time-saving termination condition is set for a special symbol (for example, a first special symbol) corresponding to a special symbol lottery (100th time-saving) executed when the value of the time-saving counter 203f becomes 0. (1st time reduction end condition) is set, the time reduction end condition (2nd time reduction end condition) is set for the other special symbol (for example, the second special symbol), and the two set time reduction end conditions are set. The time saving state may be terminated based on the previously established time saving end condition.

  Specifically, when a predetermined period (for example, 100 time reductions) is set as a period in which the time reduction state is set, the special symbol change corresponding to the final change in the time reduction state (for example, the 100th time reduction) ends. The first time-saving ending condition that is satisfied by this and the second time-saving ending condition that is satisfied when a condition for starting a new special symbol change (for example, the 101st special symbol change) that is newly executed after a predetermined period has elapsed is satisfied. When the first time reduction end condition is satisfied first, that is, the 100th special symbol change period (or the symbol confirmation period) is completed before the 101st special symbol change is started. In such a case, the time reduction state is terminated at that time.

  On the other hand, if the second time reduction end condition is satisfied before the first time reduction end condition is satisfied, that is, before the 100th special symbol change period (or symbol confirmation period) ends (special If the start condition of the 101st special symbol change is satisfied during the symbol change, the time saving state may be ended at a point before the 101st special symbol lottery is executed.

  With this configuration, in the state where the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the maximum time period can be set while preventing the special symbol change (lottery) from being performed a predetermined number of times or more. It can be set as a time saving state. Therefore, the state advantageous to the player can be set as long as possible as the normal symbol lottery (fluctuation).

  Also, in each of the above embodiments, there is a probability change counter 203aa for measuring a period in which the special symbol high probability state is set, and a time reduction counter 203f for measuring the period in which the normal symbol high probability state is set. Although the value of each counter is decremented and interrupted, in each of the above embodiments, the time reduction counter is replaced with the process of interrupting the decrement of the probable variable counter 203aa (the process of interrupting (skipping) the measurement). Processing for interrupting the subtraction of 203f may be applied, or the opposite processing may be executed.

  In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased, respectively), the reserved ball number command is issued. The case where the signal is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main control device 110 increases, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Accordingly, the number of times that main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winning in the first entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Alternatively, the number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning in the first entrance port 64 may be changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the third symbol display for showing the result of the lottery of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, of the third symbols, different display means may be provided between a display means for displaying a main symbol and a display means for displaying a slave symbol, which are emphasized and displayed to a player. Further, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used as the configuration of the display unit.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game aiming at the right area of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player, and a left area of the game board 13 in a normal game state. The left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the aiming area of the game board 13 may be made different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time reduction state, and during the normal state. May execute a right-handed game. Further, a game in different game states may be executed while aiming at the same area.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 that determine that the operating means has been operated by the player performing a pressing operation are used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. It is also possible to use an operating means configured in a lever shape that can determine that the player has operated by tilting the player left and right or back and forth, and that the player has been operated by touching or approaching It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation unit that can be distinguished, a wireless type operation unit that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be executed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the sound lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting the display mode in the effect performed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is performed by the sound lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a process for executing a game (lottery) and a result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects. May be performed by the same control device. With this configuration, a single control device can execute a plurality of different processes.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot has been hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times right item) can increase the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is awarded in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more May be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the gaming property in which a plurality of special symbols are drawn (changed) according to a predetermined rule and the gaming property in which a drawing (change) is performed individually and independently are described. However, each of the gaming properties described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative of game media. As an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol, and the player is given a special game. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, and thus a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Characteristic A group> (Small hit is possible during the change of specific special map)
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and the first identification information displayed on the first display unit. , A dynamic display period setting unit for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the first identification information by the dynamic display unit, and the second determination being executable. A second determination unit, a second display unit on which second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination unit is displayed, and the second display unit for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display unit. When the first identification information is displayed, the first bonus game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second bonus game is performed. A bonus game execution means for executing There is a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination and a second game state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination. The game state setting means can set the first game state in the dynamic display period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) that is advantageous to a player during a period from the end of a bonus game to the next jackpot in accordance with a lottery result (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application, First Publication No. H11-26464). 2012-217766 gazette). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the period during which the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set during the advantageous gaming state. If the lottery is immediately won by the next lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened. If the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next round, the advantageous gaming state is set. Is set longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous game state provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming property of giving a bonus to a player during a period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the bonus given to the player is greatly different. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine further improved in the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the period during which the first determination is dynamically displayed can be the first gaming state in which the second determination is easily performed, and thus the length of the period during which the first gaming state is set Can be set in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the second determination unit is configured to determine the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the first determination unit determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed more than the first bonus game executed based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means. Since the first game state can be easily played, the first game state can be set to a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in the hope that the first game state is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry A third ball entry means different from the means, a first state in which a game ball can be guided to the second ball entry means, and a third state in which entering the second ball entry means becomes more difficult than the first state. And a variable means that can be changed to two states, wherein the first determination means is configured to determine whether the first ball or the second ball is entered by a game ball. The second determination means is configured to be capable of performing the determination, and the second determination means is configured to be capable of performing the second determination based on a game ball entering the third ball entry means, and in the second game state, A gaming machine wherein the variable means is controlled to be more easily changed to the first state than in the first game state. 3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to make the first determination more difficult in the first game state than in the second game state. Therefore, in the state in which the first game state is set, it is possible to easily perform the game in which the third ball entry means enters the ball, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player. .

  In the gaming machine A3, after the first privilege game is executed, a high probability that the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result by the first determination can be set to a higher probability than a normal time. Setting means, wherein the gaming state setting means is displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means. The gaming machine A4, wherein the first gaming state is set based on the start of dynamic display of the first identification information.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3. That is, when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the dynamic display of the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result by the first determination is performed. Since the first game state is set based on the start, the process until the first game state is set can be set stepwise. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to continuously play the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second privilege game has a smaller number of privileges that can be given to a player than the first privilege game. Machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4. That is, in the second privilege game, the number of privileges that can be given to the player is set smaller than in the first privilege game. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving.

<Feature B group> (Set game content and special 1 and special 2 at once)
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and the first identification information displayed on the first display unit. Dynamic display means, a first dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination. Determining means capable of executing the determination, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determining means, and dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means. A second dynamic display means for displaying, a second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and a second dynamic display period determining means for specifying the first display means. When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result of is displayed, A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game and executes the second bonus game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display unit. In the gaming machine, period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed; An effect determination unit that determines an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination unit, and the effect determined by the effect determination unit. A gaming machine B1 comprising: an effect executing means for executing.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) that is advantageous to a player during a period from the end of a bonus game to the next jackpot in accordance with a lottery result (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application, First Publication No. H11-26464). 2012-217766 gazette). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the period during which the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set during the advantageous gaming state. If the lottery is immediately won by the next lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened. If the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next round, the advantageous gaming state is set. Is set longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous game state provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming property of giving a bonus to a player during a period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the bonus given to the player is greatly different. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine further improved in the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination device is determined by the effect determination device. Since it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information in association with the dynamic display period, it is possible to provide a player with a pleasure of predicting a future game based on the effect performed. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1, the effect determination unit determines the effect based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determination unit and the game content of the first privilege game. A gaming machine B2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, by grasping the effect performed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed and the game of the first privilege game are realized. The content and can be predicted. Therefore, it is possible to make the player gaze at the effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a first gaming state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination. A game state setting unit that can be set, wherein the game state setting unit dynamically displays the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result A gaming machine B3 for executing the first gaming state during a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1 or B2. That is, since the first gaming state is set during the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result that the first privilege game is to be executed, the period until the first privilege game is executed is set. Can be used to perform a game aiming at the second privilege game. Further, by grasping the effect performed by the effect executing means, it is possible to predict a period in which the first game state is set, and thus it is possible to enthusiastically perform a game during the first game state. effective.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, a normal first privilege game as the first privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, and a small first privilege game in which the number of privileges granted to the player is smaller than the normal first privilege game. And a first privilege game setting means that can set the first dynamic display period determining means, wherein the first dynamic display period determining means can determine a first period and a second period longer than the first period. The effect determination means, wherein the small first privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, and the second period is determined by the period discrimination means; A gaming machine B4 wherein an effect in the same mode is determined when one privilege game is executed and the first period is determined by the period determining means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the effect determining means has a different combination of two elements for determining the effect content, the effect determining means has the same mode. Since the effect is determined, by grasping the contents of the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player predict a plurality of future game situations in a plurality of patterns. Then, it is possible to gradually increase the accuracy of the prediction depending on the progress of the first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further enhance the fun to be predicted for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine B4, the effect determination unit determines a specific effect when the normal first bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution unit and the second period is determined by the period determination unit. A gaming machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B4. In other words, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to inform the player that the most advantageous game content has been set, so that it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

<Characteristic C group> (Rush notification)
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and the first identification information displayed on the first display unit. Dynamic display means, a first dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination. Determining means capable of executing the determination, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determining means, and dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means. A second dynamic display means for displaying, a second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and a second dynamic display period determining means for specifying the first display means. When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result of is displayed, A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game and executes the second bonus game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display unit. In the gaming machine, a first gaming state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination and a second gaming state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination can be set. When the first game state is set by the game state setting means and the game state setting means, it is determined that the first game state has been set based on the state of the dynamic display of the second identification information. A notification timing determining means for determining a notification timing for notifying a notification mode for indicating to a player.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, in accordance with the lottery result, an advantageous game state (probable change state) that is advantageous to the player is set during a period from the end of the privilege game to the next jackpot winning, and the player is notified that the game state has been changed. There has been proposed a gaming machine that performs an effect of performing the following (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-described gaming machine is configured to execute an effect to notify the player based on the setting of the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In spite of that, even if it is not possible to execute a new lottery, the player is notified that the gaming state has been set, which gives the player discomfort. was there. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine further improved in the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine C1, it is possible to determine the notification timing for notifying that the first game state in which the second determination is easily executed is set based on the dynamic display state of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the notification timing for notifying that the first game state has been set.

  In the gaming machine C1, the second dynamic display means can dynamically display the second identification information in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine C2, wherein the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on a result of the first determination by the first determining means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, when the first game state set based on the determination result of the first determination unit that is executed separately from the second determination unit is set, the notification is performed based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. Timing is determined. Therefore, the first identification information and the second identification information which can be dynamically displayed at the same time can be combined to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  The gaming machine C2 has dynamic display determination means for determining whether the second identification information is dynamically displayed when the first game state is set, and the notification timing determination means includes When the first display state is determined by the dynamic display determination means to be not dynamically displayed, the notification timing is determined based on the time when the first game state is set. Gaming machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2. That is, when the second determination can be performed immediately after the first gaming state is set, it is immediately notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in the first game state for a longer time.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the notification timing determination means ends the dynamic display of the second identification information when the dynamic display determination means determines that the second identification information is dynamically displayed. A game machine C4 for determining the notification timing based on the timing at which the notification is performed.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2 or C3. That is, even if the first game state is set, during the period in which the second determination cannot be performed, the fact that the first game state has been set is not notified, and the second determination can be performed. In this case, it is notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the second determination cannot be performed despite the notification that the first game state has been set, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. There is an effect that can be.

  The gaming machine C4 includes a remaining period determining unit that determines a period from a timing at which the dynamic display of the second identification information ends to the end of the first gaming state, based on a determination result by the remaining period determining unit. A gaming machine C5 comprising notification determining means for determining whether or not the notification timing is determined by the notification timing determining means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, it is determined whether or not to determine the notification timing based on the period during which the second determination can be performed during the first gaming state. For example, the second determination is performed during the first gaming state. When the executable period becomes extremely short, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified that the first game state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first game state from ending in a short period of time and giving the player an unpleasant sensation despite notifying the player that the first game state has been set. There is an effect that can be.

<Feature D group>
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and the first identification information displayed on the first display unit. Dynamic display means for a predetermined period of time, a second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and a second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means. A second display means, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means for a predetermined period, and the first display means for displaying a specific first determination result on the first display means. When the identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. A privilege game execution means to be executed, and a plurality of privilege contents And a second privilege game type setting unit that sets the first identification information in a state in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display unit. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed, and when the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display means, A game comprising stop control means for executing stop control for dynamic display by the first dynamic display means based on the privilege contents set by the second privilege game type setting means. Machine D1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, have a gaming property of executing a plurality of lotteries simultaneously (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type). In a gaming machine having such a gaming property, when a lottery result of one lottery is a hit, a privilege game advantageous to a player is executed, and another lottery game being executed is forcibly removed. A method of terminating the process has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine, regardless of the type of the bonus game, forcibly removes the other lottery and displays it based on the fact that the lottery result for executing the bonus game is stopped and displayed. There is a problem of giving discomfort to the person. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine further improved in the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the content of the stop control for the first dynamic display can be set in accordance with the content of the second privilege game to be executed, thereby suppressing a situation in which the player is uncomfortable. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine D1, the stop control means includes a forced stop control for stopping and displaying dynamic display by the first dynamic display means with the first identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific first determination result. And a temporary stop control for stopping measurement of a period dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, it is possible to set whether the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from being given an excessive privilege, and to execute the privilege game in which the small privilege is given, thereby discarding the privilege game in which the big privilege is given. This has the effect of being able to suppress this.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second privilege game type setting means can set a first privilege type and a second privilege type that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege type. The game machine D3, wherein the control means executes the forced stop control when the second special type is set by the second privilege game type setting means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1 or D2. That is, when the second privilege type that is advantageous to the player is set, the dynamic display can be forcibly stopped by the first dynamic display means, so that an excessive privilege is given to the player. There is an effect that it can suppress that.

  In the gaming machine D3, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the dynamic display performed by the first dynamic display means ends, and the specific first determination is performed. Until the first identification information for indicating a result is displayed on the first display means, the second privilege game type setting means invalidates the setting of the second privilege type by the second privilege type setting means. A gaming machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D3. That is, when the determination result of the first determination unit is a specific first determination result, the setting of the second privilege type is invalidated by the invalidation unit during the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first privilege game and the second privilege game in which the second privilege type is set from being continuously executed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive privilege from being given to the player. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second privilege game type setting means sets the first privilege type and the second privilege type based on a determination result of the second determination means, A gaming machine D5 characterized in that the first privilege type is more easily set than the second privilege type.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3 or D4, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the first privilege type is more easily set than the second privilege type, even if the second privilege game is executed more frequently, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege. There is.

<Other Thought 1> (The latent state can be set before and after the jackpot game)
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and the first identification information displayed on the first display unit. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the information, second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means. And executing the first privilege game when the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, and displaying the specific second determination result on the second display means. When the second identification information for indicating is displayed, the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination in a gaming machine having a bonus game execution unit that executes a second bonus game. A first gaming state, wherein the first determination is executed rather than the second determination And a game state setting means for setting a second game state. The game state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information when a predetermined first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine for setting the first gaming state during a predetermined period, and, when a predetermined second condition is satisfied, setting the first gaming state after the first privilege game is completed. E1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) that is advantageous to a player during a period from the end of a bonus game to the next jackpot in accordance with a lottery result (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application, First Publication No. H11-26464). 2012-217766 gazette). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the period during which the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set during the advantageous gaming state. If the lottery is immediately won by the next lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened. If the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next round, the advantageous gaming state is set. Is set longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous game state provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming property of giving a bonus to a player during a period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the bonus given to the player is greatly different. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine further improved in the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine E1, since the timing at which the first gaming state is set can be divided into before and after the first privilege game, unexpected games can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic G group> (RUSH RUSH during the symbol confirmation period)
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and the first identification information displayed on the first display unit. Stop display means for stopping and displaying, a stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period for stopping and displaying the first identification information by the first stop display means, and a second determination capable of executing a second determination Means, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. Is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. Gaming machine having a bonus game execution means, A gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination and a second gaming state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination. Wherein the game state setting means is capable of setting the first game state in the stop display period in which the first identification information is stopped and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine G1 characterized by the following.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) that is advantageous to a player during a period from the end of a bonus game to the next jackpot in accordance with a lottery result (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application, First Publication No. H11-26464). 2012-217766 gazette). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the period during which the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set during the advantageous gaming state. In the case that the next winning is immediately won by the drawn lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened. If the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next winning, the advantageous gaming state is set. Is set longer. That is, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous game state is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming property of giving a bonus to a player during a period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the bonus given to the player is greatly different. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine further improved in the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine G1, since the stop display period can be set in advance as the period in which the first gaming state is set, there is an effect that the period in which the first gaming state is executed can be appropriately managed. . In addition, since the first game state is set during a period in which the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination is stopped and displayed, the game content after the first game state is completed is provided to the player in advance. I can grasp it. With such a configuration, for example, when the first game state is set in a state where a specific determination result is displayed as the determination result of the first determination, after the first game state ends, The execution of the first privilege game can be grasped in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, the stop display period setting means sets stop display periods of different lengths based on the determination result of the first determination means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the stop display period is set based on the determination result of the first determining means, so that the first privilege game is determined based on the determination result of the first determining means. Is performed, and the length of the stop display period is determined. Therefore, the player can be more closely watched on the determination result of the first determination unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G2, the stop display period setting means, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, displays a longer stop display than the case other than the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that a period is easily set.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the stop display period is longer than in the case other than the specific first determination result. Can be easily set, so that the first game state in which a longer period is set can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the stop display period setting means can set a stop display period of a different length when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2 or G3, the length of the stop display period can be varied even in the case of the specific first determination result. Therefore, even in the case of the specific first determination result, since the period in which the first game state is set is different, the player is eager to play the game so that the longer first game state is set. There is an effect that can be made.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the second determination means may determine the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G5 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed more than the first bonus game executed based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means. Since the first game state can be easily played, the first game state can be set to a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in the hope that the first game state is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic H group>
A first determination unit capable of performing a first determination, a first display unit displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit, and a second determination unit capable of performing a second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means; and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. When displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. A first gaming state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination. And a game state setting means capable of setting a game state. The setting means enables the first game state to be set during a first period in which the second determination can be performed when the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are both satisfied. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that:

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) that is advantageous to a player during a period from the end of a bonus game to the next jackpot in accordance with a lottery result (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application, First Publication No. H11-26464). 2012-217766 gazette). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, whether or not an advantageous gaming state which is advantageous to the player is set is determined by only one lottery result. There was a problem that a game could not be performed while having fun. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine further improved in the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine H1, when the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are both satisfied, the first gaming state can be set for the first period, so that the second determination is made during the first gaming state. Can be surely executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the first game state is ended without performing the second determination even though the first game state is set, and the player is dissatisfied. No games can be offered.

  In the gaming machine H1, the game machine H1 has a first judgment number measuring means capable of measuring the number of the first judgments executed by the first judgment means, and the first judgment number counted by the first judgment number measuring means is provided. The gaming machine H2, wherein the first predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of times reaches a predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, when the number of first determinations reaches a predetermined number, the first predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the first determination by the first determination unit is performed. By doing so, the game content can be reliably advanced toward the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition. Therefore, the state where the first predetermined condition is not satisfied when playing the game for a long time can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1 or H2, if the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the second predetermined condition is satisfied. There is an effect that an easy game can be provided.

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state even when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied. Setting the first gaming state during a second period during which the second determination is difficult to execute when the first gaming state is set based on satisfaction of the first predetermined condition. A gaming machine H4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2 or H3, when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set only in the second period in which the second determination is difficult to execute. Thereby, the first game state set when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied can be set as a game state disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game so that both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied.

  In the gaming machine H4, when the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition, the gaming state setting means is shorter than the first period, and A gaming machine H5 for setting the first gaming state for a third period longer than two periods.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H4, when only the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set for the third period, so that the first gaming state is set higher than the first predetermined condition. There is an effect that a game can be enthusiastically performed to satisfy the second predetermined condition first.

<Characteristics I>
A first determination unit capable of performing a first determination, a first display unit displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit, and a second determination unit capable of performing a second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means; and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. When displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. Game execution means, a first game state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination can be set. Game state setting means, the game state setting means. The means enables a third game state in which the first game state is more easily set than the second game state to be set for a predetermined period, and includes a first period and a third period in which the third game state is set. , A third game state period setting means capable of setting a second period longer than the first period, and the first period set by the third game state period setting means is the second period A gaming machine I1 characterized in that the first gaming state is more easily set than is set.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that performs a game in which a plurality of gaming states are shifted in stages in accordance with a lottery result, and that can set an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to a player (for example, JP-A-2005-058267). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine aims to set the advantageous gaming state because the ease of setting the advantageous gaming state in the gaming state (semi-advantageous gaming state) in which the advantageous gaming state is easily set is single. There is a problem that the content of the game played is monotonous. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine further improved in the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine I1, by setting different periods for setting the third gaming state in which the first gaming state is likely to be set, the degree of expectation that the first gaming state is set in the state in which the third gaming state is set. Can be different. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the setting contents of the third game state, the player can actively play the game even in the game process until the first game state is set. There is an effect that it can be performed.

  The gaming machine I1 has a progress determining means for determining the elapse of the predetermined period set by the third gaming state period setting means, and the gaming state setting means uses the elapse determining means to elapse the predetermined period. The gaming machine I2, wherein the first gaming state is set based on a first setting condition that is satisfied when the determination is made.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I1, the first gaming state is set when the period in which the third gaming state is set has elapsed, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the gaming state setting unit may be configured to perform the operation when the third determination state is set and the first determination result by the first determination unit is the specific first determination result. A gaming machine I3 for setting the first gaming state based on the establishment of a second setting condition that is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I1 or I2, even when the third gaming state in which the first setting condition is difficult to be satisfied, that is, the long-term third gaming state is set, During the third gaming state, the first gaming state can be set based on the determination result of the first determining means. Therefore, different transition conditions can be aimed at in order to set the first gaming state according to the set period of the third gaming state, and the motivation to play depends on the length of the set period of the third gaming state. It is possible to suppress the reduction.

  In the gaming machines I2 and I3, the third gaming state period setting means can set a third period longer than the second period, and the elapse determining means has determined the elapse of the third period. In this case, the gaming machine I4 has a condition restricting means that does not satisfy the first setting condition.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the elapse of the third period is determined, the first setting condition is not satisfied by the condition restricting means, so that the first gaming state is set. Can be reliably restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress providing an excessively advantageous state to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the game device includes first game state period setting means for setting a period in which the first game state is set, and the first game state period setting means comprises: A gaming machine wherein the period in which the first gaming state is set is set longer when it is determined that the first period has elapsed than when it is determined that the second period has elapsed. I5.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, it is determined that the second period has elapsed after the first period is longer than when the second period is determined to have elapsed. A game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can watch the discrimination result of the progress discrimination means.

<Feature J group> (Surely small hit RUSH for a predetermined period)
A first determination unit capable of performing a first determination, a first display unit displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit, and a second determination capable of performing the second determination Means, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. Is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. A first gaming state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination. Game state setting means capable of setting two game states, and the game state An advantageous period setting means for setting an advantageous period in which the first gaming state can be continuously set by the setting means; a first ending condition which is satisfied when the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means has elapsed; Or end means for terminating the first game state when a second end condition different from the first end condition is satisfied, wherein the second end condition is satisfied when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied. A gaming machine J1 having end restriction means for restricting the establishment of the game machine J1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that performs a game in which a plurality of gaming states are shifted in stages in accordance with a lottery result, and that can set an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to a player (for example, JP-A-2005-058267). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set varies based on the result of the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, the advantageous gaming state is provided to the player for a predetermined period. There is a problem in that despite the difficulty in setting the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state ends in a short period of time, and the willingness to play decreases. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine further improved in the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine J1, when the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, the satisfaction of the second ending condition can be limited by the ending restriction means. Therefore, the first game state can be continuously set during the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine J1, the gaming state setting means can set an advantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition can be satisfied and a disadvantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition cannot be satisfied. A gaming machine J2, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine J2, an advantageous first gaming state and a disadvantageous first gaming state can be set by the gaming state setting means, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, so that the gaming state setting means is more advantageous. There is an effect that a game can be enthusiastically performed so that the first game state is set.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the result of the first determination by the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied. J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1 or J2, if the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play a game so that the determination result becomes the specific first determination result.

  A gaming machine J4, characterized in that the gaming machine J2 or J3 has a notifying means for notifying that the advantageous first gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J2 or J3, the fact that the first advantageous gaming state is set is notified by the notification means, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. This has the effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines J2 to J4, a determination unit configured to determine that the second end condition is satisfied during a period in which the advantageous first game state is set. A gaming machine J5 having second notification means for notifying that the second end condition has been satisfied based on the determination result.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the second notification means that the condition for establishing the second end condition is satisfied during the period in which the advantageous first gaming state is set. When the first gaming state set this time is not the advantageous first gaming state but the disadvantaged first gaming state, it is determined whether the first gaming state has ended. The player can be determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can experience the superiority of the advantageous first gaming state set this time.

<Characteristic K group> (A period in which the number of times saved is not subtracted is provided during the time saved)
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and the first identification information displayed on the first display unit. A first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first determination information for a predetermined first period, and the first determination when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means. Game state setting means capable of setting the advantageous game state for facilitating the execution of the game, a period measuring means for measuring the period of the advantageous game state set by the game state setting means, and the predetermined state by the period measuring means. When a period is measured, ending means for ending the advantageous game state, and when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied, measurement restricting means for restricting measurement of the period of the advantageous game state by the period measuring means, Having Gaming machine K1, characterized in that.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to a player during a period from the end of a privilege game to the next jackpot according to a lottery result (for example, JP 2012-217766 gazette). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured such that a period until the number of lotteries reaches a predetermined number is set as a period in which an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, so that the advantageous gaming state is set. However, there is a problem that a period of time can be easily predicted. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine further improved in the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the measurement of the predetermined period in which the advantageous gaming state is set can be restricted by the measurement restricting means, so that the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set can be extended. Therefore, an unexpected game can be provided to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K1, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, A second dynamic display unit for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period; and a method for displaying the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display unit. A first privilege game, a privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, And the second dynamic display means can dynamically display the second identification information while the first dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information. And the determination result of the second determination means is the specific second determination result. Gaming machine K2, characterized in that the case, in which the predetermined limit condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in the configuration in which the second identification information can be dynamically displayed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the second determination unit Is a specific second determination result, a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied. Thus, the first determination by the first determination unit can be performed in a state where the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K2, while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is being executed by the second dynamic display means, the measurement restricting means sets the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means. A gaming machine K3 for limiting measurement of a period.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is being executed by the second dynamic display means, the period of the advantageous gaming state is measured. Is limited. Therefore, the first determination by the first determination unit can be performed in a state where the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, there is provided a notifying unit for notifying that the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring unit is restricted by the measurement restricting unit. Gaming machine K4.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, it is notified that the measurement of the period is restricted by the measurement restricting means by the notifying means, so that the player can easily understand the game. There is an effect that it can be provided.

<Character L group> (Small hit RUSH with different termination conditions)
A first determination unit capable of performing a first determination, a first display unit displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit, and a second determination unit capable of performing a second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means; and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. When displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. A first gaming state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination. And a game state setting means capable of setting a game state. The setting means sets the first game state when a predetermined first condition is satisfied or when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition is satisfied. The case where the first game state is set based on the second condition being satisfied is easier to continue the first game state than the case where the first game state is set based on the fact that the first game state is set. A gaming machine L1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that performs a game in which a plurality of gaming states are shifted in stages in accordance with a lottery result, and that can set an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to a player (for example, JP-A-2005-058267). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the termination condition of the advantageous gaming state is a single, it is not possible to make the continuity of the set advantageous gaming state different, so that the player in the advantageous gaming state cannot There is a problem that the game to be provided becomes monotonous and the willingness to play is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine further improved in the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the first gaming state can be set by the gaming state setting means in the first gaming state that is easily set continuously and the first gaming state that is difficult to set continuously. Even after the game is performed, the player can play the game while expecting the first game state to be continued for a long time, and this has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L1, the gaming state setting means sets a gaming state different from the first gaming state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied in a state where the first gaming state is set, When the first game state is set based on the establishment of the second condition, the predetermined termination is performed more than when the first game state is set based on the establishment of the first condition. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that the conditions are difficult to be satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the first game state is set based on the establishment of the second condition, rather than when the first game state is set based on the establishment of the first condition. When the gaming state is set, the first gaming state can be made more difficult to end. Therefore, since the player can set the first game state that is easy to end and the first game state that is hard to end, the first game state that is hard to end even after the first game state is set. It is possible to play a game while desiring that the game state is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L2, there is provided end condition setting means capable of setting a first end condition and a second end condition different from the first end condition as the predetermined end condition, and the second condition is satisfied. The gaming machine L3, wherein the first ending condition is not satisfied when the first gaming state is set based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L2, when the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the second condition, the first ending condition is not established, so that it is difficult to end. The first game state can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game in order to satisfy the second condition.

  In the gaming machine L3, the ending condition setting means sets the second ending condition when the determination result of the first determining means is the specific first determination result. L4.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3, the second end condition is set when the determination result of the first determination unit is a specific first determination result. Thereby, when the first game state ends based on the satisfaction of the second end condition, a bonus game can be provided. Therefore, even if the first game state is ended, the privilege can be given to the player, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  The gaming machine L5, further comprising a notifying unit for notifying that the first gaming state has been set based on the establishment of the second condition in the gaming machine L3 or L4.

  According to the gaming machine L5, it is notified by the notification means that the first end condition is not satisfied, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Characteristic M group>
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and a first determination specific to the first display unit When the first identification information for indicating a result is displayed, a privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game, and when the predetermined setting condition is satisfied, the first determining means executes the privilege game. A gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state in which the result of the first determination is more likely to be the specific first determination result than the normal gaming state. In a state where is set, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a game state transition unit that transitions the game state from the advantageous game state to the normal game state, and restricts establishment of the predetermined transition condition. Transfer Gaming machine M1, characterized in that those having a condition limiting means.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, a configuration in which an advantageous game state (probable change state) that is advantageous to the player is set during a period from the end of the privilege game to the next jackpot according to the lottery result, in addition to the predetermined lottery ( There has been proposed a gaming machine for terminating the advantageous gaming state when the player wins a falling lottery. (For example, JP 2013-152A). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured so that the falling lottery is executed based on the execution of the winning or losing lottery of the game, there is a sense of danger that the advantageous gaming state always ends for the player. There was a problem that it was impossible to play the game with peace of mind. In the above-described gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which a player can play a game with a sense of security and the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the gaming machine M1, since the transition of the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state can be restricted by the transition condition limiting means, the gaming state is transitioned from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state. You can set a non-playing game period. Therefore, there is an effect that a period in which a player can play a game with peace of mind can be provided.

  In the gaming machine M1, the first determination means executes the first determination when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, and executes the first determination when the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied. 1 has a special determination means capable of executing a special determination different from the determination, and when the determination result by the special determination means is a specific special determination result, the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. A gaming machine M2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, a special determination is performed when the first determination condition is satisfied, and when the determination result is a specific special determination result, a predetermined transition condition is set. Holds. Therefore, the determination by the first determination unit and the determination by the special determination unit can be set in association with each other, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  In the gaming machine M1, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result, a second privilege game different from the first privilege game is executed. A second privilege game execution means, and a variable ball entry means variably operated to an open state in which a game ball can enter the inside when the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means. A variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball input means, and a specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball input means, and the specific area is provided with a game ball. The gaming machine M3, wherein the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the game machine passes.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, a predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through a specific area. Therefore, the transition condition can be satisfied at a timing different from the determination timing of the first determination unit, so that a surprising game can be provided to the player. Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player fires the game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

  In the gaming machine M3, the variable control means includes a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball-in means easily passes through the specific area, and a first variable control in which the ball is more difficult to pass through the specific area than the first variable control. A gaming machine M4 characterized by being able to set two variable controls.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, the variable control means makes it possible for the ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to easily pass through the specific area, and the second variable control that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the specific area. Can be set, so that a surprising game can be provided to the player. Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player fires the game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

  The gaming machine M5, further comprising a notifying unit for notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control unit.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M4, the fact that the second variable control has been set is reported by the reporting means, so that a game that can be easily understood by the player can be provided. is there.

<Character N group> (Small hit game selection)
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and a first determination specific to the first display unit A bonus game executing means for executing a first bonus game when the first identification information for displaying a result is displayed, and a specification in which a determination result of the first determination means is different from the specific first determination result When the result of the second determination is a second bonus game executing means for executing a second bonus game different from the first bonus game, the second bonus game is executed by the second bonus game executing means. In the case, the game ball has a variable ball entry means variably operated to an open state in which it can enter the ball, and variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entry means, Provide a specific area inside the variable ball entry means through which game balls can pass Gaming machine N1, wherein said when a certain region game ball passes through, and has a game state setting means capable of setting a disadvantage playing state disadvantageous to the player.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player A gaming machine has been proposed in which an advantageous privilege game is executed, and when a game ball passes through a specific area during the privilege game, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player can be set (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-163873). 2013-152 publication). In the above-described gaming machine, the advantageous game state is set by the passing of the game ball through the specific area, so that the player is gazed at whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine further improved in the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the disadvantageous gaming state is set when the game ball passes through the specific area, so that there is an effect that a novel gaming property can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine N1, the variable control means includes: a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball-in means easily passes through the specific area; and a first variable control in which the ball hardly passes through the specific area than the first variable control. A gaming machine N2, wherein two variable controls can be set.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1, the variable control means allows the ball entering the variable ball-in means to easily pass through the specific area, and the first variable control is more effective than the first variable control. Since any one of the second variable control that is difficult to pass through the specific area is set, when the game ball is fired according to the content of the variable control to be executed, the fired game ball can pass through the specific area. Sex can be different. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a pleasure in which the player determines whether or not to fire the game ball.

  In the gaming machine N2, the second privilege game executed by the second privilege game execution means has a notifying means capable of notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control means. A gaming machine N3 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N2, the fact that the second variable control is set is notified by the notifying means, so that the player can determine whether or not to fire the game ball. Can provide helpful information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a pleasure in which the player determines whether or not to fire the game ball.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, there is provided a detecting unit for detecting that a game ball has passed through the specific area, and an invalidating unit for invalidating a detection result by the detecting unit. Is a game machine N4 for invalidating a detection result by the detection means based on a determination result of the first determination means.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the detection result by the detecting means can be invalidated by the invalidating means, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine N4, while the detection result by the detection means is invalidated by the invalidation means, a measurement means for counting the number of game balls detected by the detection means, and a measurement result of the measurement means. A gaming machine N5 comprising: a measurement result notifying unit that notifies information based on the result.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N4, the information based on the measurement result of the measuring means is notified by the measurement result notifying means during the period in which the detection result by the detecting means is invalidated. The player can grasp the number detected by the detection means during the period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily feel superiority.

<Character O group> (Time saving ends based on the condition that was satisfied first among the multiple conditions)
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, a first display unit on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination unit is displayed, and the first identification information displayed on the first display unit. A first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first privilege information, and a privilege for executing the first privilege game when the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the first display means. Game execution means, a first game state in which the first determination is easy to be executed, a second game state in which the first determination is harder to execute than the first game state, and a settable game state setting means. The game machine has end means for terminating the first game state when a predetermined first end condition is satisfied or when a second end condition different from the first end condition is satisfied. , The ending means includes: the first ending condition; and the second ending condition. Gaming machine O1, characterized in that the conditions of, but to terminate the first game state based on the end condition is satisfied first.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2015-12907). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the subtraction of the period in which the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) which is advantageous to the player is set becomes the start timing of the change of the special symbol. There is a problem that the player is not able to play the game, which makes the player uncomfortable. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine further improved in the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine O1, a first ending condition and a second ending condition are provided as conditions for ending the first gaming state, and the first gaming state is ended when any one of the ending conditions is ended. Thus, there is an effect that the first game state can be surely ended.

  In the gaming machine O1, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, A second dynamic display unit for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period, wherein the privilege game execution unit is configured to display a specific second determination result on the second display unit. The second privilege game is executed when the second identification information is displayed, and the second dynamic game is performed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed by a dynamic display means, and the first determination condition is satisfied by the execution of the first determination means, and the second determination means is executed. That the second termination condition is satisfied. Game machine O2 to.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the first termination condition is satisfied based on the first determination by the first determination unit, and the second termination condition is determined based on the second determination by the second determination unit. Holds, while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. However, there is an effect that the first game state can be appropriately ended.

  In the gaming machine O2, a first execution number measurement unit that measures the number of executions of the first determination unit, a second execution number measurement unit that measures the number of executions of the second determination unit, and the first execution number measurement unit And the sum of the measurement result of the second execution count measurement unit and the measurement result of the second execution count measurement unit, and the execution count of the first determination unit as a first period in which the first game state is continuously set. A first period setting unit that sets a predetermined number of times that is the sum of the number of executions of the second determination unit, and the execution of the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination unit reaches the predetermined number of times. And execution determination means for determining that the dynamic display is being executed by the second determination means while the state determination means determines that the dynamic display is being executed. Is performed, the second judgment is executed. Gaming machine O3, characterized in that than be one in which to establish the second end condition before.

  According to the game O3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O2, the second end condition can be satisfied even during the dynamic display in which the first end condition can be satisfied. Can be terminated.

  In the gaming machine O3, the first ending condition is that the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means is the predetermined number of times has ended, and the number of executions of the first determination means is A gaming machine O4, which is established at any time before the first determination corresponding to a case where the number of times exceeds a predetermined number is performed.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O3, the first determination condition is that the first determination is made after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means is the predetermined number of times is completed. Since the condition is satisfied until the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the means is larger than the predetermined number is performed, the predetermined first period can be set longer. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine O4, a third determination unit capable of executing a third determination, a third display unit displaying third identification information for indicating a determination result by the third determination unit, and a third display unit. A third dynamic display unit for dynamically displaying the third identification information, and a third privilege when the third identification information for indicating a specific third determination result is stopped and displayed on the third display unit. A third privilege game executing means for executing a game, wherein the third judging means sets the second game state when the first game state is set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine O5 characterized by being more easily executed than in the case of

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O4, when the first gaming state is set, the first gaming state is set because it has the third determination means that is easily executed. By increasing the time period, the period during which the third determination unit can be easily executed can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In any of the above-described gaming machines, the gaming machine γ1 is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a dynamic display of an identification information sequence composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, followed by a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the above-described gaming machines, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. The requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode so that balls can be won, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including data written on a magnetic card as well as a prize ball) is given.

In any of the above-described gaming machines, the gaming machine γ3 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, , A predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player There is a game in which an advantageous privilege game is executed (JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further interest in games.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 has a first determination unit capable of executing a first determination and a first identification information indicating a determination result by the first determination unit. A first display means, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, When the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification for indicating the specific second determination result on the second display means. A bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game when the information is displayed, a first gaming state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination, and the second determination A second game state in which the first determination is more easily performed than in the second game state. State setting means, advantageous period setting means for setting an advantageous period in which the first game state can be continuously set by the gaming state setting means, and when the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means elapses Ending means for ending the first game state when a second ending condition different from the first ending condition or the second ending condition different from the first ending condition is satisfied, and a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied. In such a case, there is provided an end restricting means for restricting establishment of the second end condition.
The gaming machine of the technical concept 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical concept 1, wherein the gaming state setting means is configured to satisfy the first advantageous gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied and the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied. The disadvantageous first gaming state, which cannot be obtained, can be set.
The gaming machine of the technical concept 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical concept 1 or 2, wherein the predetermined continuation is performed when a result of the first determination by the first determination unit is the specific first determination result. The condition is satisfied.
The gaming machine of the technical concept 4 is a gaming machine according to the technical concept 2 or 3, further comprising a notifying unit for notifying that the advantageous first gaming state is set.
The gaming machine of the technical concept 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 2 to 4, wherein the condition for establishing the second end condition is satisfied during a period in which the advantageous first gaming state is set. And a second notifying unit for notifying that the second end condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the determining unit.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first determination means capable of performing the first determination, and the first display means for displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means; A second determination unit capable of executing a second determination, a second display unit on which second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination unit is displayed, and a first display unit specific to the first display unit. When the first identification information for indicating the determination result is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. And a bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game when the second game is executed, wherein the first game state makes the second judgment easier to be executed than the first judgment, and the second game is executed more than the second judgment. Game state setting means capable of setting a second game state that facilitates execution of the first determination An advantageous period setting means for setting an advantageous period in which the first gaming state can be continuously set by the gaming state setting means; and a second advantageous state established when the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means elapses. End means for ending the first game state when a first ending condition or a second ending condition different from the first ending condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, It has an end restricting means for restricting establishment of the second end condition.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming state setting means can set an advantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition can be satisfied and a disadvantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition cannot be satisfied. .
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are obtained. That is, the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied when the result of the first determination by the first determination means is the specific first determination result.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2 or 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, there is provided a notifying means for notifying that the first advantageous gaming state is set.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 2 to 4, the following effects are obtained. That is, during the period in which the advantageous first game state is set, the game device includes a determination unit that determines that a condition for satisfying the second end condition is satisfied, and based on a determination result of the determination unit, It has a second notifying means for notifying that the condition for satisfying the second termination condition has been satisfied.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
S306 First discriminating means S905 Second discriminating means S2204 Part of bonus game executing means S2804 gaming state setting means

Claims (2)

A first determination means capable of executing a first determination,
A first display means first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determining means is displayed,
A second determination means capable of executing a second determination,
A second display means for second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determining means is displayed,
The first display means, performing a first award game if the first identification information for indicating the first determination result given as the result of the first determination by the first determining means is displayed, the on the second display means, award game executing said second identification information for indicating the second determination result given as the result of the second determination by the second determination means to perform a second award game when displayed And a game machine having:
A first game condition to facilitate the second determination is performed than the first determination, configurable gaming state set and a second game state to difficult to said second determination is performed than the first gaming state Means,
And advantageously period setting means capable of setting a first period as a preferred period the first game condition that obtained continuously set by the player state setting means,
The first game condition is established when a first end condition established when the first period set by the advantageous period setting means elapses or a second end condition different from the first end condition is established. Terminating means capable of terminating;
The game state setting means can set the first game state in which the second end condition can be satisfied when the first condition is satisfied, and when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine, wherein the first game state in which the second end condition cannot be satisfied can be set . 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a notifying unit capable of notifying that the first privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing unit .

Images